Operating Instructions
About This Machine
1
Getting Started
2
Entering Text
3
Appendix
Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the
Safety Information in this manual before using the machine.
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine. For your
safety and benefit, read this manual carefully before using the machine. Keep this manual in a handy
place for quick reference.
Important
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine.
Notes:
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Depending on which country you are in, certain units may be optional. For details, please contact your
local dealer.
Laser Safety:
CDRH Regulations
This equipment complies with requirements of 21 CFR subchapter J for class 1 laser products. This
equipment contains a 5-milliwatt, 760-800 nanometer wavelength, GaAlAs laser diode. This equipment
does not emit hazardous light, since the beam is totally enclosed during all customer modes of operation and maintenance.
Caution:
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.
For good copy quality, the supplier recommends that you use genuine toner from the supplier.
The supplier shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts
other than genuine parts from the supplier with your office products.
Power Source
120V, 60Hz, 8A or more
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above. For details about power source,
see Troubleshooting.
Manuals for This Machine
Refer to the manuals that are relevant to what you want to do with the machine.
Manuals for machines with copier function only or with the DDST Unit are different. See “Manuals for Machines with Copier Function Only or with the DDST
Unit”.
Important
❒ Media differ according to manual.
❒ The printed and electronic versions of a manual have the same contents.
❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader must be installed in order to view the
manuals as PDF files.
❒ Depending on which country you are in, there may also be html manuals. To
view these manuals, a Web browser must be installed.
❖ About This Machine
Be sure to read the Safety Information in this manual before using the machine.
This manual provides an introduction to the functions of the machine. It also
explains the control panel, preparation procedures for using the machine,
how to enter text, and how to install the CD-ROMs provided.
❖ General Settings Guide
Explains User Tools settings, and Address Book procedures such as registering fax numbers, e-mail addresses, and user codes. Also refer to this manual
for explanations on how to connect the machine.
❖ Troubleshooting
Provides a guide to solving common problems, and explains how to replace
paper, toner, and other consumables.
❖ Security Reference
This manual is for administrators of the machine. It explains security functions that the administrators can use to protect data from being tampered
with, or prevent the machine from unauthorized use.
Also refer to this manual for the procedures for registering administrators, as
well as setting user and administrator authentication.
❖ Copy Reference
Explains Copier functions and operations. Also refer to this manual for explanations on how to place originals.
❖ Facsimile Reference
Explains Facsimile functions and operations.
❖ Printer Reference
Explains Printer functions and operations.
❖ Scanner Reference
Explains Scanner functions and operations.
i
❖ Network Guide
Explains how to configure and operate the machine in a network environment, and use the software provided.
This manual covers all models, and includes descriptions of functions and
settings that might not be available on this machine. Images, illustrations, and
information about operating systems that are supported might also differ
slightly from those of this machine.
❖ Other manuals
• PostScript3 Supplement
• UNIX Supplement
• Manuals for DeskTopBinder Lite
• DeskTopBinder Lite Setup Guide
• DeskTopBinder Introduction Guide
• Auto Document Link Guide
Note
❒ Manuals provided are specific to machine types.
❒ For “UNIX Supplement”, please visit our Web site or consult an authorized
dealer.
❒ “PostScript3 Supplement” and “UNIX Supplement” include descriptions of
functions and settings that might not be available on this machine.
❒ The following software products are referred to using general names:
Product name
General name
DeskTopBinder Lite and DeskTopBinder
Professional *1
ScanRouter EX Professional
Router EX Enterprise *1
*1
*1
and Scan-
DeskTopBinder
the ScanRouter delivery software
Optional
Reference
p.iii “Manuals for Machines with Copier Function Only or with the DDST
Unit”
ii
Manuals for Machines with Copier Function Only or with the
DDST Unit
This section describes the manuals for machines with copier function only or
with the DDST Unit.
❖ About This Machine
Be sure to read the Safety Information in this manual before using the machine.
This manual provides an introduction to the functions of the machine. It also
explains the control panel, preparation procedures for using the machine, and
how to install the CD-ROMs provided.
❖ General Settings Guide
Explains User Tools settings. Also refer to this manual for explanations on
how to register user codes.
❖ Troubleshooting
Provides a guide to solving common problems, and explains how to replace
paper, toner, and other consumables.
❖ Copy Reference
Explains Copier functions and operations. Also refer to this manual for explanations on how to place originals.
❖ Printer/Scanner Reference
Explains system settings, functions and operations for the machine's printer/scanner unit. Also refer to this manual for explanations on how to connect
the machine.
❖ Network Guide
Explains how to configure and operate the machine in a network environment, and use the software provided.
Note
❒ Some manuals include descriptions of functions and settings that are not
available on machines with copier function only or with the DDST Unit.
iii
What You Can Do with This Machine
This section introduces the features of this machine.
Note
❒ For details about additional items, see “Other Items”.
❒ Some functions may not be available depending on your machine type.
Reference
p.13 “Other Items”
Copier, Facsimile, Printer, and Scanner Functions
This machine provides copier, facsimile, printer, and scanner functions.
ARC002S
• You can make copies of originals. See Copy Reference.
• You can send originals by fax or e-mail, and receive faxes from other parties.
See Facsimile Reference.
• You can print documents created in applications. See Printer Reference. (For
machines with the DDST Unit, see Printer/Scanner Reference.)
• You can print documents from Windows 95/98/Me (TCP/IP, IPP), Windows
2000 (TCP/IP, IPP), Windows XP/Server 2003 (TCP/IP, IPP), Windows NT
4.0 (TCP/IP, IPP), NetWare, UNIX (TCP/IP), and Macintosh (AppleTalk) environments because the machine supports all these (multi-protocol).
• You can scan originals and send scan files to a computer. See Scanner Reference.
(For machines with the DDST Unit, see Printer/Scanner Reference.)
• You can scan originals in full color using the scanner function.
iv
Paperless Fax Transmission
You can send a file by fax without printing it.
Transmission
You can send a fax from your computer over the network (Ethernet, or wireless
LAN) to this machine, which then forwards the fax via its telephone connection
(LAN-Fax).
ARC003S
• To send a fax, print from the Windows application you are working with, select LAN-Fax as the printer, and then specify the destination.
• You can also check the sent image data.
• For details about the machine's settings, see “Network Settings”, General Settings Guide.
• For details about how to use the function, see “Fax via Computer”, Facsimile
Reference.
v
Fax Transmission and Reception Through the Internet
You can send fax documents via e-mail by specifying the recipient's e-mail address (Internet Fax Transmission). You can receive sent documents via Internet
Fax, or from computers (Internet Fax Reception). You can send fax documents
by specifying IP-fax destination using IP addresses (IP-Fax Transmission). You
can receive sent documents via Internet Fax (IP-Fax Reception).
ARC004S
❖ Internet Fax
• You can send fax documents through e-mail by specifying the recipient’s
e-mail address.
• E-mails can be received on a fax machine that supports Internet Fax, or on
a computer that can receive normal e-mail.
• You can receive e-mails or Internet Fax, and then print or forward them.
• For details about the machine's settings, see “Network Settings”, General
Settings Guide.
• For details about how to use the function, see “Transmission”, Facsimile
Reference.
❖ IP-Fax
• You can exchange documents between fax machines directly connected to
the TCP/IP network.
• You can send documents by specifying an IP address or host name instead
of a fax number.
• For details about the machine's settings, see “Network Settings”, General
Settings Guide.
• For details about how to use this function, see “Transmission”, Facsimile
Reference.
vi
Using the Scanner in a Network Environment
You can use a scanner over the network.
ARC005S
• You can send scan files to a specified destination using e-mail (Sending scan
file by e-mail). See “Sending Scan Files by E-mail”, Scanner Reference.
• With the ScanRouter delivery software, you can save scan files in specified
destinations on network computers (Saving scan files). See “Sending Scan
Files by Scan to Folder”, Scanner Reference.
• You can send scan files directly to folders (Sending scan file by Scan to Folder).
• Under the network delivery scanner function, you can use the machine as a
delivery scanner for the ScanRouter delivery software or DeskTopBinder.
You can save scan files or fax-received files in the delivery server, or deliver
them to a folder on a computer on the same network.
• For details about specifying the machine’s settings for using its scanner function over the network, see “Network Settings”, General Settings Guide.
• For details about using the scanner function over the network, see “Using the
Network TWAIN Scanner Function”, Scanner Reference. (For machines with
the DDST Unit, see “Using the Network TWAIN Scanner Function”, Printer/Scanner Reference.)
vii
Administrating the Machine (Security Functions)
You can prevent information leakage by managing the machine.
ARC006S
• You can control the use of the machine, as well as prevent machine settings
from being changed without authorization. See Security Reference.
• By setting passwords, you can prevent unauthorized access via the network.
See Security Reference.
viii
Monitoring the Machine Via Computer
You can change the machine's settings and monitor its status from a connected
computer.
ARC007S
Web Image Monitor lets you configure and operate the machine using a Web
browser on a computer. You can also install SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin on
a computer to configure and operate the machine.
Using Web Image Monitor, you can register information in the address book,
specify the machine’s settings, and check the machine’s status with ease.
Using Web Image Monitor, you can check and specify the initial settings (system
settings, printer features, fax features, network settings, security settings/certificate management, and E-mail Notification), control print jobs, display the print
job journal, and protect the data in the machine using authentication.
You can also use SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin to register information in the
address book.
Reference
General Settings Guide
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help
Web Image Monitor's Help
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Machine ......................................................................................i
Manuals for Machines with Copier Function Only or with the DDST Unit ................. iii
What You Can Do with This Machine..................................................................iv
Copier, Facsimile, Printer, and Scanner Functions................................................... iv
Paperless Fax Transmission...................................................................................... v
Fax Transmission and Reception Through the Internet ............................................ vi
Using the Scanner in a Network Environment ......................................................... vii
Administrating the Machine (Security Functions).....................................................viii
Monitoring the Machine Via Computer...................................................................... ix
Notice ......................................................................................................................1
Important ....................................................................................................................1
Notes To Wireless LAN Interface Users ....................................................................1
How to Read This Manual .....................................................................................4
Symbols .....................................................................................................................4
Name of Major Item....................................................................................................4
Safety Information .................................................................................................5
Safety During Operation.............................................................................................5
Positions of RWARNING and RCAUTION labels ..............................................8
ENERGY STAR Program .......................................................................................9
Specifications ...........................................................................................................10
Recycled Paper........................................................................................................10
1. Getting Started
Guide to Components .........................................................................................11
Other Items ..............................................................................................................13
Control Panel........................................................................................................15
Display ..................................................................................................................19
Reading the Display and Using Keys.......................................................................19
When the Authentication Screen is Displayed..................................................20
User Code Authentication (Using the Control Panel)...............................................20
User Code Authentication (Using a Printer Driver) ..................................................20
Login (Using the Control Panel) ...............................................................................21
Logout (Using the Control Panel).............................................................................21
Login (Using a Printer Driver)...................................................................................22
Login (Using Web Image Monitor) ...........................................................................22
Logout (Using Web Image Monitor) .........................................................................22
Changing Modes ..................................................................................................23
Turning On the Power .........................................................................................24
Turning On the Main Power .....................................................................................24
Turning On the Power ..............................................................................................25
Turning Off the Power ..............................................................................................25
Turning Off the Main Power .....................................................................................26
Saving Energy..........................................................................................................27
x
2. Entering Text
Entering Text ........................................................................................................29
Available Characters ................................................................................................29
Keys .........................................................................................................................29
How to Enter Text ....................................................................................................30
3. Appendix
Dos and Don'ts.....................................................................................................39
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM ...............................................40
Viewing the Contents of the CD-ROM .....................................................................41
Printer Drivers for This Machine...............................................................................41
TWAIN Driver ...........................................................................................................42
LAN-Fax Driver ........................................................................................................43
DeskTopBinder Lite..................................................................................................44
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin ................................................................................45
DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client .......................................................46
Software for Machines with the DDST Unit..............................................................47
Installing the Operating Instructions .................................................................48
PDF Manuals ...........................................................................................................49
Opening the Installed Operating Instructions...................................................51
Opening from the Icon..............................................................................................51
Opening from the [Start] Menu .................................................................................51
Opening from the CD-ROM......................................................................................52
Specifications for the Main Unit .........................................................................53
Specifications for External Items .......................................................................56
Exposure Glass Cover .............................................................................................56
Auto Document Feeder capable of scanning both sides of a sheet (ARDF)............56
Paper Tray Unit (Tray 2) ..........................................................................................57
Copy Paper ...........................................................................................................58
Recommended Paper Sizes and Types...................................................................58
Unusable Paper .......................................................................................................60
Paper Storage ..........................................................................................................61
INDEX......................................................................................................... 62
xi
xii
Notice
Important
Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law.
Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law:
bank notes, revenue stamps, bonds, stock certificates, bank drafts, checks, passports, driver's licenses.
The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive. We assume no
responsibility for its completeness or accuracy. If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying or printing certain items, consult with your legal
advisor.
Notes To Wireless LAN Interface Users
Notes to users
It is strictly forbidden to use antenna(s) except designated.
The antenna used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation
distance of at least 2.5 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Notes to users in the United States of America
This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment.
Notice:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
1
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Note to users in Canada
Note:
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
IEEE 802.11b Interface Unit Type H:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that
the Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to
be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding.
Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing.
To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its
gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP)
is not more than that required for successful communication.
This device has been designed to operate with an antenna having a maximum
gain of [0.00] dBi. Antenna having a higher gain is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada. The required antenna impedance is [50] ohms.
2
Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada
Avertissement:
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
L'utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux conditions suivantes: (1)
il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l'utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt
à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif.
IEEE 802.11b Interface Unit Type H:
Ce dispositif est conforme à la norme CNR-210 d'Industrie Canada.
L'expression <<IC:>> avant le numéro d'homologation/enregistrement signifie
seulement que les spécifications techniques d'Industrie Canada ont été respectées.
Pour empêcher que cet appareil cause du brouillage au service faisant l'objet
d'une licence, il doit être utilisé à l'intérieur et devrait être placé loin des fenêtres
afin de fournir un écran de blindage maximal.
Si le matériel (ou son antenne d'émission) est installe à l'extérieur, il doit faire
l'objet d'une licence.
Afin de réduire le risque d'interférence aux autres utilisateurs, le type d'antenne
et son gain doivent être choisis de façon à ce que la puissance isotrope rayonnée
équivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne soit pas supérieure au niveau requis pour obtenir une
communication satisfaisante.
Ce dispositif a été conçu pour fonctionner avec une antenne ayant un gain maximal de [0.00] dBi. Une antenne ayant un gain plus élevé est strictement interdite
par les réglements d'Industrie Canada. L'impédance d'antenne requise est [50]
ohms.
3
How to Read This Manual
Symbols
This manual uses the following symbols:
Indicates important safety notes.
Ignoring these notes could result in serious injury or death. Be sure to read these
notes. They can be found in the “Safety Information” section of this manual.
Indicates important safety notes.
Ignoring these notes could result in moderate or minor injury, or damage to the
machine or to property. Be sure to read these notes. They can be found in the
“Safety Information” section of this manual.
Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations
of likely causes of paper misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure
to read these explanations.
This symbol indicates information or preparations required prior to operating.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine’s functions, and instructions on resolving user errors.
This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find further relevant information.
[]
Indicates the names of keys that appear on the machine’s display panel.
{}
Indicates the names of keys on the machine’s control panel.
Name of Major Item
Major item of this machine is referred to as follows in this manual:
• Auto Document Feeder capable of scanning both sides of a sheet → ARDF
4
Safety Information
When using this machine, the following safety precautions should always be followed.
Safety During Operation
In this manual, the following important symbols are used:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, could result
in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, may result
in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.
R WARNING:
• Disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if the
power cable or plug becomes frayed or otherwise damaged.
• To avoid hazardous electric shock or laser radiation exposure, do not
remove any covers or screws other than those specified in this manual.
• Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug,
not the cable) if any of the following occurs:
• You spill something into the machine.
• You suspect that your machine needs service or repair.
• The external housing of your machine has been damaged.
• Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers. Toner dust might ignite when exposed to an open flame.
• Disposal can take place at our authorized dealer.
• Dispose of used toner containers in accordance with local regulations.
• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols.
A fire or an electric shock might occur.
• Connect the machine only to the power source described on the inside front cover of this manual. Connect the power cord directly into
a wall outlet and do not use an extension cord.
• Do not damage, break or make any modifications to the power cord.
Do not place heavy objects on it. Do not pull it hard nor bend it more
than necessary. These actions could cause an electric shock or fire.
• If the power cord is damaged (exposure of the core, disconnection,
etc.), contact your service representative to change a new one. Operating the machine with a damaged power cord may cause an electric
shock or fire.
5
R CAUTION:
• Protect the machine from dampness or wet weather, such as rain and snow.
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine.
While moving the machine, you should take care that the power cord will not
be damaged under the machine.
• Before moving the machine, be sure to disconnect all external connections,
especially the power cord from the wall outlet. Damaged power cords are a
fire and electric shock hazard.
• When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the
plug (not the cable).
• To disconnect the power cord, pull it out by plug. Do not drag the cord itself.
Doing so may result in damage to the cord, leading to fire or electric shock.
• For safety reason, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet if the machine
will not be used for an extended period of time such as holidays.
• Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small metallic objects to fall inside
the machine.
• Keep toner (used or unused) and toner containers out of reach of children.
• For environmental reasons, do not dispose of the machine or expended
supply waste at household waste collection points. Disposal can take place
at an authorized dealer.
• The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts with a
label indicating the “hot surface”. Otherwise, an injury might occur.
• The fusing section of this machine might be very hot. Caution should be taken when removing misfed paper.
• Keep the machine away from humidity and dust. Otherwise a fire or an electric shock might occur.
• Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. If it topples over,
an injury might occur.
• Do not use aluminum foil, carbon paper, or similar conductive paper to avoid
a fire or machine failure.
• Make sure the room where you are using the machine is well ventilated and
spacious. Good ventilation is especially important when the machine is used
heavily.
• Do not open toner containers forcefully. Toner can spill, dirtying your clothes
or hands, and possibly resulting in accidental ingestion.
• If toner or used toner is inhaled, gargle with plenty of water and move into a
fresh air environment. Consult a doctor if necessary.
• If toner or used toner gets into your eyes, flush immediately with large
amounts of water. Consult a doctor if necessary.
• If toner or used toner is swallowed, dilute by drinking a large amount of water. Consult a doctor if necessary.
6
R CAUTION:
• Avoid getting toner on your clothes or skin when removing a paper jam or
replacing toner. If your skin comes into contact with toner, wash the affected
area thoroughly with soap and water.
• If toner gets on your clothing, wash with cold water. Hot water will set the
toner into the fabric and may make removing the stain impossible.
• Do not look into the lamp - it can damage your eyes.
• When loading paper, take care not to trap or injure your fingers.
• During operation, rollers for transporting the paper and originals revolve. A
safety device is being installed so that the machine can be operated safely.
But take care not to touch the rollers during operation. An injury might occur.
• Fire and breakdown can result from heavy accumulation of dust inside this
machine. Consult your service representative for details about and charges
for cleaning the machine’s interior.
• If you have to move the machine when the optional paper tray unit is attached, do not push on the main unit's top section. Doing so can cause the
optional paper tray unit to detach, possibly resulting in injury.
7
Positions of RWARNING and RCAUTION
labels
This machine has labels for RWARNING and RCAUTION at the positions
shown below. For safety, please follow the instructions and handle the machine
as indicated.
ARC017S
High temperature. Be careful of hot parts when clearing paper jams.
8
ENERGY STAR Program
ENERGY STAR® Program
The ENERGY STAR® Program encourages energy conservation by promoting energy efficient
computers and other office equipment.
The program backs the development and dissemination of products that feature energy saving
functions.
It is an open program in which manufacturers participate voluntarily.
Targeted products are computers, monitors, printers, facsimiles, copiers, scanners, and multifunction devices. Energy Star standards and logos are internationally uniform.
• Low Power mode
This machine automatically lowers its power consumption 1 minute after finishing the last copy or print job. Fax reception and printing is still possible in
Low Power mode, but to make copies, you have to press the operation switch
first.
• Off mode (Copier only)
To conserve energy, this machine automatically turns off 1 minute after finishing the last copy or print job. In this manual, the Off mode is called the
Auto Off mode.
• Sleep mode (Fax, printer, or scanner installed)
If there is a fax, printer, or scanner unit installed, this machine automatically
lowers its power consumption even further 1 minute after finishing the last
copy or print job. Fax reception and printing is still possible in Sleep mode,
but to make copies, you have to press the operation switch first.
Note
❒ If you want to operate this machine while it is in either of these modes, do
one of the following:
• Turn on the operation switch.
• Place originals in the ARDF.
Reference
“Timer Settings”, General Settings Guide
9
• Duplex Priority
We recommend the duplex function. This function is less of a burden to the environment. For applicable machines, duplex function (one-sided originals → two-sided
copies) can be selected preferentially when the operation switch or the {Clear
Modes} key is pressed, or the machine resets automatically.
Specifications
Copier only
Low Power
mode
Sleep mode
Off mode
Printer,
or scanner
installed
Fax, printer,
or scanner
installed
Power consumption 25 W
30 W
35 W
Default interval
1 minute
1 minute
1 minute
Recovery time
Less than
10 seconds
Less than
10 seconds
Less than
10 seconds
Power consumption -
Less than 10 W
Less than 10 W
Default interval
-
1 minute
1 minute
Recovery time
-
Less than
10 seconds
Less than
10 seconds
Power consumption Less than 1 W
-
-
Default interval
1 minute
-
-
Recovery time
Less than
10 seconds
-
-
Duplex Priority
1 Sided → 1 Sided
Recycled Paper
We recommend you use environmentally friendly recycled paper. Please contact your sales representative for recommended paper.
10
1. Getting Started
This section describes how to start using this machine.
Guide to Components
This section introduces the names and functions of the components.
ARC031S
1. ARDF
3. Internal tray
Place a stack of originals here face up.
They will be fed in automatically. This
document feeder can be used for two-sided originals.
Copied or printed paper or fax messages
are delivered here.
Paper capacity: 250 sheets
2. Exposure glass
Prevents overheating. Do not obstruct
the ventilation holes by placing objects
near them or leaning things against them.
If the machine overheats, a fault might
occur.
Place originals here face down.
4. Ventilation holes
11
Getting Started
1
5. Main power switch
8. Control panel
If the machine is not powered on after
pressing the operation switch, check that
the main power switch is turned on. If it
is off, turn it on.
See p.15 “Control Panel”.
6. Main power indicator
10. Paper tray
Lights when the main power switch is
turned on, and goes off when the switch
is turned off.
Load paper here.
11. Paper tray unit (Tray 2)
7. Operation switch
12. Internal tray guide
Press to turn the power on (the operation
switch indicator lights). To turn the power off, press again (the operation switch
indicator goes off).
9. Front cover
Open to access the inside of the machine.
See p.13 “External Items”.
Open out and raise the end fence to support large paper.
ARC015S
1. Right cover
3. Lower right cover
Open this cover to remove jammed paper
fed from the paper tray.
Open this cover to remove jammed paper
fed from the paper tray unit (Tray 2).
2. Bypass tray
Use to copy or print onto OHP transparencies, adhesive labels, translucent paper, envelopes, and custom size paper.
12
Guide to Components
Other Items
This section introduces the names and functions of the other main items.
1
External Items
This section provides explanations about external items.
ARC030S
1. Exposure glass cover
3. Paper tray unit (Tray 2)
Lower this cover over originals.
Holds 500 sheets.
2. Handset
Used as a receiver when a fax unit is installed.
13
Getting Started
Internal Items
This section describes the items that can be installed in the machine.
• Printer/Scanner unit
Allows you to use the printer and scanner functions.
• IEEE 1284 Interface Board
Allows you to connect to an IEEE 1284 cable.
• IEEE 802.11b wireless LAN board
Allows you to install a wireless LAN interface.
• Bluetooth unit
Allows you to expand the interface.
• DDST Unit
Allows you to use the printer and scanner functions.
• Printer Enhance Option (For machines with the DDST Unit)
Allows you to enhance the printer function.
1
Note
❒ You cannot install two or more of the following items: IEEE 1284 Interface
Board, IEEE 802.11b wireless LAN board, Bluetooth unit.
❒ You cannot install the following items when the DDST unit is installed: Printer/Scanner unit, IEEE 1284 Interface Board, IEEE 802.11b wireless LAN
board, Bluetooth unit.
❒ You cannot install the Printer/Scanner unit and the DDST unit at the same time.
14
Control Panel
Control Panel
This section introduces the names and functions of the components on the control panel.
1
❖ For machines with the DDST Unit installed
ARC052S
❖ For machines with fax and printer/scanner installed
ARC032S
1. Receive File indicator (facsimile
mode)
5. {On Hook Dial} key (facsimile
Remains lit when fax memory receives a
file. Flashes for Memory Lock files.
See “Substitute Reception”, Facsimile
Reference.
Press this to hear dial and data tones on
the fax line while dialing, as if the handset were off the hook. For details, see “On
Hook Dial”, Facsimile Reference.
2. Communicating indicator
6. {Search Destination} key (scanner
mode)
Lights during data transmission or reception.
and facsimile mode)
3. {Memory Trans.} key (facsimile
Press to search for a destination registered in the destination list.
mode)
Press to toggle between Memory Transmission (Memory Trans.) and Immediate
Transmission (Immediate Trans.) modes.
See “Memory Transmission”, Facsimile
Reference.
4. {Facsimile} key
Press to activate the facsimile function.
See Facsimile Reference.
7. {Check Destination} key (scanner
and facsimile mode)
Press to check the specified destination.
8. {Job Information} key (scanner and
facsimile mode)
Press to obtain status information on
transmitted data.
9. Color Scan Key
Press to scan originals in full color.
15
Getting Started
1
10. {Scanner} key
19. {Clear/Stop} key
Press to activate the scanner function. See
Scanner Reference. (For machines with
the DDST Unit, see Printer/Scanner Reference.)
• Clear
Clears an entered numeric value.
• Stop
Stops a job in progress, such as scanning, faxing, or printing.
11. {Copy} key
Press to activate the copy function. See
Copy Reference.
12. {Printer} key
Press to activate the printer function. See
Printer Reference. (For machines with the
DDST Unit, see Printer/Scanner Reference.)
13. Indicators
Display errors and machine status.
h: Error indicator. See Network Guide
or “Clearing Misfeeds”, Troubleshooting.
B: Load Paper indicator. See Troubleshooting.
D: Add Toner indicator. See Troubleshooting.
14. Display panel
Displays operational status and messages. See “Display”.
The main power indicator lights when
the main power switch is turned on.
If the operation switch's indicator is lit or
flashing, do not turn off the machine's
main power switch. Doing so might damage the memory.
21. Operation switch
Press to turn the power on. The switch's
indicator lights. To turn the power off,
press again. See “Turning On the Power”.
22. {Start} key
Press to start copying, printing, scanning,
or sending.
23. {q} key
Press to set a selected item or an entered
numeric value.
24. Number keys
15. Selection keys
Press to enter numeric values.
Correspond to items on the display. Press
to select the corresponding item.
25. {OK} key
16. Scroll keys
Press to select an item.
{U}:scrolls upward
{T}:scrolls downward
{V}:scrolls right
{W}:scrolls left
17. {User Tools/Counter} key
• User Tools
Press to change default or operation
parameters according to requirement.
• Counter
Press to check or print the counter value.
See “Accessing User Tools”, General
Settings Guide.
18. {Clear Modes} key
Press to clear the current settings.
16
20. Main power indicator
Press to set a selected item or an entered
numeric value.
26. {Original} key (copier, scanner
and facsimile mode)
Press to select the most suitable scanning
method for the original. See “Original
Type Setting”, Copy Reference, “Selecting Original Type”, Scanner Reference,
and “Original Type”, Facsimile Reference.
27. {Escape} key
Press to cancel operation or return to the
previous display.
28. {Lighter} key, {Darker} key (copier, scanner and facsimile mode)
Press to adjust the scanning density under the copier, fax and scanner functions.
Control Panel
29. {Sort} key (copier mode)
35. {Pause/Redial} key (facsimile
Press to automatically sort printed copies. See “Sort”, Copy Reference.
mode)
30. {Duplex} key (copier mode)
Press to make two-sided copies. See “Duplex”, Copy Reference.
31. {Combine/Series} key (copier
mode)
• Combine
Combines and prints the pages of a
multiple-sheet original onto a singlesheet. See “One-Sided Combine” and
“Two-Sided Combine”, Copy Reference.
• Series
Copies each side of a two-sided original onto two sheets. See “Series Copies”, Copy Reference.
32. mData In indicator (printer mode)
Flashes when receiving a print job. See
Printer Reference. (For machines with the
DDST Unit, see Printer/Scanner Reference.)
33. {fOnline} key (printer mode)
Press to switch between on-line and offline modes.
• Pause
Press to insert a pause in a fax dialing
sequence. You cannot insert a pause at
the beginning of a sequence. The pause
is indicated by “-”. For details, see “Entering a pause”, Facsimile Reference.
• Redial
Press this to select a recently-dialed
destination. For details, see “Redial”,
Facsimile Reference.
1
36. {Resolution} key (facsimile
mode)
Press to specify the resolution of the fax.
See “Resolution”, Facsimile Reference.
37. User Function keys (facsimile
mode)
You can assign frequently-used functions
to these keys. See “General Settings/Adjust”, General Settings Guide.
By default, the following functions are
registered:
{F1} key: Start Manual Reception
{F2} key: Switch RX Mode
{F3} key: Print Journal
34. Quick Dial keys
Press to enter letters and symbols. See
“Entering Text”. Press to select the registered destination at a single touch. See
Facsimile Reference and Scanner Reference.
17
Getting Started
Reference
p.19 “Display”
p.24 “Turning On the Power”
p.29 “Entering Text”
“Accessing User Tools”, General Settings Guide
“General Settings/Adjust”, General Settings Guide
“Clearing Misfeeds”, Troubleshooting
“Original Type Setting”, Copy Reference
“Sort”, Copy Reference
“Duplex”, Copy Reference
“One-Sided Combine”, Copy Reference
“Two-Sided Combine”, Copy Reference
“On Hook Dial”, Facsimile Reference
“Substitute Reception”, Facsimile Reference
“Entering a pause”, Facsimile Reference
“Redial”, Facsimile Reference
“Original Type”, Facsimile Reference
“Memory Transmission”, Facsimile Reference
“Resolution”, Facsimile Reference
“Selecting Original Type”, Scanner Reference
Printer Reference
Network Guide
Printer/Scanner Reference (For machines with the DDST Unit)
1
18
Display
Display
The display panel shows machine status, error messages, and function menus.
When you select or specify an item on the display panel, it is highlighted like
.
1
Important
❒ A force or impact of more than 30 N (about 3 kgf) will damage the display.
The copy display is set as the default screen when the machine is turned on.
Reading the Display and Using Keys
ARC033S
1. Selection keys
2. {Escape} key
Correspond to items at the bottom line on
the display.
Example: The copy display
Press to cancel an operation or return to
the previous display.
• When the instruction “press [Reduce]”
appears in this manual, press the left
selection key.
• When the instruction “press [Enlarge]”
appears in this manual, press the center selection key.
• When the instruction “press [Zoom]”
appears in this manual, press the right
selection key.
Press to set a selected item or entered numeric value.
3. {OK} key
4. Scroll keys
Press to move the cursor in each direction, step by step.
When {U}, {T}, {V}, or {W} appears in
this manual, press the scroll key of the
same direction.
19
Getting Started
When the Authentication Screen is
Displayed
1
When Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server Authentication is enabled, the authentication screen appears. The machine is operable only if you enter a valid user name and password. If user code
authentication is enabled, you cannot use the machine until you enter a valid user code.
If you are using the machine, you are “logged in”. When you cannot use the machine, you are “logged out”. To prevent use of the machine by unauthorized persons, always log out when you have finished using the machine.
Important
❒ Ask the user administrator for the login user name, login password, and user
code. For details about user authentication, contact your administrator.
❒ The user code you must enter for User Code Authentication is the numerical
value registered as “login user name” in the address book.
Note
❒ “Authentication failed.” appears if the authentication failed. Check the
login user name and login password.
User Code Authentication (Using the Control Panel)
When user authentication is enabled, the following screen appears:
A Enter a user code (one to eight digits), and then press the {OK} key.
Note
❒ To log off, press the operation switch.
User Code Authentication (Using a Printer Driver)
If user authentication is enabled, specify the user code in the properties screen
of the driver.
Note
❒ If logged in through User Code Authentication, logging out is not necessary.
20
Reference
For driver settings and procedures, see the appropriate driver's Help.
When the Authentication Screen is Displayed
Login (Using the Control Panel)
Use the following procedure to log in when Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server Authentication is enabled.
1
A Enter the login user name, and then press the {OK} key.
B Enter the login password, and then press the {OK} key.
When the user is authenticated, the screen for the function you are using appears.
Logout (Using the Control Panel)
Use the following procedure to log out when Basic Authentication, Windows
Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server Authentication is
enabled.
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
B Press [Logout].
C Press [Yes].
21
Getting Started
Login (Using a Printer Driver)
If Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server Authentication is enabled, make encryption settings in the
properties screen of the driver, and then specify a login user name and password.
1
Note
❒ If logged in using a printer driver, you do not have to log off.
Reference
For driver settings and procedures, see the appropriate driver's Help.
Login (Using Web Image Monitor)
Use the following procedure to log in from Web Image Monitor when User Authentication is enabled.
A Click [Login].
B Enter a login user name and password, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ For user code authentication, enter a user code in [Login User Name], and
then click [OK].
Logout (Using Web Image Monitor)
Click [Logout] to log out from Web Image Monitor when User Authentication is
enabled.
22
Changing Modes
Changing Modes
Note
❒ You cannot switch modes during initial setup.
1
❒ The copy display is displayed as default after power on. You can change this
default setting. For the setting procedure, see “General Features”, General
Settings Guide.
❒ The following illustrations show screens that appear when fax and printer/scanner
are installed.
ARC034S
❖ System Reset
The screen specified in Function Priority appears automatically after a certain
period of time has elapsed. This function is called “System Reset”. You can
change the System Reset time. For the setting procedure, see “Timer Settings”, General Settings Guide.
Reference
“General Features”, General Settings Guide
“Timer Settings”, General Settings Guide
23
Getting Started
Turning On the Power
This section describes how to turn on/off the power.
1
❖ Power supply
This machine has two power switches: operation switch and main power
switch.
• Operation switch (right side of the control panel)
Press to activate the machine. When the machine has finished warming up,
you can make use of each function.
• Main power switch (left side of the machine)
Turning off this switch makes the main power indicator on the right side
of the control panel go off. When this is done, machine power is completely
off.
When the fax unit is installed, fax files in memory may be lost if you turn
this switch off. Use this switch only when necessary.
Note
❒ This machine automatically enters Energy Saver mode and reduces its power
consumption if you do not use it for a while with its power “On”.
Reference
“Timer Settings”, General Settings Guide
Turning On the Main Power
Turn on the main power as follows:
A Make sure the power cord is firmly plugged into the wall outlet.
B Turn on the main power switch.
The machine turns on and “Please wait...” appears on the display.
Both the main power indicator and the operation switch indicator light up.
ARC035S
24
Turning On the Power
Note
❒ Do not turn off the main power switch immediately after turning it on. Doing so may result in damage to the memory, leading to malfunctions.
❒ When the message “Restart is required due to a functional error.” is displayed, follow the instructions and press [Restart] at the bottom
right-hand corner of the screen after the process is completed.
1
Turning On the Power
Turn on the power as follows:
A Press the operation switch.
The operation switch indicator goes on.
ARC036S
Note
❒ If the power does not come on when the operation switch is pressed, check
the main power switch is on. If it is off, turn it on.
Turning Off the Power
Turn off the power as follows:
A Press the operation switch.
The operation switch indicator goes off.
ARC036S
25
Getting Started
Note
❒ Even if you press the operation switch, the indicator does not go out, but
flashes in the following case:
• During communication with external equipment.
1
Turning Off the Main Power
Turn off the main power as follows:
Important
❒ If the machine's operation switch is lit or flashing, do not turn off the machine's main power switch. Doing so might damage the memory, leading to
malfunctions.
❒ Make sure to turn off the main power switch before pulling out the power plug.
Not doing so may result in damage to the memory, leading to malfunctions.
A Make sure the operation switch indicator is not lit.
B Turn off the main power switch.
The main power indicator goes out.
Note
❒ When the main power switch is turned off while using the fax function,
waiting fax and print jobs may be canceled, and incoming fax documents
may not be received. If you have to turn off this switch for some reason,
make sure 100% is shown as available memory on the screen before turning off the main power switch or unplugging the power cord. Fax files in
memory are deleted twelve hours after you turn off the main power switch
or unplug the power cord.
Reference
“Turning Off the Main Power / In the Event of Power Failure”, Troubleshooting
26
Turning On the Power
Saving Energy
This machine has the following energy saving function.
1
❖ Auto off (Copier only)
This machine automatically turns itself off when a job is finished, after a certain period of time has elapsed. This function is called “Auto off”.
You can change the Auto Off time.
Note
❒ The Auto Off function will not operate in the following cases:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
When a warning message appears
When the service call message appears
When paper is jammed
When the “Add toner.” message appears
When toner is being replenished
When the User Tools screen appears
When fixed warm-up is in progress
When the facsimile, printer, or other functions are active
When operations are suspended during printing
When the On-hook dialing function is in use
When the address list or group dial is being used
When the Data In indicator is on or flashing
Reference
“Timer Settings”, General Settings Guide
27
Getting Started
1
28
2. Entering Text
This section describes how to enter characters.
Entering Text
When you enter a character, it appears at the cursor position. If there is a character
already at the cursor position, the newly entered character appears before it.
Available Characters
You can enter the following characters:
• Alphabetic characters
• Symbols
• Numerals
0123456789
Keys
ARC037S
1. {Shift} key ({Quick Dial 13} key)
2. {Space} key ({Quick Dial 14} key)
Press to switch between lowercase, uppercase, User Text, and Cyrillic characters.
Press to enter a space.
3. {Symbols} key ({Quick Dial 15} key)
Press to enter symbols.
29
Entering Text
❖ Number keys
Use to enter numbers.
❖ {Quick Dial 01} key to {Quick Dial 09} key (A to Z)
Press these to enter upper and lower case letters.
❖ {Clear/Stop} key
Deletes a character at the cursor position. You can delete a character at the
right end of a line even if the cursor is placed to the right of the character.
2
❖ Scroll keys
Shifts the cursor up, down, left and right.
Note
❒ Cyrillic characters are available with the Keyboard Type D only.
How to Enter Text
You can enter characters using the {Quick Dial 01} to {Quick Dial 09} keys. To enter
a letter, press the key repeatedly until the required letter appears.
The language selected using the control panel determines which characters can
be entered. There are four types of keyboard. For each type, you can enter the
characters used in the following languages:
Keyboard Type
Language
Type A
English
Type B
English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Norwegian,
Danish, Swedish, Portuguese, Finnish
Type C
Polish, Hungarian, Czech
Type D
Russian
Note
❒ Depending on the machine type or function you are using, some characters
may not be available.
30
Entering Text
Entering letters
A Press the {Shift} key to switch between lowercase, uppercase, User Text,
and Cyrillic characters.
2
B Press a Quick Dial key.
A letter is entered and the cursor moves along one space.
❖ Keyboard Type A
ARC024S
31
Entering Text
❖ Keyboard Type B
Press one of the following Quick Dial keys to display a basic letter, and
then press {Quick Dial 16} to select one of its variations.
2
ARC025S
32
Entering Text
❖ Keyboard Type C
This keyboard type allows you to enter Polish, Hungarian, and Czech letters. Press one of the following Quick Dial keys to display a basic letter,
and then press {Quick Dial 16} to select one of its variations.
2
ARC026S
33
Entering Text
❖ Keyboard Type D
This keyboard type allows you to enter Russian letters. Press the {Shift}
key to enter Cyrillic character mode. To enter a letter, press the corresponding Quick Dial key indicated in the table below. Press the key repeatedly until the required letter is displayed.
2
ARC027S
Note
❒ To enter a character repeatedly, press a Quick Dial key again.
❒ To insert a character, press {W} or {V} to move the cursor to the position
you want to insert.
Entering symbols
A Press the {Symbols} key.
Symbols appear.
B Select a symbol using the scroll keys.
C Press the {OK} key.
This will enter the symbol and shift the cursor.
34
Entering Text
Depending on the selected keyboard type, you can enter the following symbols.
❖ Keyboard Type A
2
AMA031S
❖ Keyboard Type B
AMA032S
35
Entering Text
❖ Keyboard Type C
2
AMA033S
❖ Keyboard Type D
AMA034S
36
Entering Text
Entering numbers
A Press the number keys.
2
ARC038S
The number is entered and the cursor moves.
Deleting characters
A Use {W} or {V} to move the cursor to the character you want to delete.
B Press the {Clear/Stop} key.
This will delete the character at the cursor position. You can delete a character
at the right end of a line even if the cursor is placed to the right of the character.
37
Entering Text
Selecting a User Text
You can select and use a User Text that is registered in [Prog/Change/Del User Text].
For details about registering User Texts, see “General Features”, General Settings Guide.
A Press the {Shift} key repeatedly to display [User Text].
2
B Select the text you want to add using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
C To modify the selected text, press the Quick Dial keys to enter letters, and
then press the {OK} key.
Reference
“General Features”, General Settings Guide
38
3. Appendix
This section describes Dos and Don'ts and copy paper.
Dos and Don'ts
The following information should be kept in mind during use of this machine.
R WARNING:
• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols.
A fire or an electric shock might occur.
R CAUTION:
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine.
While moving the machine, you should take care that the power cord will
not be damaged under the machine.
Important
❒ Do not turn the power off while the operation switch indicator is lit or blinking. Doing so may damage the memory.
❒ Before unplugging the power cord or turning off the main power switch,
make sure remaining memory space is at 100%, as shown on the screen. See
“Turning Off the Power”, and “Turning Off the Main Power”.
❒ After scanning originals continuously, the exposure glass may become warm,
this is not a malfunction.
❒ The area around the ventilation holes might feel warm. This is caused by exhaust air and is not a malfunction.
❒ When the machine is not in use and in stand-by mode, you may hear a small
noise inside. This is caused by the image stabilization process and is not a
malfunction.
❒ Do not turn off the power when the machine is in operation.
❒ The machine might not produce good copy images if condensation forms inside as a result of rapid temperature change.
❒ Do not open the covers of the machine when it is in operation. If you do, misfeeds might occur.
❒ Do not move the machine when the power is on.
❒ If you operate the machine improperly or a machine failure occurs, settings
might be lost. Be sure to make a note of your machine settings.
❒ The supplier shall not be liable for any loss or damage resulting from mechanical failure, loss of settings, or use of the machine.
Reference
p.25 “Turning Off the Power”
p.26 “Turning Off the Main Power”
39
Appendix
Software and Utilities Included on the CDROM
This section explains the software and utilities included on the CD-ROMs that
are provided with this machine.
Important
❒ Software for machines with the DDST Unit is different. See “Software for Machines with the DDST Unit”.
3
Three CD-ROMs come with this machine: “Printer Drivers and Utilities”, “Scanner Driver and Utilities”, and “Manuals”. In “Manuals”, manuals are stored in
PDF format and HTML format.
The following are included on the three separate CD-ROMs:
❖ Font Manager 2000
For installing new screen fonts, or organizing and managing fonts already in
the system. For details about Font Manager 2000, see the manual on the CDROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities”.
❖ SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
For the system administrator to manage network printers.
❖ SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
For users to manage their network print status.
❖ Printer Utility for Mac
This utility allows users to download and manage a variety of fonts as well as
manage printers. For details about this utility, see PostScript3 Supplement.
Note
❒ Documentation about using the machine is included on the CD-ROM in PDF
format. For details about using Adobe Reader, see Adobe Reader online Help.
Reference
p.47 “Software for Machines with the DDST Unit”
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help
PostScript3 Supplement
Adobe Reader online Help
40
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM
Viewing the Contents of the CD-ROM
Follow the procedure below to view the contents of the CD-ROMs.
A Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
B Click [Browse This CD-ROM].
Explorer starts and displays the contents of the CD-ROM.
3
Printer Drivers for This Machine
Printing requires installation of a printer driver for your operating system. The
following drivers are included on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and
Utilities”.
Printer Language
PCL 6
PCL 5e
RPCS
PostScript3
Windows 95
*1
OK
OK
OK
OK
Windows 98
*2
OK
OK
OK
OK
Windows Me *3
OK
OK
OK
OK
Windows 2000 *4
OK
OK
OK
OK
Windows XP *5
OK
OK
OK
OK
Windows Server 2003 *6
OK
OK
OK
OK
Mac OS *7
–
–
–
OK
Mac OS X *8
–
–
–
OK
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
Microsoft Windows 95 operating system
Microsoft Windows 98 operating system
Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition
Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
Microsoft Windows XP Professional
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition
Versions 8.6 to 9.2 of the Mac OS (Mac OS X Classic mode is supported.)
Mac OS X 10.1 or later (Native mode)
41
Appendix
❖ PCL printer drivers
Two kinds of PCL printer driver (PCL 5e and PCL 6) are included. These drivers
allow your computer to communicate with this machine via a printer language.
❖ RPCS printer driver
This printer driver allows the computer to communicate with the printer using a printer language. In addition to the conventional user interface, another
preset user interface is provided.
❖ Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers and PPD files
Adobe PostScript printer drivers allow the computer to communicate with
the printer using a printer language. PPD files allow the printer driver to enable specific printer functions.
3
❖ PPD files
PPD files allow the printer driver to enable specific printer functions.
Note
❒ Some applications may require installation of the PCL 5e printer driver. In
this case, you can install PCL 5e without having to install PCL 6.
Reference
“Preparing the Machine”, Printer Reference
PostScript3 Supplement
TWAIN Driver
This section describes the file path and system requirements of the TWAIN driver.
This driver is required to scan an original using a scanner. To use the machine
as a network TWAIN scanner, this driver must be installed.
❖ File path
The following drivers are included on the CD-ROM labeled “Scanner Driver
and Utilities” provided with this machine:
\DRIVERS\TWAIN
❖ System requirements
• Hardware
PC/AT-compatible machines that support the following operating system
properly
• Operating system
Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me
Microsoft Windows 2000/XP
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0
Microsoft Windows Server 2003
• Display resolution
800×600 pixels, 256 colors or higher
42
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM
Note
❒ Under Windows NT with RISC-based processors (MIPS R series, Alpha
AXP, or PowerPC), this driver is not supported.
LAN-Fax Driver
This driver allows you to use LAN-Fax functions.
❖ File path
The following folders are on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities”:
• LAN-Fax Driver for Windows 98/Me
\DRIVERS\LAN-FAX\WIN9X_ME
• LAN-Fax Driver for Windows 2000/XP and Windows Server 2003
\DRIVERS\LAN-FAX\WIN2K_XP
3
❖ System requirements
• Hardware
PC/AT-compatible
• Operating systems
Microsoft Windows 98/Me
Microsoft Windows 2000/XP
Microsoft Windows Server 2003
• Display
VGA 640×480 pixels or more
Note
❒ Before beginning installation, exit all other applications.
43
Appendix
DeskTopBinder Lite
This section explains the file path and system requirements of DeskTopBinder
Lite.
DeskTopBinder is to be installed on the client computers for integration and
management of various kinds of files such as scan files, files created with applications, and existing scan files. This software allows you to use various functions
for stored scan files such as viewing stored files. Also, with the ScanRouter delivery software, you can view the files stored in in-trays of the delivery server,
or use other functions for stored files.
For details about the software installed with DeskTopBinder Lite, see “DeskTopBinder Lite”, Scanner Reference.
3
❖ File path
The following drivers are included on the CD-ROM labeled “Scanner Driver
and Utilities” provided with this machine:
\UTILITY\DESKV2
❖ System requirements
• Hardware
PC/AT-compatible machines that support the operating system properly
• Operating system
When installing all functions of DeskTopBinder:
Microsoft Windows 98SE/Me/2000 Professional SP1 or later/2000 Server
SP1 or later/2000 Advanced Server SP1 or later/XP Professional/XP
Home Edition
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition/Enterprise Edition
When installing only SmartDeviceMonitor for Client:
Microsoft Windows 95 SP1/98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional SP1 or later/2000 Server SP1 or later/XP Professional/XP Home Edition Microsoft
Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition/Enterprise Edition Microsoft
Windows NT 4.0 SP5 or later
Reference
“DeskTopBinder Lite”, Scanner Reference
44
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin is an application that uses TCP/IP and
IPX/SPX to monitor network printers. It can monitor multiple network printers
using their IP addresses. We recommend that network administrators use this
application.
❖ File path
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin is stored in the following folder in the CDROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities”:
NETWORK\DEVMON\ADMIN\DISK1
Operating system
Windows 95 / 98 / Me
3
Protocol stack
TCP/IP provided with Windows 95 / 98 / Me
IPX/SPX provided with Windows 95 / 98 / Me
NetWare Client provided with Windows 95 / 98
Novell Client provided with Windows 95 / 98
Windows 2000
TCP/IP provided with Windows 2000
IPX/SPX provided with Windows 2000
NetWare Client provided with Windows 2000
Novell Client provided with Windows 2000 or Windows NT
Windows XP
TCP/IP provided with Windows XP
IPX/SPX provided with Windows XP
NetWare Client provided with Windows XP
Novell Client provided with Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
TCP/IP provided with Windows Server 2003
IPX/SPX provided with Windows Server 2003
NetWare Client provided with Windows Server 2003
Novell Client provided with Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
TCP/IP provided with Windows NT
IPX/SPX provided with Windows NT
Client Service for NetWare provided with Windows NT
Novell Client provided with Windows 2000 or Windows NT
❖ Available functions
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin has the functions to check the followings:
• Printer supplies such as paper or toner
• Results of print jobs executed from the computer
Reference
Network Guide
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help
45
Appendix
DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client allows you to manage and print
various data such as files created with an application, images scanned with a
scanner, and existing images as one document.
❖ File path
DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client is stored in the following
folder on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities”:
NETWORK\DEVMON\CLIENT\DISK1
3
❖ System requirements
• Hardware
PC/AT-compatible
• Operating systems
Microsoft Windows 98SE/Me
Microsoft Windows 2000/XP
Microsoft Windows Server 2003
Reference
See “DeskTopBinder Lite”, Scanner Reference or Help of DeskTopBinderSmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
DeskTopBinder includes SmartDeviceMonitor for Client. See Help of DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
46
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM
Software for Machines with the DDST Unit
This section explains the software on the CD-ROM supplied with the DDST
Unit.
DDST Printer Driver
This driver enables a client computer to communicate with the machine via a
printer language.
❖ System requirements
Operating system
• Microsoft Windows 98SE
• Microsoft Windows Me
• Windows 2000
• Windows XP
• Windows Server 2003
Hard disk space
• 80 MB or more
3
DDST TWAIN Driver
This driver is required for scanning originals on the machine.
You must install this driver to use the machine as a network TWAIN scanner.
❖ System requirements
• Hardware
PC/AT compatible
• CPU
Pentium 300 MHz or faster recommended
• Operating system
Microsoft Windows 98 (SE or later)
Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition
Microsoft Windows XP Professional
• Memory
128 MB or more recommended
• Hard disk space
200 MB or more
• Connection
Ethernet/USB
47
Appendix
Installing the Operating Instructions
The supplied “Manuals” CD-ROM contains HTML format manuals. Install the
manuals you want to use.
Important
❒ The system requirements for installing the manuals are as follows:
• Operating System: Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000/XP, Windows
Server 2003, or Windows NT4.0
• Minimum Display Resolution: 800×600 pixels
❒ Recommended Browser:
• Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 SP2 or later
• Netscape 6.2 or later
❒ A simplified manual is displayed if you are using Internet Explorer 3.02 or
Netscape Navigator 4.05 or later versions.
❒ HTML manuals can also be viewed on a Macintosh.
3
A Click [Install manuals].
B Install the manual you require according to the displayed instructions.
C When installation is complete, click [Finish].
D Click [Finish].
Note
❒ If you cannot install a manual, copy the “Manual” folder to your computer’s hard drive, and then run “Setup.exe”.
❒ To delete an installed manual, on the [Start] menu, click [Programs], then
[Product Name], and then uninstall the data.
48
Installing the Operating Instructions
PDF Manuals
The supplied “Manuals” CD-ROM contains PDF versions of the HTML user
manuals. Manuals for machines with the DDST Unit are different. See “PDF
Manuals for Machines with the DDST Unit”.
❖ File path
The PDF manuals are in the following folders on the CD-ROM:
• About This Machine
PDF MANUAL\ENGLISH\INTRO
• General Settings Guide
PDF MANUAL\ENGLISH\USERTOOL
• Troubleshooting
PDF MANUAL\ENGLISH\TROUBLE
• Copy Reference
PDF MANUAL\ENGLISH\COPY
• Facsimile Reference
PDF MANUAL\ENGLISH\FAX
• Printer Reference
PDF MANUAL\ENGLISH\PRINTER
• Scanner Reference
PDF MANUAL\ENGLISH\SCANNER
• Network Guide
PDF MANUAL\ENGLISH\NETWORK
• PostScript3 Supplement
PDF MANUAL\ENGLISH\PS3
3
Note
❒ To view the PDF manuals, you need to have Adobe Acrobat or Adobe Reader
installed on your computer.
Reference
p.50 “PDF Manuals for Machines with the DDST Unit”
49
Appendix
PDF Manuals for Machines with the DDST Unit
The supplied CD-ROM contains PDF versions of the HTML user manuals.
❖ File path
The PDF manuals are in the following folders on the CD-ROM:
• About This Machine
PDF MANUAL\US_ENG\INTRO
• General Settings Guide
PDF MANUAL\US_ENG\USERTOOL
• Troubleshooting
PDF MANUAL\US_ENG\TROUBLE
• Copy Reference
PDF MANUAL\US_ENG\COPY
• Printer/Scanner Reference
PDF MANUAL\US_ENG\PRTSCN
• Network Guide
PDF MANUAL\US_ENG\NETWORK
3
50
Opening the Installed Operating Instructions
Opening the Installed Operating
Instructions
This section explains how to open installed manuals.
3
Opening from the Icon
This section explains how to open a manual using its desktop icon.
A Double-click the icon on your desktop.
The browser opens and the manual appears.
Opening from the [Start] Menu
This section explains how to open a manual from the [Start] menu.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Programs] (Windows XP: [All Programs]), then
[Product Name], and then click the manual you want to view.
The browser opens, and then the manual appears.
Note
❒ Depending on the settings made during installation, menu folder names
may differ.
51
Appendix
Opening from the CD-ROM
This section explains how to open a manual from the supplied CD-ROM.
A Click [Read manuals].
B Click the title of the manual you want to view.
The browser opens, and then the manual appears.
3
52
Specifications for the Main Unit
Specifications for the Main Unit
Following describes the specification of the main unit.
❖ Configuration:
Desktop
❖ Photosensitivity type:
OPC drum
❖ Original scanning:
One-dimensional solid scanning system through CCD
3
❖ Copy process:
Dry electrostatic transfer system
❖ Development:
Dry two-component magnetic brush development system
❖ Fusing:
Heating roll pressure system
❖ Resolution:
600 dpi
❖ Exposure glass:
Stationary original exposure type
❖ Original reference position:
Rear left corner
❖ Warm-up time:
From the main power switch
Approximately 35 seconds (20 °C)
10 seconds or less (20 °C) (For machines with copier function only or with the
DDST Unit)
From the operation switch
10 seconds or less (20 °C)
❖ Originals:
Sheet/book/objects
❖ Maximum original size:
A4L, 81/2" × 14"L
53
Appendix
❖ Copy paper size:
• Tray: A4L, A5K, B5 JIS (Japanese Industrial Standard)L, 81/2" × 11"L,
51/2" × 81/2"K, 16KL
• Bypass: A4L, A5KL, B5 JISL, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"L,
51/2" × 81/2"KL, 71/4" × 101/2"L, 8" × 13"L, 81/2" × 13"L, 81/4" × 13"L,
81/4" × 14"L, 16KL, 41/8" × 91/2"L, 37/8" × 71/2"L, C5 EnvL, C6 EnvL,
DL EnvL
• Bypass (custom size):
Vertical: 90.0 – 216.0 mm, 3.55" – 8.50"
Horizontal: 139.0 – 600.0 mm, 5.48" – 23.62"
• Duplex unit: A4 L, B5 JISL, 81/2" × 14" L*, 81/2" × 11" L, 81/2" × 13" L*,
81/4" × 14"L*, 81/4" × 13" L*, 16K L
* Paper tray unit (Tray 2) is required.
3
❖ Copy paper weight:
• Paper trays (Standard size): 60 – 90 g/m2, 16 – 24 lb.
• Bypass tray: 60 – 157 g/m2, 16 – 42 lb.
• Duplex unit: 64 – 90 g/m2, 20 – 24 lb.
❖ Non-reproduction area:
• Leading edge: 1.0-5.0 mm (0.04"-0.20")
• Trailing edge: 1.0-5.0 mm (0.04"-0.20")*
• Left edge: 0.5-3.5 mm (0.02"-0.14")
• Right edge: 0.5-4.5 mm (0.02"-0.18")
* Back of 2-sided copy: 2.2-6.2 mm (0.09"-0.25")
❖ First copy time:
7.5 seconds or less
(A4L, 81/2" × 11"L 100%, feeding from Tray 1)
❖ Copying speed:
• 16 copies/minute (A4L, 81/2" × 11"L)
❖ Reproduction ratio:
Preset reproduction ratios:
—
Enlargement
54
Metric version
Inch version
200%
155%
141%
129%
Full Size
100%
100%
Reduction
93%
93%
71%
78%
50%
65%
Zoom: From 50% to 200% in 1% steps.
Specifications for the Main Unit
❖ Continuous copying count:
1 – 99 copies
❖ Copy paper capacity:
• Tray 1: 250 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
• Bypass: 100 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
❖ Power consumption:
Main unit only
Complete system *1
Warm up
Less than 900 W
Less than 900 W
Stand-by
About 70 W
About 75 W
During printing
About 360 W
About 360 W
Maximum
Less than 900 W
Less than 900 W
*1
3
The complete system consists of a main unit with full items installed.
❖ Dimensions (W × D × H up to exposure glass):
Main unit only: 485 × 454 × 373 mm, 19.1 × 17.9 × 14.7 inches
❖ Noise Emission *1 :
• Sound power level
Main unit only
Complete system *3
Stand-by
40 dB (A)
40 dB (A)
During printing
62 dB (A)
66 dB (A)
• Sound pressure level *2
Main unit only
Complete system *3
Stand-by
34 dB (A)
34 dB (A)
During printing
57 dB (A)
60 dB (A)
*1
*2
*3
The above measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779 are actual values.
Measured at the position of the operator.
The complete system consists of a main unit with full items installed.
❖ Weight:
29 kg (64.0 lb.) or less (with the fax and printer/scanner unit)
27 kg (59.6 lb.) or less (with copier function only)
29 kg (64.0 lb.) or less (with the DDST Unit)
Note
❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.
55
Appendix
Specifications for External Items
Following describes the items to be externally installed to the machine body.
Specification values represent the values when the copy function is used. Specification values may vary depending on the function used.
Exposure Glass Cover
Lower this over originals.
3
Auto Document Feeder capable of scanning both sides of a sheet
(ARDF)
❖ Mode:
• ADF mode
❖ Original size:
• Regular size:
One-sided originals: A4L - A5KL
One-sided originals: 81/2" × 14"L - 51/2" × 81/2"KL
Two-sided originals: A4L - A5L
Two-sided originals: 81/2" × 14"L - 51/2" × 81/2"L
• Custom size:
One-sided originals: 139 - 1260 mm (Horizontal)
Two-sided originals: 160 - 356 mm (Horizontal)
❖ Original weight:
• One-sided originals: 52 – 105 g/m2 (14 – 28 lb.)
• Two-sided originals: 52 – 105 g/m2 (14 – 28 lb.) (Duplex)*
* Originals that are 310 mm (13 in.) or longer in the feed direction should be
at least 64 g/m2 (17 lb.).
❖ Number of originals to be set:
• 50 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
❖ Maximum power consumption:
• Less than 50 W (Power is supplied from the main unit.)
❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):
• 485 × 360 × 120 mm, 19.1 × 14.2 × 4.8 inches
❖ Weight:
• 8 kg (17.7 lb.) or less
56
Specifications for External Items
Note
❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Paper Tray Unit (Tray 2)
❖ Paper weight:
60 – 90 g/m2 (16 – 24 lb.)
❖ Paper size:
A4L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 13"L, 81/2" × 11"L, 81/4" × 13"L, 81/4" × 14"L
3
❖ Maximum power consumption:
15 W (Power is supplied from the main frame.)
❖ Paper capacity:
500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):
430 × 414 × 140 mm, 17.0 × 16.3 × 5.6 inches
❖ Weight:
6 kg (13.3 lb.) or less
Note
❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.
57
Appendix
Copy Paper
This section describes recommended paper sizes and types, unusable paper, and
paper storage.
Recommended Paper Sizes and Types
The following limitations apply to each tray:
❖ Paper tray 1
3
Paper type and
weight
Standard paper
60-90 g/m2
(16-24 lb.)
Metric version
Inch version
A4L, A5K, B5 JISL, 81/2" × 11"L, 51/2" × 81/2"K, 16KL
Paper
capacity
250 sheets
❖ Paper tray unit (Tray 2)
Paper type and
weight
Standard paper
60-90 g/m2
(16-24 lb.)
Metric version
Inch version
A4L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 13"L, 81/2" × 11"L, 81/4" × 13"L,
81/4" × 14"L
Paper
capacity
500 sheets
❖ Bypass tray
Paper type and
weight
Standard paper
60-157 g/m2
(16-42 lb.)
Metric version
Inch version
A4L, A5KL, B5 JISL, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"L,
51/2" × 81/2" KL, 71/4" × 101/2"L, 8" × 13"L, 81/2" × 13"L,
81/4" × 13"L, 81/4" × 14"L, 16KL
Paper
capacity
100 sheets
Custom size
Custom size
(Vertical: 90.0-216.0 mm,
(Vertical: 3.55"-8.50",
Horizontal: 139.0-600.0 mm) *2 Horizontal: 5.48"-23.62") *2
Translucent paper A4L
10 sheets
OHP transparencies A4L, 81/2" × 11"L
10 sheets
Label paper
(adhesive labels)
A4L
1 sheet
Envelope *1
C5 EnvL, C6 EnvL, DL EnvL, 41/8" × 91/2"L, 37/8" × 71/2"L 10 sheets
*1
*2
58
Press the {q} key, and then select the size of the paper loaded in the tray.
Press the {q} key, select [Custom Size], and then specify the custom paper size using
the number keys.
Copy Paper
Note
❒ Load paper into the paper tray with the print side facing up.
❒ Load paper into the bypass tray with the print side facing down.
❒ When using the bypass tray, it is recommended that you set the paper orientation to L.
❒ You must manually specify the size of custom size paper when loading it on
the bypass tray.
❒ If multiple-sheet jams occur, load the paper sheet by sheet.
❒ Do not use paper designed for inkjet printers, as these may stick to the fusing
unit and cause a misfeed.
❒ Load adhesive label sheets one at a time. For details, see “Copying from the
Bypass Tray”, Copy Reference.
❒ To prevent misfeeds, when loading OHP transparencies, check both sides of
the sheets, and place them correctly.
❒ When loading OHP transparencies, select [OHP (Transparency)] as the paper
type for the bypass tray. For details, see “Copying from the Bypass Tray”,
Copy Reference.
❒ When loading thick paper (105-157 g/m2 (28-42 lb.)), or adhesive labels, make
sure the top of the stack is no higher than the upper limit of the bypass tray.
Paper capacity varies depending on the thickness and condition of the paper.
❒ When using thick paper (105-157 g/m2 (28-42 lb.)), select [Thick Paper] as the
paper type for the bypass tray. For details, see “Copying from the Bypass
Tray”, Copy Reference.
❒ When copying onto adhesive labels, in bypass settings, select [Thick Paper] for
the special paper setting.
❒ When copying onto letterhead paper, placing orientation differs according to
the function you are using. See “Orientation-Fixed Paper or Two-Sided Paper”, Troubleshooting.
❒ If you load paper of the same size in the same orientation in two trays, the machine automatically shifts to another tray when the first tray in use runs out
of paper. This function is called “Auto Tray Switching”. (However, if one tray
has recycled or special paper, the settings of the other tray must be the same
for Auto Tray Switching to work.) This saves interrupting a copy run to replenish paper when making a large number of copies. See “Copier Features”,
General Settings Guide, and “Tray Paper Settings”, General Settings Guide.
3
Reference
“Copying from the Bypass Tray”, Copy Reference
“Orientation-Fixed Paper or Two-Sided Paper”, Troubleshooting
“Copier Features”, General Settings Guide
“Tray Paper Settings”, General Settings Guide
59
Appendix
Unusable Paper
This section describes which types of paper are unusable on this machine.
R CAUTION:
• Do not use aluminum foil, carbon paper, or similar conductive paper to
avoid a fire or machine failure.
Important
❒ To prevent faults, do not use any of the following kinds of paper:
3
• Paper for inkjet printers
• Thermal fax paper
• Art paper
• Aluminum foil
• Carbon paper
• Conductive paper
• Paper with perforated lines
• Hemmed-edge paper
• Tab stock
❒ Faults can occur if you copy onto sides that are already printed. Take care to
copy onto unprinted sides only.
Note
❒ To prevent misfeeds, do not use the following kinds of paper:
• Bent, folded, or creased paper
• Torn paper
• Slippery paper
• Perforated paper
• Rough paper
• Thin paper with little stiffness
• Paper with a dusty surface
❒ If you copy onto rough grain paper, the image might be blurred.
60
Copy Paper
Paper Storage
This section describes how to store paper.
• When storing paper, the following precautions should always be followed:
• Do not store paper where it will be exposed to direct sunlight.
• Avoid storing paper in humid areas (humidity: 70% or more).
• Store on a flat surface.
• Do not store paper vertically.
• Under high temperature and humid conditions, or low temperature and humid conditions, store paper in vinyl bags.
3
61
INDEX
A
E
Add Toner indicator, 15
ARDF, 4, 11, 56
Auto off, 27
E-mail, vi
Energy-saving, 9
ENERGY STAR, 9
Entering letters, 31
Entering numbers, 37
Entering symbols, 34
Entering text, 29
Enter key (# key), 15
Error indicator, 15
Escape key, 15, 19
Exposure glass, 11
Exposure glass cover, 13, 56
External Items, 13
B
Bluetooth unit, 13
Bypass tray, 11
C
CAUTION, 5
Characters, 29
Check Destination key, 15
Clear Modes key, 15
Clear/Stop key, 15, 29
Color Scan Key, 15
Combine/Series key, 15
Communicating indicator, 15
Computer, ix
Control panel, 11, 20, 21
Copier, iv
Copy key, 15
Copy Paper, 58
F
Facsimile, iv
Facsimile key, 15
Fax Reception, vi
Fax Transmission, vi
Front cover, 11
H
Handset, 13
D
Darker key, 15
Data In indicator, 15
DDST Printer Driver, 47
DDST TWAIN Driver, 47
DDST Unit, 14
Deleting characters, 37
DeskTopBinder, 46
DeskTopBinder Lite, 44
Display, 19
Display panel, 15
Dos and Don'ts, 39
Duplex key, 15
Duplex unit, 13
I
IEEE 1284 Interface Board, 13
IEEE 802.11b wireless LAN board, 13
Installing the Operating Instructions, 48
Internal Items, 14
Internal tray, 11
Internal tray guide, 11
Internet Fax, vi
IP-Fax, vi
J
Job Information key, 15
L
LAN-Fax Driver, 43
Lighter key, 15
Load Paper indicator, 15
Login, 20, 21, 22
Logout, 21, 22
Lower Paper Trays, 13
Lower right cover, 11
62
M
Machine features, iv
Main Power, 24
Main power indicator, 11, 15
Main power switch, 11
Manuals, i
Memory Trans. key, 15
Monitoring, ix
N
Network, vii
Number keys, 15, 29
O
OK key, 15, 19
On Hook Dial key, 15
Online key, 15
Opening from the CD-ROM, 52
Opening from the Icon, 51
Opening from the Start Menu, 51
Opening the Installed Operating
Instructions, 51
Operation switch, 11, 15
Original key, 15
Other Items, 13, 14
P
Paper, 58
Paperless Fax, v
Paper Sizes, 58
Paper Storage, 61
Paper tray, 11
Paper tray unit (Tray 2), 11, 13, 57
Paper Types, 58
Pause/Redial key, 15
PCL, 41
PDF Manuals, 49
PDF Manuals for Machines with the
DDST Unit, 50
PostScript, 41
PPD, 41
Printer, iv
Printer Driver, 20, 22, 41
Printer Enhance Option, 14
Printer key, 15
Printer/Scanner unit, 13
Q
Quick Dial keys, 15, 29
R
Receive File indicator, 15
Resolution key, 15
Right cover, 11
RPCS, 41
S
Safety Information, 5
Saving Energy, 27
Scanner, iv, vii
Scanner key, 15
Scroll keys, 15, 19, 29
Search Destination key, 15
Security, viii
Selection keys, 15, 19
Shift key, 29
Sleep mode, 9
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, 45
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, 46
Software and Utilities
Included on the CD-ROM, 40
Software for Machines with the DDST Unit, 47
Sort key, 15
Space key, 29
Start key, 15
Symbols, 4
System Reset, 23
T
Text, 30
Turning Off the Main Power, 26
Turning Off the Power, 24, 25
Turning On the Main Power, 24
Turning On the Power, 24, 25
TWAIN Driver, 42
U
Unusable Paper, 60
User Code Authentication, 20
User Function keys, 15
User Text, 37
User Tools/Counter key, 15
V
Ventilation holes, 11
W
WARNING, 5
Web Image Monitor, ix, 22
63
64
EN
USA
B262-7653
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:
a means POWER ON.
c means STAND BY.
Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows® and Windows NT® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Adobe®, PostScript®, and Acrobat® are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.
NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
AppleTalk, Macintosh, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
PowerPC is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other
countries, or both.
UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through
X/Open Company Limited.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
•
The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® Windows® 95
•
The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft® Windows® 98
•
The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows® Millennium Edition (Windows Me)
•
The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
•
The product names of Windows® XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
•
The product names of Windows ServerTM 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Web Edition
•
The product names of Windows NT® are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0
Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0
Copyright © 2006
Operating Instructions About This Machine
Type for 816/DSm416/LD016/Aficio MP 161
Type for 816f/DSm416f/LD016f/Aficio MP 161F
Type for 816mf/DSm416pf/LD016spf/Aficio MP 161SPF
EN USA B262-7653
Operating Instructions
General Settings Guide
1
Connecting the Machine
2
System Settings
3
Copier Features
4
Fax Features
5
Printer Features
6
Scanner Features
7
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
8
Other User Tools
9
Appendix
Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the
Safety Information in "About This Machine" before using the machine.
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine. For your
safety and benefit, read this manual carefully before using the machine. Keep this manual in a handy
place for quick reference.
Important
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine.
Notes:
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Depending on which country you are in, certain units may be optional. For details, please contact your
local dealer.
Caution:
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.
Manuals for This Machine
Refer to the manuals that are relevant to what you want to do with the machine.
Manuals for machines with copier function only or with the DDST Unit are different. See "Manuals for Machines with Copier Function Only or with the DDST
Unit".
Important
❒ Media differ according to manual.
❒ The printed and electronic versions of a manual have the same contents.
❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader must be installed in order to view the
manuals as PDF files.
❒ Depending on which country you are in, there may also be html manuals. To
view these manuals, a Web browser must be installed.
❖ About This Machine
Be sure to read the Safety Information in this manual before using the machine.
This manual provides an introduction to the functions of the machine. It also
explains the control panel, preparation procedures for using the machine,
how to enter text, and how to install the CD-ROMs provided.
❖ General Settings Guide
Explains User Tools settings, and Address Book procedures such as registering fax numbers, e-mail addresses, and user codes. Also refer to this manual
for explanations on how to connect the machine.
❖ Troubleshooting
Provides a guide to solving common problems, and explains how to replace
paper, toner, and other consumables.
❖ Security Reference
This manual is for administrators of the machine. It explains security functions that the administrators can use to protect data from being tampered
with, or prevent the machine from unauthorized use.
Also refer to this manual for the procedures for registering administrators, as
well as setting user and administrator authentication.
❖ Copy Reference
Explains Copier functions and operations. Also refer to this manual for explanations on how to place originals.
❖ Facsimile Reference
Explains Facsimile functions and operations.
❖ Printer Reference
Explains Printer functions and operations.
❖ Scanner Reference
Explains Scanner functions and operations.
i
❖ Network Guide
Explains how to configure and operate the machine in a network environment, and use the software provided.
This manual covers all models, and includes descriptions of functions and
settings that might not be available on this machine. Images, illustrations, and
information about operating systems that are supported might also differ
slightly from those of this machine.
❖ Other manuals
• PostScript3 Supplement
• UNIX Supplement
• Manuals for DeskTopBinder Lite:
DeskTopBinder Lite Setup Guide
DeskTopBinder Introduction Guide
Auto Document Link Guide
Note
❒ Manuals provided are specific to machine types.
❒ For "UNIX Supplement", please visit our Web site or consult an authorized
dealer.
❒ "PostScript3 Supplement" and "UNIX Supplement" include descriptions of
functions and settings that might not be available on this machine.
The following software products are referred to using general names:
Product name
General name
DeskTopBinder Lite and DeskTopBinder Professional*1
DeskTopBinder
ScanRouter EX Professional*1 and ScanRouter
EX Enterprise*1
the ScanRouter delivery software
*1Optional
Reference
p.iii “Manuals for Machines with Copier Function Only or with the DDST
Unit”
ii
Manuals for Machines with Copier Function Only or with the DDST
Unit
This section describes the manuals for machines with copier function only or
with the DDST Unit.
❖ About This Machine
Be sure to read the Safety Information in this manual before using the machine.
This manual provides an introduction to the functions of the machine. It also
explains the control panel, preparation procedures for using the machine, and
how to install the CD-ROMs provided.
❖ General Settings Guide
Explains User Tools settings. Also refer to this manual for explanations on
how to register user codes.
❖ Troubleshooting
Provides a guide to solving common problems, and explains how to replace
paper, toner, and other consumables.
❖ Copy Reference
Explains Copier functions and operations. Also refer to this manual for explanations on how to place originals.
❖ Printer/Scanner Reference
Explains system settings, functions and operations for the machine's printer/scanner unit. Also refer to this manual for explanations on how to connect
the machine.
❖ Network Guide
Explains how to configure and operate the machine in a network environment, and use the software provided.
Note
❒ Some manuals include descriptions of functions and settings that are not
available on machines with copier function only or with the DDST Unit.
iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Machine ......................................................................................i
Manuals for Machines with Copier Function Only or with the DDST Unit ................. iii
How to Read This Manual .....................................................................................1
Symbols .....................................................................................................................1
Display Panel..........................................................................................................2
Reading the Display and Using Keys.........................................................................3
Accessing User Tools ...........................................................................................4
Changing Default Settings .........................................................................................4
Exiting User Tools ......................................................................................................5
Menu Protect..............................................................................................................5
Changing Default Settings Using Web Image Monitor...............................................6
1. Connecting the Machine
Connecting to the Interfaces ................................................................................7
Connecting to the Ethernet Interface .........................................................................8
Connecting to the USB Interface..............................................................................10
Connecting to the IEEE 1284 Interface....................................................................11
Connecting to the IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) Interface......................................12
Network Settings..................................................................................................15
Settings Required to Use the Printer/LAN-Fax ........................................................15
Settings Required to Use Internet Fax .....................................................................18
Settings Required to Use E-mail Function ...............................................................21
Settings Required to Use Scan to Folder Function ..................................................23
Settings Required to Use the Network Delivery Scanner.........................................25
Settings Required to Use Network TWAIN Scanner ................................................27
Using Utilities to Make Network Settings .................................................................29
Connecting the Machine to a Telephone Line and Telephone ........................37
Connecting the Telephone Line ...............................................................................37
Selecting the Line Type............................................................................................38
Connecting the Optional Handset or an External Telephone...................................38
2. System Settings
General Features..................................................................................................41
Tray Paper Settings .............................................................................................44
Timer Settings ......................................................................................................46
Interface Settings.................................................................................................48
Network ....................................................................................................................48
Parallel Interface ......................................................................................................52
IEEE 802.11b ...........................................................................................................53
Print I/F Settings List ................................................................................................54
File Transfer .........................................................................................................55
Administrator Tools.............................................................................................59
Program/Change/Delete LDAP Server ....................................................................64
Programming the LDAP Server................................................................................66
Key Operator Tools
(For machines with copier function only or with the DDST Unit)..................72
iv
User Code
(For machines with copier function only or with the DDST Unit)..................74
Registering a User Code..........................................................................................74
Changing a User Code.............................................................................................75
Deleting a User Code...............................................................................................76
Displaying the Counter for Each User Code ............................................................78
Printing the Counter for Each User Code.................................................................79
Clearing the Number of Prints..................................................................................80
3. Copier Features
Copier Features....................................................................................................81
4. Fax Features
General Settings/Adjust ......................................................................................85
Reception Settings ..............................................................................................87
E-mail Settings .....................................................................................................88
IP-Fax Settings .....................................................................................................90
Administrator Tools.............................................................................................93
Registering Fax Information ...............................................................................97
Registering Fax Information .....................................................................................98
Deleting Fax Information ........................................................................................101
Forwarding ......................................................................................................... 103
Programming an End Receiver ..............................................................................104
Canceling Receiver Settings ..................................................................................105
Printing a Forwarding Mark ....................................................................................106
Parameter Setting .............................................................................................. 107
Changing the User Parameters..............................................................................110
Printing the Parameter Settings List.......................................................................112
Home Position.................................................................................................... 113
Changing the Home Position .................................................................................115
Program Special Sender ................................................................................... 117
Authorized Reception.............................................................................................118
Forwarding .............................................................................................................119
Memory Lock..........................................................................................................119
Programming/Changing Special Senders ..............................................................120
Authorized RX (Authorized Reception) ..................................................................122
Forwarding .............................................................................................................122
Memory Lock..........................................................................................................124
Programming Initial Set Up of a Special Sender....................................................124
Deleting a Special Sender......................................................................................125
Printing Special Sender List ...................................................................................127
5. Printer Features
List/Test Print ..................................................................................................... 129
Printing the List/Test page .....................................................................................130
Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 131
System ................................................................................................................ 132
Host Interface ..................................................................................................... 135
PCL Menu ...........................................................................................................136
v
PS Menu.............................................................................................................. 138
PDF Menu ...........................................................................................................139
6. Scanner Features
Scan Settings ..................................................................................................... 141
Destination List Settings................................................................................... 143
Send Settings ..................................................................................................... 144
7. Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Address Book..................................................................................................... 147
Managing names in the Address Book ..................................................................150
Sending fax by Quick Dial ......................................................................................150
Sending e-mail by Quick Dial .................................................................................150
Sending scanned files to a shared folder directly...................................................150
Preventing unauthorized user access to shared folders from the machine ...........151
Managing users and machine usage .....................................................................151
Registering Names ............................................................................................ 152
Registering Names.................................................................................................152
Changing a Registered Name................................................................................154
Deleting a Registered Name ..................................................................................156
Authentication Information ............................................................................... 158
Registering a User Code........................................................................................158
Changing a User Code...........................................................................................161
Deleting a User Code.............................................................................................164
Displaying the Counter for Each User....................................................................166
Printing the Counter for Each User ........................................................................168
Printing the Counter for All User ............................................................................170
Clearing the Number of Prints................................................................................171
Fax Destination ..................................................................................................174
Fax Destination ......................................................................................................176
IP-Fax Destination..................................................................................................188
E-mail Destination.............................................................................................. 196
Registering E-mail Destination...............................................................................196
Changing a Registered E-mail Destination ............................................................199
Deleting a Registered E-mail Destination ..............................................................202
Registering Folders ........................................................................................... 205
Using SMB to Connect...........................................................................................205
Using FTP to Connect............................................................................................219
Using NCP to Connect ...........................................................................................230
Registering Names to a Group ......................................................................... 244
Registering a New Group.......................................................................................244
Registering Names to a Group...............................................................................246
Adding a Group to Another Group .........................................................................248
Displaying Names Registered in Groups ...............................................................250
Removing a Name from a Group ...........................................................................252
Deleting a Group within Another Group .................................................................254
Changing a Group Name .......................................................................................256
Deleting a Group ....................................................................................................258
vi
Registering a Protection Code ......................................................................... 260
Registering a Protection Code to a Single User.....................................................260
Registering a Protection Code to a Group User.....................................................264
Registering SMTP and LDAP Authentication.................................................. 267
SMTP Authentication .............................................................................................267
LDAP authentication ..............................................................................................271
Searching............................................................................................................275
Searching by Name................................................................................................275
Searching from the List ..........................................................................................276
Searching by Registration Number ........................................................................277
Searching by User Code ........................................................................................278
Searching by Fax Number .....................................................................................279
Searching by E-mail Address.................................................................................280
Searching by Destination Folder Name .................................................................281
Using Web Image Monitor................................................................................. 282
8. Other User Tools
Changing the Display Language ...................................................................... 283
Counter ............................................................................................................... 284
Displaying the Total Counter..................................................................................284
9. Appendix
Copyright Information about Installed Software.............................................285
expat ......................................................................................................................285
NetBSD ..................................................................................................................286
Sablotron................................................................................................................288
JPEG LIBRARY .....................................................................................................288
SASL ......................................................................................................................289
MD4........................................................................................................................290
MD5........................................................................................................................290
Samba(Ver 3.0.4)...................................................................................................291
RSA BSAFE® .........................................................................................................291
Open SSL...............................................................................................................292
Open SSH ..............................................................................................................294
Open LDAP ............................................................................................................299
INDEX....................................................................................................... 301
vii
viii
How to Read This Manual
Symbols
This manual uses the following symbols:
Indicates important safety notes.
Ignoring these notes could result in serious injury or death. Be sure to read these
notes. They can be found in the "Safety Information" section of About This Machine.
Indicates important safety notes.
Ignoring these notes could result in moderate or minor injury, or damage to the
machine or to property. Be sure to read these notes. They can be found in the
"Safety Information" section of About This Machine.
Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations
of likely causes of paper misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure
to read these explanations.
This symbol indicates information or preparations required prior to operating.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instructions on resolving user errors.
This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find further relevant information.
[]
Indicates the names of keys that appear on the machine's display panel.
{}
Indicates the names of keys on the machine's control panel.
1
Display Panel
The display panel shows machine status, error messages, and function menus.
Important
❒ A force or impact of more than 30 N (about 3 kgf) will damage the display
panel.
Using the System Settings menu screen as an example, this section explains how
to use the machine's display panel.
2
1
ARG001S
1. The settings menu appears. Press
the {U} or {T} key to scroll to the
setting you want to specify or
change, and then press the {OK} key
to display the screen for specifying
that setting.
2. The number of pages in the displayed settings menu appears. If you
cannot see the entire menu, press the
{U} or {T} key to scroll the screen.
2
Reading the Display and Using Keys
This section explains how to read the display and use the Selection keys.
Using the Machine IPv4 Address setting screen as an example, this section explains how to use the machine's control panel.
ARH010S
1. Selection keys
3. {OK} key
Correspond to items at the bottom line on
the display.
Press to set a selected item or an entered
numeric value.
• When the instruction "press [IP Add.]"
appears in this manual, press the left
selection key.
• When the instruction "press [Subnet
M]" appears in this manual, press the
center selection key.
• When the instruction "press [Mac Add.]"
appears in this manual, press the right
selection key.
4. Scroll keys
Press to move the cursor in each direction, step by step.
When the {U}, {T}, {V} or {W} key appears in this manual, press the scroll key
of the same direction.
2. {Escape} key
Press to cancel an operation or return to
the previous display.
3
Accessing User Tools
User Tools allow you to change or set defaults.
Note
❒ Operations for system settings differ from normal operations. Always quit
User Tools when you have finished.
❒ Any changes you make with User Tools remain in effect even if the main
power switch or operation switch is turned off, or {Clear Modes} key is
pressed.
Reference
p.4 “Changing Default Settings”
Changing Default Settings
This section describes how to change the settings of User Tools.
Important
❒ If Administrator Authentication Management is specified, contact your administrator.
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
ARG011S
B Select the menu using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
4
To change the System Settings, select [System Settings].
To change the Copier Features, select [Copier Features].
To change the Fax Features, select [Fax Features].
To change the Printer Features, select [Printer Features].
To change the Scanner Features, select [Scanner Features].
To change the language used on the display, select [Language].
To check the counter, select [Counter].
C Select the item using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Change settings by following instructions on the display, and then press
the {OK} key.
Note
❒ Press the {Escape} key to return to the previous display.
❒ To discontinue the operation and return to the initial display, press the
{User Tools/Counter} key.
Exiting User Tools
This section describes how to end User Tools.
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
ARG011S
Menu Protect
Using Menu Protect, you can prevent unauthenticated users from changing the
user tools. Menu Protect can be specified for each of the following user tools
menus.
• Copier Features
• Fax Features
• Printer Features
• Scanner Features
For details, consult your administrator.
5
Changing Default Settings Using Web Image Monitor
This section describes how to access the Web Image Monitor.
You can also change the settings of this machine using Web Image Monitor.
A Start your Web browser.
B Enter “http://(machine's address)/” in the address bar of a Web browser.
Top page of Web Image Monitor appears.
If the machine's host name has been registered on the DNS or WINS server,
you can enter it.
When setting SSL, a protocol for encrypted communication, under environment which server authentication is issued, enter "https://(machine's address)/".
C Click [Login].
D Enter a login user name and password, and then click [Login].
For details about the login user name and password, consult your network
administrator.
E Click [Configuration].
F Click the menu.
G Change settings.
For details about how to use Web Image Monitor, see "Using Web Image
Monitor", Network Guide and Web Image Monitor Help.
6
1. Connecting the Machine
This chapter describes how to connect the machine to the network and specify
the network settings.
Connecting to the Interfaces
This section explains how to identify the machine’s interface and connect the
machine according to the network environment.
For machines with the DDST Unit, see "Confirming Connection", Network
Guide, and "Connecting the machine", Printer/Scanner Reference.
ARH008S
1. USB port
3. IEEE 1284 port (optional)
Port for connecting the USB 2.0 cable
Port for connecting the IEEE 1284 interface cable
2. 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX port
Port for connecting the 10BASE-T or
100BASE-TX cable
4. IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) port
(optional)
Port for using the wireless LAN
Note
❒ You cannot install two or more of the following options: IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) board, IEEE 1284 interface board.
Reference
"Confirming Connection", Network Guide
"Connecting the machine", Printer/Scanner Reference
7
Connecting the Machine
Connecting to the Ethernet Interface
This section describes how to connect 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX cable to the Ethernet interface.
1
Important
❒ If the main power switch is on, turn it off.
A A ferrite core for the Ethernet cable is supplied with this machine. Make a
loop in the cable about 3 cm (1.2 inch) (1) from the machine end of the cable.
Attach the ferrite core.
ARH009S
B Make sure the main power switch of the machine is off.
C Connect the Ethernet interface cable to the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX port.
ARH005S
D Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to a network connection device
such as a hub.
8
Connecting to the Interfaces
E Turn on the main power switch of the machine.
1
AME005S
A
B
Indicator (green)
Lights up green when the machine is connected correctly to the network.
Indicator (yellow)
Lights up yellow when 100 BASE-TX is in operation. Goes off when 10
BASE-T is in operation.
Note
❒ For details about installing the printer driver, see "Preparing the Machine",
Printer Reference.
Reference
"Turning On the Power" About This Machine
"Preparing the Machine", Printer Reference
9
Connecting the Machine
Connecting to the USB Interface
This section describes how to connect the USB2.0 interface cable to the USB2.0
port.
1
A Connect the USB 2.0 interface cable to the USB 2.0 port.
ARH004S
B Connect the other end to the USB port on the host computer.
Note
❒ This machine does not come with a USB interface cable. Make sure you
purchase the appropriate cable for the machine and your computer.
❒ The USB 2.0 interface board is supported by Windows Me / 2000 / XP,
Windows Server 2003, Mac OS X10.3.3 or higher.
• For Windows Me:
Make sure to install "USB Printing Support". When used with Windows
Me, only a speed equal to that of USB 1.1 is possible.
• For Mac OS:
To use Macintosh, the machine must be equipped with the optional
PostScript 3 unit. When used with Mac OS X10.3.3 or higher, a transfer
speed of USB 2.0 is supported.
❒ For details about installing the printer driver, see "Preparing the Machine",
Printer Reference.
Reference
"Preparing the Machine", Printer Reference
10
Connecting to the Interfaces
Connecting to the IEEE 1284 Interface
This section describes how to connect the IEEE 1284 interface cable to the IEEE
1284 interface board.
1
A Make sure the main power switch on the machine is off.
If the main power switch is on, turn it off.
B Turn off the main power switch of the host computer.
C Connect the IEEE 1284 interface cable to the IEEE 1284 port.
ARH003S
D Connect the other end of the cable into the interface connector on the host
computer.
Check the shape of the connector to the computer. Connect the cable firmly.
E Turn on the main power switch of the machine.
F Turn on the host computer.
When using Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP and Windows Server 2003, a
printer driver installation screen might appear when the computer is turned
on. If this happens, click [Cancel] on the screen.
Note
❒ For details about installing the printer driver, see "Preparing the Machine",
Printer Reference.
Reference
"Turning On the Power" About This Machine
"Preparing the Machine", Printer Reference
11
Connecting the Machine
Connecting to the IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) Interface
This section describes how to connect to the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) interface.
1
Note
❒ Check the settings of the IPv4 address and subnet mask of this machine.
❒ For details about how to set the IPv4 address and subnet mask from the control panel of the machine, see "Interface Settings".
❒ Before using this machine with an IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) connection,
you must select [IEEE 802.11b] in [LAN Type].
Reference
p.48 “Network”
Setup Procedure
This section describes how to setup IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) interface.
Set up IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) according to the following procedure:
ARH007S
12
Connecting to the Interfaces
Note
❒ Select [802.11 Ad hoc] mode when connecting Windows XP as a wireless LAN
client using Windows XP standard driver or utilities, or when not using the
infrastructure mode.
1
❒ For details about how to specify wireless LAN settings from the control panel
on the machine, see "IEEE 802.11b".
❒ For details about how to specify wireless LAN settings from other than the
control panel on the machine, see "Using Utilities to Make Network Settings".
❒ For details about the setting items, see "IEEE 802.11b".
Reference
p.53 “IEEE 802.11b”
p.29 “Using Utilities to Make Network Settings”
Checking the Connection
Check the wireless LAN connection.
Make sure the LED of the IEEE 802.11b interface unit is lit.
❖ When using in infrastructure mode
1
2
ZGDH600J
1. If [LAN Type] on the [Interface Settings] / [Network] screen is not set to [IEEE
802.11b], it does not light, even if the main power is on.
2. If it is connected properly to the network, the LED is green when in infrastructure mode. If the LED is blinking, the machine is searching for devices.
13
Connecting the Machine
❖ When using in ad hoc mode / 802.11 ad hoc mode
1
1
2
ZGDH600J
1. If the IEEE 802.11b interface unit is functioning, the LED lights up in orange.
2. If it is connected properly to the network, the LED is green when in ad hoc
mode or 802.11 ad hoc mode. If the LED is blinking, the machine is searching
for devices. The LED will light after a few seconds.
Print the configuration page to verify settings.
Note
❒ For details about printing a configuration page, see "Print I/F Settings".
Reference
p.54 “Print I/F Settings List”
Checking the Signal
This section describes how to check the machine's radio wave status.
When using in infrastructure mode, you can check the machine's radio wave status using the control panel.
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Interface Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [IEEE 802.11b] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [Wireless LAN Signal] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
The machine's radio wave status appears.
E After checking radio wave status, press the {OK} key.
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key to return to the User Tools/Counter menu.
Note
❒ For the procedure of entering the System Settings, see "Accessing User Tools".
Reference
p.4 “Accessing User Tools”
p.29 “Using Utilities to Make Network Settings”
p.53 “IEEE 802.11b”
14
Network Settings
Network Settings
This section describes the network settings you can change with User Tools (System Settings). Make settings according to functions you want to use and the interface to be connected.
For machines with the DDST Unit, see "User Tools Menu (Interface Settimgs)",
Network Guide.
1
Important
❒ These settings should be made by the system administrator, or with the advice the system administrator.
Reference
"User Tools Menu (Interface Settimgs)", Network Guide.
Settings Required to Use the Printer/LAN-Fax
This section lists the settings required for using the printer or LAN-Fax function.
Ethernet
This section lists the settings required for using the printer or LAN-Fax function
with an Ethernet connection.
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings".
Menu
User Tool
Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/Network
Machine IPv4 Address
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
IPv4 Gateway Address
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Machine IPv6 Address
As required
Interface Settings/Network
IPv6 Gateway Address
As required
Interface Settings/Network
IPv6 Stateless Setting
As required
Interface Settings/Network
DNS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
DDNS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Domain Name
As required
Interface Settings/Network
WINS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Effective Protocol
Interface Settings/Network
NCP Delivery Protocol
As required
Interface Settings/Network
NW Frame Type
As required
Interface Settings/Network
SMB Computer Name
As required
Interface Settings/Network
SMB Work Group
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Ethernet Speed
As required
Interface Settings/Network
LAN Type
Necessary
Necessary
15
Connecting the Machine
Menu
1
User Tool
Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/Network
Permit SNMPv3 Communictn.
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Permit SSL/TLS Comm.
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Host Name
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Machine Name
As required
Note
❒ IPv6 can be used only for the printer function.
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
❒ [LAN Type] is displayed when the wireless LAN board is installed. If Ethernet
and IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) are both connected, the selected interface
has priority.
Reference
p.48 “Interface Settings”
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)
This section lists the settings required for using the printer or LAN-Fax function
with IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN).
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings".
Menu
16
User Tool
Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/Network
Machine IPv4 Address
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
IPv4 Gateway Address
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Machine IPv6 Address
As required
Interface Settings/Network
IPv6 Gateway Address
As required
Interface Settings/Network
IPv6 Stateless Setting
As required
Interface Settings/Network
DNS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
DDNS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Domain Name
As required
Interface Settings/Network
WINS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Effective Protocol
Interface Settings/Network
NCP Delivery Protocol
As required
Interface Settings/Network
NW Frame Type
As required
Interface Settings/Network
SMB Computer Name
As required
Interface Settings/Network
SMB Work Group
As required
Interface Settings/Network
LAN Type
Interface Settings/Network
Permit SNMPv3 Communictn.
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Permit SSL/TLS Comm.
As required
Necessary
Necessary
Network Settings
Menu
User Tool
Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/Network
Host Name
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Machine Name
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
SSID Setting
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Channel
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Security Type
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Speed
As required
1
Necessary
Note
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
❒ [IEEE 802.11b] and [LAN Type] are displayed when the wireless LAN interface
board is installed. If both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the selected interface takes precedence.
Reference
p.48 “Interface Settings”
17
Connecting the Machine
Settings Required to Use Internet Fax
This section lists the settings required for using Internet Fax.
1
Ethernet
This section lists the settings required for using Internet FAX.
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File
Transfer".
Menu
18
User Tool
Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/Network
Machine IPv4 Address
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
IPv4 Gateway Address
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
DNS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
DDNS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Domain Name
As required
Interface Settings/Network
WINS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Effective Protocol
Interface Settings/Network
Ethernet Speed
Interface Settings/Network
LAN Type
Interface Settings/Network
Permit SNMPv3 Communictn.
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Permit SSL/TLS Comm.
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Host Name
As required
File Transfer
SMTP Server
File Transfer
SMTP Authentication
As required
File Transfer
POP before SMTP
As required
File Transfer
Reception Protocol
As required
File Transfer
POP3/IMAP4 Settings
As required
File Transfer
Admin. E-mail Address
As required
File Transfer
E-mail Communication Port
File Transfer
E-mail Recept. Interval
As required
File Transfer
Max. Recept. E-mail Size
As required
File Transfer
E-mail Storage in Server
As required
File Transfer
Fax E-mail Account
Necessary
As required
Necessary
Necessary
Necessary
Necessary
Network Settings
Note
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
❒ [LAN Type] is displayed when the wireless LAN interface board is installed. If
both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the selected interface takes precedence.
❒ SMTP Server and Fax E-mail Account must be specified in order to use the
send function.
❒ When POP before SMTP is set to [On], also make setting for Reception Protocol and POP3/IMAP4 Settings.
❒ When SMTP Authentication is set to [On], also make setting for Admin. Email Address.
❒ E-mail Communication Port and Fax E-mail Account must be specified in order to use the reception function.
❒ When setting POP before SMTP to [On], check POP3 port number in E-mail
Communication Port.
1
Reference
p.48 “Interface Settings”
p.55 “File Transfer”
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)
This section lists the settings required for using Internet FAX with IEEE 802.11b
(wireless LAN).
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File
Transfer".
Menu
User Tool
Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/Network
Machine IPv4 Address
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
IPv4 Gateway Address
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
DNS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
DDNS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Domain Name
As required
Interface Settings/Network
WINS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Effective Protocol
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
LAN Type
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
Permit SNMPv3 Communictn.
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Permit SSL/TLS Comm.
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Host Name
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode
Necessary
19
Connecting the Machine
Menu
1
User Tool
Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
SSID Setting
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Channel
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Security Type
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Speed
As required
File Transfer
SMTP Server
File Transfer
SMTP Authentication
As required
File Transfer
POP before SMTP
As required
File Transfer
Reception Protocol
As required
File Transfer
POP3/IMAP4 settings
As required
File Transfer
Admin. E-mail Address
As required
File Transfer
E-mail Communication Port
File Transfer
E-mail Recept. Interval
As required
File Transfer
Max. Recept. E-mail Size
As required
File Transfer
E-mail Storage in Server
As required
File Transfer
Fax E-mail Account
Necessary
Necessary
Necessary
Note
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
❒ [IEEE 802.11b] and [LAN Type] are displayed when the wireless LAN interface
board is installed. If both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the selected interface takes precedence.
❒ SMTP Server and Fax E-mail Account must be specified in order to use the
send function.
❒ When POP before SMTP is set to [On], also make setting for Reception Protocol and POP3/IMAP4 Settings.
❒ When SMTP Authentication is set to [On], also make setting for Admin. Email Address.
❒ E-mail Communication Port and Fax E-mail Account must be specified in order to use the reception function.
❒ When setting POP before SMTP to [On], check POP3 port number in E-mail
Communication Port.
Reference
p.48 “Interface Settings”
p.55 “File Transfer”
20
Network Settings
Settings Required to Use E-mail Function
This section lists the settings required for sending e-mail.
1
Ethernet
This section lists the settings required for sending e-mail with Ethernet cable.
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File
Transfer".
Menu
User Tool
Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/Network
Machine IPv4 Address
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
IPv4 Gateway Address
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
DNS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
DDNS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Domain Name
As required
Interface Settings/Network
WINS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Effective Protocol
Interface Settings/Network
Ethernet Speed
Interface Settings/Network
LAN Type
Interface Settings/Network
Permit SNMPv3 Communictn.
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Host Name
As required
File Transfer
SMTP Server
File Transfer
SMTP Authentication
As required
File Transfer
POP before SMTP
As required
File Transfer
Reception Protocol
As required
File Transfer
POP3/IMAP4 Settings
As required
File Transfer
Admin. E-mail Address
As required
File Transfer
E-mail Communication Port
As required
Necessary
As required
Necessary
Necessary
Note
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
❒ [LAN Type] is displayed when the wireless LAN interface board is installed. If
both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the selected interface takes precedence.
❒ When POP before SMTP is set to [On], also make setting for Reception Protocol and POP3/IMAP4 Settings.
❒ When setting POP before SMTP to [On], check POP3 port number in E-mail
Communication Port.
21
Connecting the Machine
Reference
p.48 “Interface Settings”
p.55 “File Transfer”
1
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)
This section lists the settings required for sending e-mail with IEEE 802.11b
(wireless LAN).
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File
Transfer".
Menu
22
User Tool
Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/Network
Machine IPv4 Address
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
IPv4 Gateway Address
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
DNS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
DDNS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Domain Name
As required
Interface Settings/Network
WINS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Effective Protocol
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
LAN Type
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
Permit SNMPv3 Communictn.
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Permit SSL/TLS Comm.
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Host Name
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
SSID Setting
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Channel
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Security Type
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Speed
As required
File Transfer
SMTP Server
File Transfer
SMTP Authentication
As required
File Transfer
POP before SMTP
As required
File Transfer
Reception Protocol
As required
File Transfer
POP3/IMAP4 Settings
As required
File Transfer
Admin. E-mail Address
As required
File Transfer
E-mail Communication Port
As required
Necessary
Necessary
Network Settings
Note
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
❒ [LAN Type] is displayed when the wireless LAN interface board is installed. If
both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the selected interface takes precedence.
❒ When POP before SMTP is set to [On], also make setting for Reception Protocol and POP3/IMAP4 Settings.
❒ When setting POP before SMTP to [On], check POP3 port number in E-mail
Communication Port.
1
Reference
p.48 “Interface Settings”
p.55 “File Transfer”
Settings Required to Use Scan to Folder Function
This section lists the settings required for sending file.
Ethernet
This section lists the settings required for sending file with Ethernet cable.
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File
Transfer".
Menu
User Tool
Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/Network
Machine IPv4 Address
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
IPv4 Gateway Address
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
DNS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
DDNS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Domain Name
As required
Interface Settings/Network
WINS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Effective Protocol
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
LAN Type
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
Permit SNMPv3 Communictn.
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Permit SSL/TLS Comm.
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Host Name
As required
File Transfer
Default User Name/PW(Send)
As required
23
Connecting the Machine
Note
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
❒ [LAN Type] is displayed when the wireless LAN interface board is installed. If
both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the selected interface takes precedence.
1
Reference
p.48 “Interface Settings”
p.55 “File Transfer”
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)
This section lists the settings required for sending file with IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN).
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File
Transfer".
Menu
24
User Tool
Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/Network
Machine IPv4 Address
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
IPv4 Gateway Address
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
DNS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
DDNS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Domain Name
As required
Interface Settings/Network
WINS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Effective Protocol
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
LAN Type
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
Permit SNMPv3 Communictn.
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Permit SSL/TLS Comm.
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Host Name
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
SSID Setting
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Channel
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Security Type
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Speed
As required
File Transfer
Default User Name/PW(Send)
As required
Necessary
Network Settings
Note
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
❒ [IEEE 802.11b] and [LAN Type] are displayed when the wireless LAN interface
board is installed. If both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the selected interface takes precedence.
1
Reference
p.48 “Interface Settings”
p.55 “File Transfer”
Settings Required to Use the Network Delivery Scanner
This section lists the settings required for delivering data to network.
Ethernet
This section lists the settings required for delivering data to network with Ethernet cable.
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File
Transfer".
Menu
User Tool
Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/Network
Machine IPv4 Address
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
IPv4 Gateway Address
As required
Interface Settings/Network
DNS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
DDNS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Domain Name
As required
Interface Settings/Network
WINS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Effective Protocol
Interface Settings/Network
Ethernet Speed
Interface Settings/Network
LAN Type
Interface Settings/Network
Permit SNMPv3 Communictn.
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Permit SSL/TLS Comm.
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Host Name
As required
File Transfer
Delivery Option
As required
Necessary
As required
Necessary
25
Connecting the Machine
Note
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
❒ [LAN Type] is displayed when the wireless LAN interface board is installed.
When both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the selected interface takes precedence.
❒ If Delivery Option is set to [On], check that IPv4 Address is set.
1
Reference
p.48 “Interface Settings”
p.55 “File Transfer”
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)
This section lists the settings required for delivering data to network with IEEE
802.11b (wireless LAN).
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File
Transfer".
Menu
26
User Tool
Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/Network
Machine IPv4 Address
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
IPv4 Gateway Address
As required
Interface Settings/Network
DNS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
DDNS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Domain Name
As required
Interface Settings/Network
WINS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Effective Protocol
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
LAN Type
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
Permit SNMPv3 Communictn.
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Permit SSL/TLS Comm.
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Host Name
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
SSID Setting
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Channel
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Security Type
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Speed
As required
File Transfer
Delivery Option
As required
Necessary
Network Settings
Note
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
❒ [IEEE 802.11b] and [LAN Type] are displayed when the wireless LAN interface
board is installed. When both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are
connected, the selected interface takes precedence.
❒ If Delivery Option is set to [On], check that IPv4 Address is set.
1
Reference
p.48 “Interface Settings”
p.55 “File Transfer”
Settings Required to Use Network TWAIN Scanner
This section lists the settings required for using TWAIN Scanner under the network environment.
Ethernet
This section lists the settings required for using network TWAIN Scanner with
Ethernet cable.
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings".
Menu
User Tool
Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/Network
Machine IPv4 Address
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
IPv4 Gateway Address
As required
Interface Settings/Network
DNS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
DDNS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Domain Name
As required
Interface Settings/Network
WINS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Effective Protocol
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
LAN Type
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
Ethernet Speed
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Permit SNMPv3 Communictn.
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Permit SSL/TLS Comm.
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Host Name
As required
Note
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
❒ [LAN Type] is displayed when the wireless LAN interface board is installed.
When both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the selected interface takes precedence.
27
Connecting the Machine
Reference
p.48 “Interface Settings”
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)
1
This section lists the settings required for using network TWAIN Scanner with
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN).
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings".
Menu
User Tool
Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/Network
Machine IPv4 Address
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
IPv4 Gateway Address
As required
Interface Settings/Network
DNS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
DDNS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Domain Name
As required
Interface Settings/Network
WINS Configuration
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Effective Protocol
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
LAN Type
Necessary
Interface Settings/Network
Permit SNMPv3 Communictn.
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Permit SSL/TLS Comm.
As required
Interface Settings/Network
Host Name
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
SSID Setting
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Channel
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Security Type
As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Speed
As required
Necessary
Note
❒ For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
❒ [IEEE 802.11b] and [LAN Type] are displayed when the wireless LAN interface
board is installed. When both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are
connected, the selected interface takes precedence.
Reference
p.48 “Interface Settings”
28
Network Settings
Using Utilities to Make Network Settings
You can also specify network settings using utilities such as Web Image Monitor,
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, and telnet.
1
Note
❒ For details about using Web Image Monitor, see "Using Web Image Monitor",
Network Guide.
❒ For details about using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, see "Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin", Network Guide.
❒ For Details about using telnet, see "Remote Maintenance by telnet", Network
Guide.
Reference
"Using Web Image Monitor" Network Guide
"Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin" Network Guide
"Remote Maintenance by telnet", Network Guide
Interface Settings
Change settings by using Web Image Monitor, SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin,
and telnet.
❖ [Network] → [Machine IPv4 Address] → [Auto-Obtain (DHCP)]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network] → [Machine IPv4 Address] → [Specify] → [IP Add.]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network] → [Machine IPv4 Address] → [Specify] → [Subnet M]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network] → [IPv4 Gateway Address]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
29
Connecting the Machine
❖ [Network] → [Machine IPv6 Address] → [Manual Config. Address]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
1
❖ [Network] → [IPv6 Stateless Setting]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network] → [DNS Configuration] → [Auto-Obtain (DHCP)]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network] → [DNS Configuration] → [Specify] → [Server 1-3]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network] → [DDNS Configuration]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network] → [Domain Name] → [Auto-Obtain (DHCP)]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network] → [Domain Name] → [Specify] → [Domain Name]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network] → [WINS Configuration] → [On] → [Server 1-2]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
30
Network Settings
❖ [Network] → [WINS Configuration] → [On] → [Scope ID]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
1
❖ [Network] → [Effective Protocol] → [IPv4]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: When in communication with this machine with IPX/SPX, TCP/IP setting is enabled.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network] → [Effective Protocol] → [IPv6]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network] → [Effective Protocol] → [NetWare]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: When in communication with this machine with TCP/IP, NetWare (IPX/SPX) setting is enabled.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network] → [Effective Protocol] → [SMB]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network] → [Effective Protocol] → [AppleTalk]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network] → [NCP Delivery Protocol]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network] → [NW Frame Type] → [Auto Select]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
31
Connecting the Machine
❖ [Network] → [NW Frame Type] → [Ethernet II]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
1
❖ [Network] → [NW Frame Type] → [Ethernet 802.2]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network] → [NW Frame Type] → [Ethernet 802.3]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network] → [NW Frame Type] → [Ethernet SNAP]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network] → [SMB Computer Name]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network] → [SMB Work Group]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network] → [Ethernet Speed]
• Web Image Monitor: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network] → [LAN Type] → [Ethernet]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
32
Network Settings
❖ [Network] → [LAN Type] → [IEEE 802.11b]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
1
❖ [Network] → [Ping Command]
• Web Image Monitor: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network] → [Permit SNMPv3 Communictn.] → [Encryption Only]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network] → [Permit SNMPv3 Communictn.] → [Encryption/Clear Text]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network] → [Permit SSL/TLS Comm.] → [Ciphertext Only]
• Web Image Monitor: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network] → [Permit SSL/TLS Comm.] → [Ciphertext Priority]
• Web Image Monitor: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network] → [Host Name]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [Network] → [Machine Name]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
33
Connecting the Machine
❖ [IEEE 802.11b] → [Communication Mode]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
1
❖ [IEEE 802.11b] → [SSID Setting]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [IEEE 802.11b] → [Channel]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [IEEE 802.11b] → [Security Type]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [IEEE 802.11b] → [Communication Speed]
• Web Image Monitor: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
File Transfer
Change settings by using Web Image Monitor, SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin,
and telnet.
❖ [File Transfer] → [SMTP Server]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [File Transfer] → [SMTP Authentication]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
34
Network Settings
❖ [File Transfer] → [POP before SMTP]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
1
❖ [File Transfer] → [Reception Protocol]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [File Transfer] → [POP3/IMAP4 Settings]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [File Transfer] → [Admin. E-mail Address]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [File Transfer] → [E-mail Communication Port]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [File Transfer] → [E-mail Recept. Interval]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [File Transfer] → [Max. Recept. E-mail Size]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
❖ [File Transfer] → [E-mail Storage in Server]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
35
Connecting the Machine
❖ [File Transfer] → [Default User Name/PW(Send)]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
1
❖ [File Transfer] → [Fax E-mail Account]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
36
Connecting the Machine to a Telephone Line and Telephone
Connecting the Machine to a Telephone
Line and Telephone
1
This section describes how to connect the machine to the telephone lines and select the line type.
Connecting the Telephone Line
To connect the machine to a telephone line, use a snap-in modular type connector.
R CAUTION:
• To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord.
RATTENTION:
• Pour réduire le risque d'incendie, utiliser uniquement des conducteurs de télécommunications 26 AWG ou de section supérieure.
Important
❒ By law in the United States, you must program your phone number identification (your fax number) into your machine before you can connect the public
phone system. See "Registering Fax Information".
❒ Make sure the connector is the correct type before you start.
1
2
ARH006S
1. G3 (analog) line interface connector
2. External telephone connector
37
Connecting the Machine
Selecting the Line Type
Select the line type to which the machine is connected. There are two types: tone
and pulse dial.
Select the line type using "Administrator Tools".
1
Note
❒ This function is not available in some regions.
Reference
p.85 “Fax Features”
Connecting the Optional Handset or an External Telephone
You can connect the optional handset or an external telephone to the machine.
You can use it for telephone calls.
Limitation
❒ When you use the optional handset or an external telephone with the {On
Hook Dial} key for telephone calls, you can not talk with the other party without pressing the {On Hook Dial} key after taking off the receiver.
❖ Specifying the handset line type
ND1X00E0
The switch on the handset should be in the appropriate position-TT (Tone Dialing) or DP (Pulse Dialing).
38
Connecting the Machine to a Telephone Line and Telephone
❖ Adjusting the handset bell volume
1
ND1X00E1
Adjust the handset ringer volume using the volume switch.
Note
❒ Some external telephones may not be connected or may suffer reduced functionality.
39
Connecting the Machine
1
40
2. System Settings
This chapter describes user tools in the System Settings menu. For details on
how to access System Settings, see "Accessing User Tools".
General Features
This section describes the user tools in the General Features menu under System
Settings.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
❖ Prog/Change/Del User Text
You can register text phrases you often use when specifying settings, such as
“.com" and “Regards".
You can register up to 40 entries.
Program/Change:
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [General Features] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Prog/Change/Del User Text] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
D Select [Program/Change] to program/change text phrases using {U} or {T},
and then press the {OK} key.
E Select [*Not Programmed] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
To change programmed text phrases, select the text phrases you want to
change/delete.
F Enter the text phrases you want to program, and then press the {OK} key.
G Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Delete:
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [General Features] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Prog/Change/Del User Text] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
D Select [Delete] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Select the text phrases you want to delete using {U} or {T}, and then press
the {OK} key.
F Press [Yes].
To cancel deleting a text phrase, press [No].
G Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
41
System Settings
❖ Panel Key Sound
The beeper (key tone) sounds when a key is pressed.
The default setting is On.
❖ Warm-up Beeper (copier)
You can have the beeper sound when the machine becomes ready to copy after leaving Energy Saver mode, or when the power is turned on.
The default setting is On.
2
❖ Copy Count Display
The copy counter can be set to show the number of copies made (count up) or
the number of copies yet to be made (count down).
The default setting is Up.
❖ Function Priority
Specify the mode to be displayed immediately after the operation switch is
turned on, or when System Reset mode is turned on.
The default setting is Copier.
❖ Print Priority
Gives print priority to the mode displayed.
The default setting is Display mode.
When [Interleave] is selected, the current print job will be interrupted after a
maximum of five sheets.
❖ Function Reset Timer
You can set the length of time the machine waits before changing modes
when using the multi-access function.
This is useful if you are making many copies and have to change settings for
each copy. If you set a longer reset period, you can prevent interruption from
other functions.
The Function Reset Timer setting is ignored if [Interleave] is set for Print Priority.
The default setting is Set Time.
When you select [Set Time], enter the time (3–30 seconds, in 1 second increments) using the number keys.
The default setting for Set Time is 3 seconds.
❖ Screen Contrast
You can adjust the brightness of the display.
The default setting is "4" (the halfway/medium setting).
❖ Key Repeat
Set whether or not to repeat the functions of the {U}, {T}, {Lighter}, and
{Darker} keys when those keys are pressed and held down.
The default setting is Normal / On.
42
General Features
❖ Measurement Unit
You can switch the measurement between "mm" and "inch".
The default setting is inch.
Note
❒ If the Panel Key Sound setting is "Off", the beeper does not sound, whatever
the Warm-up Beeper setting.
2
Reference
p.4 “Accessing User Tools”
43
System Settings
Tray Paper Settings
This section describes the user tools in the Tray Paper Settings menu under System Settings.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
Important
❒ If the specified paper size differs from the actual size of the paper loaded in
the paper tray, a misfeed might occur because the correct paper size was not
detected.
2
❖ Paper Size: Tray 1 -2
Select the size of the paper loaded in the paper tray.
• The paper sizes you can set for Tray 1 are as follows:
A4L, A5K, B5 JISL, 81/2"×11"L, 51/2"×81/2"K, 16KL
The default setting is A4L / 81/2"×11"L.
• The paper sizes you can set for Tray 2 are as follows:
A4L, 81/2"×14"L, 81/2"×13"L, 81/2"×11"L, 81/4"×14"L, 81/4"×13"L
The default setting is A4L / 81/2"×11"L.
❖ Printer Bypass Paper Size
Specify the size of the paper in the bypass tray when using the printer function. You can select paper size from Custom size or Regular size.
• The paper sizes you can set for bypass tray are as follows:
A4L, A5K, A5L, B5 JISL, C6 EnvL, C5 EnvL, DL EnvL, 81/2"×14"L,
8 1 / 2 "×13"L, 8 1 / 2 "×11"L, 8 1 / 4 "×13"L, 8"×13"L, 7 1 / 4 "×10 1 / 2 "L,
51/2"×81/2"K, 51/2"×81/2"L, 41/8"×91/2L, 37/8"×71/2"L, 16KL, Custom
Size
You can specify a custom size as follows:
90.0 to 216.0 mm (3.55 to 8.50 inch) vertically, and 139.0 to 600.0 mm (5.48
to 23.62 inch) horizontally.
The default setting is A4L / 81/2"×11"L.
❖ Paper Type: Bypass Tray
Sets the display so you can see what type of paper is loaded in the bypass tray.
• The paper types you can set for the bypass tray are as follows:
No Display (Plain Paper), Recycled Paper, Special Paper, Color Paper, Letterhead, Label Paper, Thick Paper, OHP (Transparency), Preprinted Paper,
Prepunched Paper, Bond Paper, Cardstock.
The default setting is Thick Paper.
Paper types you can set in the bypass tray for machines with the copy function only are plain paper, thick paper and OHP.
44
Tray Paper Settings
❖ Paper Type: Paper Tray 1-2
Sets the display so you can see what type of paper is loaded in each paper
tray. The print function uses this information to automatically select the paper tray.
• The paper types you can set are as follows:
No Display (Plain Paper), Recycled Paper, Special Paper, Color Paper, Letterhead, Preprinted Paper, Prepunched Paper, Bond Paper, Cardstock
The default setting for "Paper Type" is No Display (Plain Paper).
The default setting for "APS" is On.
The default setting for "Duplex" is On.
To enable the Auto Tray Switching function, make sure [On] is selected in
APS.
2
❖ Ppr Tray Priority:Copier (copier)
Specify the tray to supply paper for output.
The default setting is Tray 1.
❖ Ppr Tray Priority:Fax (facsimile)
Specify the tray to supply paper for output.
The default setting is Tray 1.
❖ Ppr Tray Priority:Printer (printer)
Specify the tray to supply paper for output.
The default setting is Tray 1.
Reference
p.4 “Accessing User Tools”
p.81 “Auto Tray Switching”
45
System Settings
Timer Settings
This section describes the user tools in the Timer Settings menu under System
Settings.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
❖ Auto Off Timer
After a specified period has passed, following job completion, the machine
automatically turns off, in order to conserve energy. This function is called
"Auto Off".
The machine status after the Auto Off operation is referred to as "Off mode"
or "Sleep mode". Use this setting to specify how long the machine remains
idle before switching to "Off mode" or "Sleep mode".
This function can only be specified if AOF is specified to [On].
The time can be set from 1 min. to 240 min, using the number keys.
The default setting is 1 min..
From "Off mode" or "Sleep mode", the machine is ready to use within 10 seconds.
Auto Off might not work if an error message is being displayed at the time
scheduled for the switch.
2
❖ Energy Saver Timer
The machine automatically enters Low Power mode automatically after a job
is finished, and the selected time elapsed.
The time can be set from 1 to 240 minutes, using the number key.
The default setting is 15 min. / 1 min..
Energy Saver may not work when error messages appear.
The machine automatically prints any fax or printer data received while in
Energy Saver mode.
❖ System Auto Reset Timer
The System Reset setting automatically switches the screen to that of the function set in Function Priority, when no operations are in progress, or when an
interrupted job is cleared. This setting determines the system reset interval.
The default setting is On.
The time can be set from 10 to 999 seconds in 1 second increments, using the
number keys.
The default setting time is 60 sec..
❖ Copier Auto Reset Timer (copier)
Specifies the time to elapse before copier mode resets.
The default setting is On.
If [Off] is selected, the machine does not automatically switch to the user code
entry screen.
The time can be set from 10 to 999 seconds, using the number keys.
The default setting time is 60 sec..
46
Timer Settings
❖ Facsimile Auto Reset Timer (facsimile)
Specifies the time to elapse before the facsimile mode resets.
The time can be set from 30 to 999 seconds, using the number keys.
The default setting is 30 sec..
❖ Printer Auto Reset Timer (printer)
Specifies the time to elapse before the printer function resets.
The default setting is On.
The time can be set from 10 to 999 seconds, using the number keys.
The default setting time is 60 sec..
2
❖ Scanner Auto Reset Timer (scanner)
Specifies the time to elapse before the scanner function resets.
The default setting is On.
If [Off] is selected, the machine will not automatically switch to the user code
entry screen.
The time can be set from 10 to 999 seconds, using the number keys.
The default setting time is 60 sec..
❖ Set Date
Set the date for the machine's internal clock.
To change between year, month, and day, press {W} and {V} key.
Enter the year, month, and day using the number keys.
❖ Set Time
Set the time for the machine's internal clock using the number keys.
Enter time in the 24-hour format (in 1 second increments).
To change between hours, minutes and seconds, press {W} and {V} key.
When the summer time function is set, you cannot make the time setting if the
current time falls inside the transition zone. Set the time again later, or contact
your service representative.
❖ Auto Logout Timer
Specify whether or not to automatically log out a user when the user does not
operate the machine for a specified period of time after logging in.
The default setting is Off.
When [On] is selected, the time can be set from 60 to 999 seconds, in one second increments, using the number keys.
The default setting is 180 sec..
Reference
p.4 “Accessing User Tools”
47
System Settings
Interface Settings
This section describes the user tools in the Interface Settings menu under System
Settings.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
2
Network
This section describes the user tools in the Network menu under Interface Settings.
For machines with the DDST Unit, see "Settings You Can Change With User
Tools", Network Guide.
❖ Machine IPv4 Address
Before using this machine in the network environment, you must specify the
IPv4 address and subnet mask.
When you select [Specify], enter the [IP Add.] and [Subnet M] as
"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"("x" indicates a number).
• Auto-Obtain (DHCP)
• Specify
IPv4 Address: 011.022.033.044
Sub-net Mask: 000.000.000.000
The default setting is Specify.
The default setting for IPv4 Address is 011.022.033.044.
When you select [Specify], make sure that [IP Add.] is different from that of another machines on the network.
The physical address (MAC address) also appears.
❖ IPv4 Gateway Address
A gateway is a connection or interchange point between two networks.
Specify the gateway address for the router or host computer used as a gateway.
The default setting is 000.000.000.000.
❖ Machine IPv6 Address
Specify the machine's IPv6 network address.
• Link-local Address
The machine's specified link-local address appears.
• Manual Config. Address
The machine's manually configuration address appears.
• Stateless address: 1-5
The specified stateless address appears.
❖ IPv6 Gateway Address
Displays the machine's IPv6 gateway address appears.
48
Interface Settings
❖ IPv6 Stateless Setting
Specify IPv6 Stateless Setting.
The default setting is Active.
❖ DNS Configuration
Make settings for the DNS server.
The default setting is Specify.
When you select [Specify], enter the DNS server IPv4 address as
"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"("x" indicates a number).
The default settings of DNS server 1-3 are 000.000.000.000.
2
❖ DDNS Configuration
Specify the DDNS settings.
The default setting is Active.
❖ Domain Name
Specify the domain name.
The default setting is Specify.
❖ WINS Configuration
Specify the WINS server settings.
The default setting is On.
If [On] is selected, enter WINS server IPv4 address as "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. ("x" indicates a number)"
The default settings of WINS server 1-2 are 000.000.000.000.
If DHCP is in use, specify the [Scope ID].
Enter a [Scope ID] using up to 31 characters.
❖ Effective Protocol
Selects the protocol to use in the network.
The default setting for IPv4 is Active.
The default setting for IPv6 is Inactive.
The default setting for NetWare is Active.
The default setting for SMB is Active.
The default setting for AppleTalk is Active.
❖ NCP Delivery Protocol
Select the protocol for NCP delivery.
The default setting is TCP/IP Priority.
If you select "IPX Only" or "TCP/IP Only", you cannot switch the protocol
even if you cannot connect with it.
If "NetWare" in [Effective Protocol] is set to "Inactive", you can only use
TCP/IP.
❖ NW Frame Type
Select the frame type when you use NetWare.
The default setting is Auto Select.
49
System Settings
❖ SMB Computer Name
Specify the SMB computer name.
Enter the computer name using up to 15 characters.
"*+,/:;<>=?[\]|. and spaces cannot be entered.
Do not set a computer name starting with RNP and rnp.
Use uppercase letters for alphabets.
❖ SMB Work Group
Specify the SMB work group.
Enter the group name using up to 15 characters.
"*+,/:;<>=?[\]|. and spaces cannot be entered.
Use uppercase letters for alphabet.
2
❖ Ethernet Speed
Set the access speed for networks.
Select a speed that matches your network environment. [Auto Select] should
usually be selected.
The default setting is Auto Select.
• Setting the Ethernet Speed
Confirm your network environment, and then select a speed that matches
it using the following table.
Machine
Router/
HUB
10Mbps Half
Duplex
10Mbps Full
Duplex
100Mbps
Half Duplex
100Mbps
Full Duplex
Auto Select
10Mbps Half
Duplex
b
-
-
-
b
10Mbps Full
Duplex
-
b
-
-
-
100Mbps
Half Duplex
-
-
b
-
b
100Mbps
Full Duplex
-
-
-
b
-
Auto Select
b
-
b
-
b
❖ LAN Type
When you have installed the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit, select the
method of connection.
The default setting is Ethernet.
[LAN Type] is displayed when wireless LAN board is installed. If Ethernet and
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) are both connected, the selected interface has
priority.
50
Interface Settings
❖ Ping Command
Check the network connection with ping command using given IPv4 address.
If you fail to connect to the network, check the following, and then retry the
ping command.
• Make sure that "IPv4" in [Effective Protocol] is set to "Active".
• Check that the machine with assigned IPv4 address is connected to the network.
• Check if the same IPv4 address is used for the specified equipment.
2
❖ Permit SNMPv3 Communictn.
Set the encrypted communication of SNMPv3.
The default setting is Encryption/Clear Text.
If you select to [Encryption Only], you need to set an encryption password for
the machine.
❖ Permit SSL/TLS Comm.
Set the encrypted communication of SSL/TLS.
The default setting is Ciphertext/Clear Text.
If you set to [Ciphertext Only], you need to install the SSL certificate for the machine.
❖ Host Name
Specify the host name.
Enter the host name using up to 63 characters.
❖ Machine Name
Specify the machine name.
Enter the machine name using up to 31 characters.
Reference
p.4 “Accessing User Tools”
"Settings You Can Change With User Tools", Network Guide
51
System Settings
Parallel Interface
This section describes the user tools in the Parallel Interface menu under Interface Settings. [Parallel Interface] is displayed when this machine is installed with
the IEEE 1284 interface board.
❖ Parallel Timing
Sets the timing for the control signal of the parallel interface.
The default setting is ACK outside.
2
❖ Parallel Comm. Speed
Sets the communication speed for the parallel interface.
The default setting is High Speed.
❖ Selection Signal Status
Sets the level for the select signal of the parallel interface.
The default setting is High.
❖ Input Prime
Sets whether to validate or invalidate the input prime signal upon reception.
The default setting is Inactive.
❖ Bidirectional Comm.
Sets the printer's response mode to a status acquisition request when using a
parallel interface.
The default setting is On.
When set to [Off], bidirectional communication function will be disabled, and
the printer driver will not be installed under Windows Auto Detect function.
❖ Signal Control
Specify how error during printing or sending facsimile from the computer is
to be dealt with.
The default setting is Job Acceptance Priority.
Reference
p.4 “Accessing User Tools”
52
Interface Settings
IEEE 802.11b
This section describes various items of [IEEE 802.11b] under [Interface Settings].
This section describes the user tools in the IEEE 802.11b menu under Interface
Settings. [IEEE 802.11b] is displayed when this machine is installed with the wireless LAN interface board.
Be sure to make all settings simultaneously.
2
❖ Communication Mode
Specifies the communication mode of the wireless LAN.
The default setting is 802.11 Ad hoc.
❖ SSID Setting
Specifies SSID to distinguish the access point in infrastructure mode or 802.11
ad hoc mode.
The characters that can be used are ASCII 0x20-0x7e (32 bytes). If blank is
specified in 802.11b ad hoc mode or ad hoc mode, "ASSID" appears.
❖ Channel
The default setting is 11.
The following channels are available:
1-14 (Metric version) / 1-11 (Inch version)
❖ Security Type
Specifies the encryption of the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN).
If you select [WEP], always enter WEP key. If you select [WPA], specify the encryption and authentication methods.
Specify "WPA", when [Communication Mode] is set to [Infrastructure].
The default setting is Off.
• Off
• WEP
• WPA
• Encryption Method
Select either "TKIP" or "COMP(AES)".
• Authentication Method
Select either "WPA-PSK" or "WPA(802.1X)".
If you select "WPA-PSK", enter the pre-shared key (PSK) using 8-63
ASCII characters.
❖ Wireless LAN Signal
When using in infrastructure mode, you can check the machine's radio wave
status using the control panel.
Radio wave status is displayed when you press [Wireless LAN Signal].
❖ Communication Speed
Specifies the communication speed of the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN).
The default setting is Auto.
53
System Settings
❖ Restore Defaults
You can return the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) settings to their defaults.
Reference
p.4 “Accessing User Tools”
Print I/F Settings List
2
You can check items related to the network environment.
The configuration page shows the current network settings and network information.
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Interface Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Print I/F Settings List] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Press the {Start} key.
The configuration page is printed.
E Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Reference
p.4 “Accessing User Tools”
54
File Transfer
File Transfer
This section describes the user tools in the File Transfer menu under System Settings.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
❖ Delivery Option
Enables or disables sending stored or scanned documents via the ScanRouter
delivery server.
The default setting is Off.
Specify this option when selecting whether or not to use the ScanRouter delivery software. If you do, you will have to preregister I/O devices in the
ScanRouter delivery software.
2
❖ SMTP Server
Specify the SMTP server name.
Enter server name using up to 127 characters. Spaces cannot be entered.
When using DNS, enter the host name.
When not using DNS, enter the SMTP server IPv4 address.
Enter port number between 1 and 65535 using the number keys, and then
press the {OK} key.
The default setting for "Port No." is 25.
❖ SMTP Authentication
Specify SMTP authentication (PLAIN, LOGIN, CRAMMD5, DIGEST-MD5).
When sending e-mail via an SMTP server, you can enhance the level of SMTP
server security using authentication that requires a user name and password
to be entered.
If the SMTP server requires authentication, set [SMTP Authentication] to [On],
and then specify [User Name], [Password], and [Encrypt].
Enter the user name and password to be set for [Admin. E-mail Address] when
using Internet Fax.
• User Name
Enter [User Name] using up to 191 characters. Spaces cannot be entered. Depending on the SMTP server type, "realm" must be specified. Add "@" after
the user name, as in "user name@realm".
• E-mail Address
• Password
Enter [Password] using up to 63 characters. Spaces cannot be entered.
• Encrypt: Auto/On/Off
[Encrypt]-[Auto]: Use if the authentication method is PLAIN, LOGIN,
CRAM-MD5, or DIGEST-MD5.
[Encrypt]-[On]: Use if the authentication method is CRAM-MD5 or DIGESTMD5.
[Encrypt]-[Off]: Use if the authentication method is PLAIN or LOGIN.
The default setting is Off.
55
System Settings
❖ POP before SMTP
Specify POP authentication (POP before SMTP).
When sending e-mail via an SMTP server, you can enhance the level of SMTP
server security by connecting to the POP server for authentication.
To enable POP server authentication before sending e-mail via the SMTP
server, set [POP before SMTP] to [On]. E-mail is sent to the SMTP server after the
time specified for [Wait Time after Auth.] has elapsed.
If you select [On], enter server name in [Reception Protocol]. Also, check the
port number for [POP3] in [E-mail Communication Port].
• Wait Time after Auth.: 300 msec.
Specify [Wait Time after Auth.] from zero to 10,000 milliseconds, in increments of one millisecond.
• User Name
Enter the user name using up to 63 characters. Spaces cannot be entered.
• E-mail Address
• Password
Enter the password using up to 63 characters. Spaces cannot be entered.
The default setting is Off.
2
❖ Reception Protocol
Specify Reception Protocol for receiving Internet Fax.
The default setting is POP3.
❖ POP3/IMAP4 Settings
Specify the POP3/IMAP4 server name for receiving Internet Faxes.
The specified POP3/IMAP4 server name is used for [POP before SMTP].
• Server Name
If DNS is in use, enter the host name.
If DNS is not in use, enter the POP3/IMAP4 or server IPv4 address.
Enter POP3/IMAP4 server name using up to 127 alphanumeric characters.
Spaces cannot be entered.
• Encrypt
• Auto
Password encryption is set automatically based on the POP server settings.
• On
Encrypt password.
• Off
Do not encrypt password.
The default setting for "Encrypt" is Auto.
56
File Transfer
❖ Admin. E-mail Address
Specify the Administrator's E-mail Address.
If a failure occurs in the machine or consumables need to be replaced, e-mail
messages are sent to the Administrator's E-mail Address by E-mail Notification function.
On e-mailed scanned documents, if the sender is not specified, this appears
as the sender's address.
When sending e-mail using the Internet Fax function, the administrator's email address appears as the sender's address under the following conditions:
• The sender was not specified and the machine's e-mail address is not registered.
• The specified sender is not registered in the machine's address book and
the machine's e-mail address has not been registered.
When conducting SMTP authentication for files transmitted under the Internet Fax function, the Admin. E-mail Address will appear in the "From:" box.
If you have specified the user name and e-mail address in [SMTP Authentication], be sure to specify Admin. E-mail Address.
Enter within up to 128 characters.
On e-mailed scanned documents, if [Auto Specify Sender Name] is [Off], specify
the sender.
2
❖ E-mail Communication Port
Specify the port numbers for receiving Internet Faxes. The specified POP3
port number is used for [POP before SMTP].
Enter a port number between 1 and 65535 using the number keys, and then
press the {OK} key.
The default setting for "POP3" is 110.
The default setting for "IMAP4" is 143.
The default setting for "SMTP" is 25.
❖ E-mail Recept. Interval
Specify, in minutes, the time interval for receiving Internet Faxes via POP3 or
IMAP4 server.
The default setting is On.
If [On] is selected, the time interval can be specified from 2 to 1440 in increments of one minute.
The default setting time is 15 min..
❖ Max. Recept. E-mail Size
Specify the maximum reception e-mail size for receiving Internet Faxes.
Enter a size from 1 to 4 MB in increments of one megabyte.
The default setting is 2MB.
❖ E-mail Storage in Server
Specify whether or not to store received Internet Fax e-mail on the POP3 or
IMAP4 server.
The default setting is Off.
57
System Settings
❖ Default User Name/PW(Send)
To send a scan image directly to a Windows shared folder, an FTP server, or
a NetWare server, specify the user name and password. The user name and
password specified in this setting will be shared by all users.
• SMB User Name
• SMB Password
• FTP User Name
• FTP Password
• NCP User Name
• NCP Password
Enter in up to 64 characters.
2
❖ Auto Specify Sender Name
Set whether or not to specify the name of the e-mail sender.
• On
If you select [On], the specified e-mail address appears in the "From:" box.
If you do not specify an address, the administrator's e-mail address appears in the "From:" box instead.
If you do not specify the sender when sending a file by e-mail under the
fax function, or if the specified e-mail address is not registered in the machine’s address book, the machine’s e-mail address will appear in the
"From:" box. If the machine does not have an e-mail address, the administrator’s e-mail address will appear in the "From:" box.
• Off
If you select [Off], the specified e-mail address appears in the "From:" box
and you will not be able to send e-mail without specifying the address.
When using the fax function, you cannot send e-mail if the specified e-mail
address is not registered in the machine's address book.
The default setting is Off.
❖ Fax E-mail Account
Specify e-mail address, user name and password for receiving Internet Faxes.
• E-mail Address
Enter an e-mail address using up to 128 characters.
• User Name
Enter a user name using up to 191 characters.
• Password
Enter a password using up to 128 characters.
The default setting is Do not Receive.
Reference
p.4 “Accessing User Tools”
58
Administrator Tools
Administrator Tools
This section describes the user tools in the Administrator Tools menu under System Settings.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
Administrator Tools are used by the administrator. To change these settings,
contact the administrator.
We recommend specifying Administrator Authentication before making Administrator Tools settings.
2
❖ Address Book Management
You can add, change or delete information registered in the Address Book.
For details, see "Address Book".
• Program/Change
You can register and change names as well as user codes.
• Name
• Reg. No.
• Auth. Info
You can register a user code, and specify the functions available to each
user code. You can also register user names and passwords to be used
when sending e-mail, sending files to folders, or accessing an LDAP
server.
• Auth. Protect
You can register a protection code.
• Fax Settings
You can register a fax number, international TX mode, label insertion,
IP-Fax destination, and protocol.
• E-mail Settings
You can register e-mail address.
• Folder Info
You can register the protocol, path, port number, and server name.
• Register Group to
You can put names registered in the Address Book into a group.
• Delete
You can delete a name from the Address Book.
You can register up to 150 names.
You can register up to 50 user codes.
You can also register and manage data in the Address Book using Web Image
Monitor or SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
59
System Settings
❖ Prgrm./Change/Delete Group
Names registered in the Address Book can be added into a group.
You can then easily manage the names registered in each group.
• Program/Change
You can register and change groups.
The following items can be registered or changed:
• Group Name
• Regist.
• Programd. User/Group
• Auth. Protect
You can register a protection code.
• Register Group to
You can put groups registered in the Address Book into a group.
• Delete
You can delete a group from the Address Book.
You can register up to 10 groups.
You can also register and manage groups in the Address Book using Web
Image Monitor or SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
2
❖ Address Book:Print List
You can print the destination list registered in the Address Book.
• Destination List
Prints the list of names in the Address Book.
• Group Destination List
Prints the list of groups in the Address Book.
• Quick Dial Label
Prints the quick dial label.
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Address Book:Print List] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
D Select a desired list to print using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Press the {Start} key.
The list is printed.
❖ Display/Print Counter
Allows you to view and print the number of prints.
• Counter
Display the number of prints for each function (Total, Copier, Printer, Fax
Prints, Send Total: Clr, Send Total: B&W, Fax TX, Scan Send: Clr, Scan
Send: B&W, Duplex ).
• Print
Prints out a list of the number of prints made under each function.
60
Administrator Tools
❖ Disp./Print User Counter
Allows you to view and print the numbers of prints accessed with user codes,
and to set those values to 0.
The number of prints may differ from the counter value shown in [Display/Print Counter].
• Display
Press {U} or {T} to show all the numbers of prints.
• Copier Counter
• Printer Counter
• Facsimile Print
• Fax TX Page Counter
• Scanner Send Counter: F.Clr
• Scanner Send Counter: B&W
• Print
• All Users
Prints the counter values for all the users.
• Per User
Prints the counter values for each user.
• Clear
• All Users
Sets the counter value for all the users.
• Per User
Sets the counter value for each user.
2
❖ User Auth. Management
• Off
• User Code Auth.
Using User Code Authentication, you can limit the available functions
(Copier / Printer / Others: Fax/Scanner) and supervise their use.
When using User Code Authentication, register the user code.
Using the Printer PC Control function, you can obtain a log of prints corresponding to the codes entered using the printer driver.
For details about Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP
Authentication, and Integration Server Authentication, consult your administrator.
• Basic Auth.
• Windows Auth.
• LDAP Auth.
• Integration Svr. Auth.
❖ Admin. Auth. Management
For details about this function, consult your administrator.
61
System Settings
❖ Program/Change Admin.
For details about this function, consult your administrator.
❖ Key Counter Management
Specify that functions that you want to manage with the key counter.
• Copier
• Facsimile
• Printer
• Scanner
2
❖ Extended Security
Specify whether or not to use the extended security functions. For details
about this function, consult your administrator.
❖ Prog/Chnge/Del LDAP Server
By registering the LDAP server, you can search the LDAP server's address
book for an recipient's e-mail address when sending files by e-mail using the
scanner or fax functions.
• Name
• Server Name
• Search Base
• Port No.
• SSL
• Authentication
• User Name
• Password
• Search Conditions
• Search Options
To start an LDAP search, make sure that the items listed below are set. For
other items, check your environment and make any necessary changes.
• Server name
• Search Base
• Port No.
• Search Conditions
• Authentication
To use the LDAP server in Administrator Tools, select [On] under [LDAP
Search].
This function supports LDAP Version 2.0 and 3.0. Version 2.0 does not support High Security authentication.
For details about programming, changing, or deleting the LDAP server, see
"Program/Change/Delete LDAP Server".
62
Administrator Tools
❖ LDAP Search
Specify whether or not to use the LDAP server for searching.
The default setting is On.
If you select [Off], [Search LDAP] does not appear on the searching display.
❖ AOF (Always On)
Specify whether or not to use Auto Off.
The default setting is On.
2
❖ Firmware Version
You can check the version of the software installed in this machine.
❖ Network Security Level
For details about this function, consult your administrator.
❖ Delete All Logs
For details about this function, consult your administrator.
❖ Transfer Log Setting
For details about this function, consult your administrator.
Reference
p.4 “Accessing User Tools”
p.64 “Program/Change/Delete LDAP Server”
p.284 “Counter”
p.168 “Printing the Counter for Each User”
p.147 “Address Book”
63
System Settings
Program/Change/Delete LDAP Server
This section explains how to program the LDAP server settings.
Programing / Changing the LDAP server
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
2
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Prog/Chnge/Del LDAP Server] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Select the LDAP server you want to program or change using {U} or {T},
and then press the {OK} key.
When programming the server, select [*Not Programmed].
F Set each item as necessary.
64
Administrator Tools
G Press the {OK} after setting each item.
For details about specifying the settings, see "Programming the LDAP Server".
H Press [Exit].
I Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Reference
p.66 “Programming the LDAP Server”
2
Deleting the programmed LDAP server
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Prog/Chnge/Del LDAP Server] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
D Select [Delete] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Select the LDAP server you want to delete using {U} or {T}, and then press
the {OK} key.
F Press [Yes].
65
System Settings
Programming the LDAP Server
This section explains how to specify the LDAP server settings.
Entering an identification name
A Select [Name] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
2
Register a name for the LDAP server to appear on the server selection screen
of the LDAP search operation.
B Enter the name and then press the {OK} key.
Entering a server name
A Select [Server Name] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
Register LDAP Server host name or IPv4 address.
B Enter the server name, and then press the {OK} key.
66
Administrator Tools
Entering the search base
A Select [Search Base] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
Select a route folder to start the search. E-mail addresses registered in the selected folder are search targets.
2
B Enter the Search Base, and then press the {OK} key.
For example, if the search target is the sales department of ABC company, enter "dc=sales department, o=ABC". (In this example, the description is for an
active directory. "dc" is for the organization unit, and "o" is for the company.)
Search base registration may be required depending on your server environment. When registration is required, unspecified searches will result in error.
Check your server environment and enter any required specifications.
Entering a port number
A Select [Port No.] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
Specify the port number for communicating with the LDAP server. Specify a
port that matches your environment.
B Enter Port No. using the number keys and then press the {OK} key.
When SSL is set to [On], the port number automatically changes to "636".
67
System Settings
Starting SSL communication
A Select [SSL] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
2
B Select [On] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
Use SSL to communicate with the LDAP server.
To use SSL, the LDAP server must support SSL.
When SSL is set to [On], the port number automatically changes to "636".
SSL setting must be enabled on this machine. For details, consult your network administrator.
Setting authentication
A Select [Authentication] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
To make a search request to the LDAP server, use the administrator account
for authentication.
B Select [On] or [High Security] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
Authentication settings must comply with your server's authentication settings. Check your server settings before setting this machine.
68
[High Security] can be specified on Version 3.0 LDAP servers only. When [High
Security] is selected, the administrator password is encrypted before it is sent
to the network. When [On] is selected, the password is sent without encryption.
Administrator Tools
Entering the user name and password
A Enter the user name, and then press the {OK} key.
When [On] or [High Security] is selected for the authentication setting, use the
administrator account name and password. Do not enter the administrator
account name and password when using authentication for individual users
or each search.
Procedures for setting the user name differ depending on server environment. Check your server environment before making the setting.
Example: Domain Name\User Name, User Name@Domain Name
CN=Name, OU=Department Name, DC=Server Name
2
B Enter the password, and then press the {OK} key.
The user name and password are required for administrator authentication to
access the LDAP server.
You can also specify the user name and password in this machine's Address
Book to allow individual authentication access to the LDAP server. Use Administrator Tools to select the user name and password you want to use.
69
System Settings
Testing the connection
A Press [Con.Test].
Access the LDAP server to check the proper connection is established. Check
authentication works according to the authentication settings.
2
B Press [Exit].
Setting search conditions
A Select [Search Conditions] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
If the connection test failed, check the settings, and try again.
This function does not check Search Conditions or Search Base.
B Select necessary search items such as [Name], [E-mail Address], [Fax Number],
[Company Name], and [Department Name] using {U} or {T}, and then press the
{OK} key.
You can enter an attribute as a typical search keyword. Using the entered attribute, the function searches the LDAP server's Address Book.
70
Administrator Tools
C Enter attribute, and then press the {OK} key.
The attribute value may change depending on the server environment. Check
the attribute value complies with your server environment before setting it.
You can leave items blank, but you cannot leave attributes blank when
searching for e-mail addresses from the LDAP server Address Book.
2
Setting search options
A Select [Search Options] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Enter attribute, and then press the {OK} key.
To search the LDAP server data using a keyword other than prepared keywords such as Name, E-mail Address, FAX Number, Company Name, and
Department Name, specify the attribute for the keyword registered in your
LDAP server, and the name to be displayed on the control panel during the
search. For example, to search e-mail addresses by employee number, enter
"employee No." in the Attribute field, and "Employee No." in the key display
field.
The attribute value may change depending on the server environment. Check
the attribute complies with your server environment before setting it.
C Enter key display, and then press the {OK} key.
The registered "key display" appears as a keyword for searching LDAP.
71
System Settings
Key Operator Tools (For machines with
copier function only or with the DDST Unit)
This section describes the user tools in the Key Operator Tools menu under System Settings.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
Key Operator Tools are used by the administrator. To change these settings, contact the administrator.
We recommend specifying key operator code before making Key Operator
Tools settings.
2
❖ User Code Man. :Copier
Allows you to control who uses the machine by setting codes for users.
User codes must be registered for user code management.
The default setting is Off.
❖ Key Counter Management
Use the key counter to specify whether users are restricted or not.
The default setting is Copier.
[Key Counter Management] appears when the key counter is set.
❖ Key Operator Code
Specify whether or not to use passwords (max. eight digits) to control Key
Operator Tools settings for key operator code.
The default setting is Off.
If you select [On], enter the key operator code using the number keys, and
then select [On: Partial] or [On: All] to set the access limit.
• If you selected [On: Partial]
A key operator code is only required for the Timer Settings, and Key Operator Tools for System Settings.[Menu Protect] can be set for [Maintenance]
in Printer Features. If you set [Menu Protect], you can set the key operator
code for some Printer Features. See “Printer Features Parameters”, Printer/Scanner Reference.
• If you selected [On: All]
A key operator code is required to access all items in System Settings,
Copier Features, Printer Features.
If you select [On: All], you must enter a key operator code to access the Key Operator Code display.
72
Key Operator Tools (For machines with copier function only or with the DDST Unit)
❖ Display / Print Counter
Allows you to view and print the number of prints.
• Display / Print Counter
Displays the number of prints for each function (Total, Copier, Printer, Duplex).
• Print Counter List
Prints out a list of the number of prints made under each function.
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Key Operator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Display / Print Counter] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
D Press [Print].
E Press the {Start} key.
The Print Counter List is printed.
2
❖ Counter per User Code
Allows you to view and print the numbers of prints accessed with user codes,
and to set those values to 0.
Press {U} or {T} to show all the numbers of prints.
The number of prints may differ from the counter value shown in Display /
Print Counter.
• Print counter per user code
Prints the number of prints made under each user code.
• Clear counter per user code
Sets the number of prints made under each user code to 0.
Print list for each user code, see "Printing the Counter for Each User Code".
• Print counter for all user codes
Prints the number of prints made under all user codes.
• Clear counter for all user codes
Sets the number of prints made under all user codes to 0.
❖ Program / Change User Code
You can register, change, and delete user codes. For details about these operations, see "User Code".
You can register up to 50 user codes.
❖ AOF (Always On)
Specify whether or not to use Auto Off.
The default setting is On.
73
System Settings
User Code (For machines with copier
function only or with the DDST Unit)
Following describes the procedure for authenticating a user code.
Register user codes to restrict copier functions to certain users, and check on
their use of copier functions:
2
Registering a User Code
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Key Operator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Program / Change User Code] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [Program] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the user code using the number keys, and then press the {OK} key.
74
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
User Code (For machines with copier function only or with the DDST Unit)
Changing a User Code
Even if you change a user code, the counter value will not be cleared.
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
2
B Select [Key Operator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Program / Change User Code] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
D Select [Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the registered user code you want to change using the number keys,
and then press the {OK} key.
When you select the user code from the User Code List, press [List]. Select the
user code you want to change using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key
twice.
75
System Settings
F Enter the new user code using the number keys, and then press the {OK}
key.
2
G Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Deleting a User Code
This operation also deletes user codes registered to multiple functions. User control via the deleted user code is no longer possible.
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Key Operator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Program / Change User Code] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
D Select [Delete] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
76
User Code (For machines with copier function only or with the DDST Unit)
E Select [Per User Code] or [All User Code] using {U} or {T}, and then press the
{OK} key.
2
When selecting [All User Code], a confirmation message appears. Press [Yes].
F Enter the registered user code you want to delete using the number keys,
and then press the {OK} key.
When you select the user code from the User Code List, press [List]. Select the
user codes you want to delete using {U} or {T}, then confirm it by pressing
{V}, and then press the {OK} key.
G Press [Yes].
The “Deleted.” message appears, and then the “User Code” display returns.
H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
77
System Settings
Displaying the Counter for Each User Code
You can check the counter for each user code.
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
2
B Select [Key Operator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Counter per User Code] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [Display] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
The counter for each user code will be displayed.
E Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
78
User Code (For machines with copier function only or with the DDST Unit)
Printing the Counter for Each User Code
You can print out the counter for each user code.
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
2
B Select [Key Operator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Counter per User Code] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [Print] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Press the {Start} key.
The counter list prints out.
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
79
System Settings
Clearing the Number of Prints
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
2
B Select [Key Operator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Counter per User Code] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [Clear] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Press [Yes].
The “Counter has been cleared.” message appears, and then the
“Codes:Counters” display returns.
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
80
3. Copier Features
This chapter describes user tools in the Copier Features menu. For details on
how to access Copier Features, see "Accessing User Tools".
Copier Features
This section describes the user tools in Copier Features.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
❖ Auto Tray Switching
If you load paper of the same size and in the same orientation in two trays,
the machine automatically shifts to the other tray when the first tray runs out
of paper (if [On] is selected.) This function is called "Auto Tray Switching".
This setting specifies whether to use Auto Tray Switching or not.
The default setting is On.
[Off]: When a paper tray runs out of paper, copying is interrupted and the
"Load paper" message appears.
81
Copier Features
❖ Original Type Setting
You can adjust copy finish quality level according to original type. You can
choose these functions after selecting [Original Type 1 (Text)] or [Original Type 2
(Photo)].
• Text Mode 1
normal text originals
• Text Mode 2
newspapers, semi-transparent originals (reverse side print faintly visible)
• Photo Mode 1
text / photo images containing mostly photo areas
• Photo Mode 2
text / photo images containing mostly text areas
• Photo Mode 3
actual photographic paper
• Special Mode 1
highly transparent originals (reverse side clearly visible), or light text on a
colored background. Also for originals with very grainy backgrounds
(some newspapers) and light text.
• Special Mode 2
originals with colored text and lines
• Special Mode 3
photo images created by dithering (visible dots), such as newspaper photos - normal resolution
• Special Mode 4
photo images created by dithering (visible dots), such as newspaper photos - coarse resolution
• Special mode 5
normal text originals (reproducing the background)
The default setting for Original Type 1 (Text) is Text Mode 1.
The default setting for Original Type 2 (Photo) is Photo Mode 1.
3
❖ Duplex Mode Priority
You can select the type of Duplex function effective when the machine is
turned on, reset, or modes are cleared.
The default setting is 1 Sided→1 Sided.
❖ Orientation
You can select the original orientation when using the Combine/Series, or
Duplex function.
The default setting is Do not Specify.
❖ Max. Number of Sets
The maximum copy quantity can be set between 1 and 99 using number keys.
The default setting is 99 sheets.
82
Copier Features
❖ Original Count Display
You can set to display the count of originals and copying pages on the display
when [On] is selected.
The default setting is Off.
❖ Reproduction Ratio
You can select which reduce, enlarge, or input ratio is shown on the display
with priority when [Reduce] or [Enlarge] is selected.
Reduce or Enlarge ratios for setting are as follows:
The default setting for "Ratio 1" is 50% (Metric version) / 65% (Inch version).
The default setting for "Ratio 2" is 71% (Metric version) / 78% (Inch version).
The default setting for "Ratio 3" is 93% (Metric version) / 93% (Inch version).
The default setting for "Ratio 4" is 141% (Metric version) / 129% (Inch version).
The default setting for "Ratio 5" is 200% (Metric version) / 155% (Inch version).
You can set a ratio other than the above.
A Select [Reproduction Ratio] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select the ratio you want change using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
C Select [User R/E Ratio] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Enter a ratio using the number keys from "50-200", and then press the {OK}
key.
The “programmed” message appears.
3
❖ Preset R/E Priority
You can set the ratio with priority when [R/E] is selected.
Using the number keys, enter the ratio from "50-200" in units of 1%.
The default setting is 71% (Metric version) / 65% (Inch version).
❖ Duplex Margin
Specify left margin on the back side of copies, and top margin on the front
side. Select [Top Margin] or [Left Margin], and then set the required value.
• Top Margin: 0-50mm, 0"-2.0"
• Left Margin: 0-50mm, 0"-2.0"
The default setting is 5 mm (Metric version) / 0.2 inch (Inch version).
83
Copier Features
❖ Letterhead Setting
If you select [On] for this function, the machine rotates the image correctly.
The default setting is Off.
Orientation-fixed (top to bottom) or two-sided paper might not print correctly, depending on how the originals and paper are placed.
Reference
p.4 “Accessing User Tools”
"Original Type Setting", Copy Reference
"Selecting Copy Paper", Copy Reference
"Orientation-Fixed Paper or Two-Sided paper", Copy Reference
3
84
4. Fax Features
This chapter describes user tools in the Fax Features menu. For details on how
to access Fax Features, see "Accessing User Tools".
General Settings/Adjust
This section describes the user tools in the General Settings/Adjust menu under
Fax Features.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
❖ Adjust Sound Volume
Adjust the sound volume during On Hook Mode and Immediate Transmission. The volume is factory-preset to the second lowest level. For details about
Adjust Sound Volume, see "Adjusting the Volume", Troubleshooting.
❖ Program Fax Information
Register the sender details that appear on the recipient's fax machine and
faxed document.
For details about Program Fax Information, see "Registering Fax Information".
❖ On Hook Release Time
Use this function to specify a time to cancel On Hook mode after you transmit
using On Hook dialing. This is useful when On Hook dialing is cancelled in
fax information service.
The default setting is 3 minutes.
85
Fax Features
❖ Set User Function Key1-3
Frequently used functions programmed as User Function keys are shown on
the menu immediately after the power is turned on.
The User Function keys can be programmed with the following items:
• Print Journal
• TX File Status (Transmission File Status)
• RX File Status (Reception File Status)
• 2 Sided TX (Two-sided transmission)
• Print Fax Header
• Forwarding
• Switch Reception Mode
• Start Manual Reception
• Sender Settings
• E-mail Options
• Print TX Status Report (Print Transmission Status Report)
• Manual E-mail Reception
• Use SMTP Server
• SUB/SEP Code
• Not programmed
Up to three functions can be programmed to User Function keys.
The default setting for "User Function Key 1" is Start Manual Reception.
The default setting for "User Function Key 2" is Switch Reception Mode.
The default setting for "User Function Key 3" is Print Journal.
Functions that appear dimmed have already been set.
A Select [Fax Features] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [General Settings/Adjust] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
C Select [Set User Function Key] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select User Function key you want to program.
E Select the function you want to program in the User Function key using
{U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
4
Reference
p.4 “Accessing User Tools”
p.97 “Registering Fax Information”
"Adjusting the Volume", Troubleshooting
"Reading the Display Panel and Using Keys", Facsimile Reference
86
Reception Settings
Reception Settings
This section describes the user tools in the Reception Settings menu under Fax
Features.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
❖ Switch Reception Mode
Specify the method for receiving fax messages.
The default setting is Auto Reception.
❖ RX Mode Auto Switch Time
Specify the number of rings with the Auto Switch Time.
In Auto Select Mode, the machine rings a number of times to give you the
chance to pick up the handset before taking the call automatically.
The default setting is 8 Times.
A Select [Fax Features] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Reception Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [RX Mode Auto Switch Time] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
D Enter the number of rings from 1 to 29 using the number keys, and then
press the {OK} key.
E Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
4
❖ Authorized Reception
Specify whether or not unwanted fax messages are to be screened out.
The default setting is Off.
❖ Checkered Mark
Specify whether or not a checkered mark is to be printed on the first page of
received fax documents.
The default setting is On.
❖ Center Mark
Specify whether or not acenter mark is to be printed halfway down the left
side and at the top center of each page received.
The default setting is Off.
❖ Print Reception Time
Specify whether or not received date and time are to be printed at the bottom
of received fax messages.
The default setting is Off.
Reference
p.4 “Accessing User Tools”
87
Fax Features
E-mail Settings
This section describes the user tools in the E-mail Settings menu under Fax Features.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
❖ Internet Fax Settings
You can select to display
or not. When you want to send an Internet Fax, set On to display the icon.
The default setting is Off.
❖ Maximum E-mail Size
Use this setting to limit the size of sent e-mail, so that destinations that refuse
e-mail over a certain size can still receive your e-mail. When this function is
set to on, you cannot send e-mail that is larger than the specified limit.
The default setting is Off.
When e-mail exceeds the maximum file size, an Error Report is output, and
the e-mail is deleted.
Even when e-mail does not exceed the size limit, it may be rejected if it does
not meet the requirements of the server settings.
A Select [Fax Features] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [E-mail Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Maximum E-mail Size] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [On] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter an upper limit on the size of outgoing e-mail using the number key,
and then press the {OK} key.
Specify a size limit of 128 - 102,400 KB.
If you make a mistake, press the {Clear/Stop} key, and then reenter the
number.
4
88
E-mail Settings
❖ SMTP RX File Delivery
This function is available on systems that allow routing of e-mail received via
SMTP.
The default setting is Off.
When an authorized e-mail is set, e-mail received from addresses that do not
match the authorized address is discarded and an error message is returned
to the SMTP server.
The authorized e-mail address is compared with the addresses of e-mail originators, as illustrated by the following examples.
• When the authorized e-mail address is set to "@aaa.abcd.com":
abc@aaa.abcd.com - accepted
def@aaa.xyz.com - not accepted
abc@abcd.com - not accepted
No Error Report is output even when e-mail is discarded.
A Select [Fax Features] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [E-mail Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [SMTP RX File Delivery] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [On] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the authorized e-mail address and then press the {OK} key.
You can enter up to 128 characters for the e-mail address.
If you make a mistake, press the {Clear/Stop} key, and then enter again.
4
Reference
p.4 “Accessing User Tools”
"Reading the Display Panel and Using Keys", Facsimile Reference
89
Fax Features
IP-Fax Settings
This section describes the user tools in the IP-Fax Settings menu under Fax Features.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
Make settings to use IP-Fax.
Set H.323 for the gatekeeper, SIP for SIP server, and the gateway to G3 fax if necessary. Check the settings of the network to which this machine is connected before making settings.
Make sure you enter these characters correctly:
• Numbers
• Symbols (# and *)
The following characters can be used for registration of the SIP
User Name in SIP Settings. Make sure you enter these characters correctly:
• Alphanumeric symbols (lower and upper cases)
• Symbols (;?:&=+$,-_.!~*#'@()%/)
Use numbers and periods (".") to enter the correct IPv4 addresses for the gatekeeper, SIP server, and gateway. To obtain the correct IP addresses, consult administrator.
4
❖ Enable H.323
Specify whether or not H.323 is used for IP-Fax transmission.
The default setting is Off.
❖ Enable SIP
Specify whether or not SIP is used for IP-Fax transmission.
The default setting is Off.
❖ H.323 Settings
Set the IP address or host name of gate keeper, and alias telephone number.
To use the gatekeeper, set the parameter setting list (switch 34, bit 0) to "On".
A Select [Fax Features] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [IP-Fax Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [H.323 Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [Gatekeeper Address (Main)] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
E Enter the IPv4 address or host name of the gatekeeper, and then press the
{OK} key.
F Select [Own Fax No.] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
G Enter Own Fax No and then press the {OK} key.
H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
90
IP-Fax Settings
❖ SIP Settings
Set the SIP server's IPv4 address and SIP user name.
To use the SIP server, set the parameter setting list (switch 34, bit 1) to "On".
The default is "Off".
A Select [Fax Features] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [IP-Fax Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [SIP Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [Proxy Server Addr. (Main)] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
A proxy server relays call requests and responses.
E Enter the IPv4 address of the proxy server, and then press the {OK} key.
F Select [Redirect Svr. Addr. (Main)] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
A redirect server processes request destination inquiries.
G Enter the IPv4 address of the redirect server, and then press the {OK} key.
H Select [Registrar Address (Main)] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
A register server registers location information of user agents (which correspond to telephones or facsimiles on public telephone lines) on an IP network.
I Enter the IPv4 address of the register server, and then press the {OK} key.
J Select [SIP User Name] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
K Enter SIP User Name, and then press the {OK} key.
4
91
Fax Features
❖ Gateway Settings
Register, change, or delete the gateway used for transmission to IP-Fax. Register to use the gateway without using the gatekeeper/SIP server.
Program/Change:
A Select [Fax Features] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [IP-Fax Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Gateway Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Select [*Not Programmed] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
F Enter the Prefix using the number key, and then press the {OK} key.
For documents sent using a gateway to G3 Fax, prefixes can be used. If the
first several digits of IP-Fax number and the gateway- specific prefix are
identical, documents can be transmitted using the registered digits of the
gateway. For example, if both 03 and 04 have been registered as gateway
number while 0312345678 is also specified, documents can be transmitted
via a gateway for which 03 is used as a prefix.
When you wish to use the gateways regardless of the IP-Fax destination
numbers, register only the gateway addresses without registering the prefix.
G Enter Gateway Address and then press the {OK} key.
H Select [H.323] or [SIP] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
4
Delete:
A Select [Fax Features] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [IP-Fax Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Gateway Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [Delete] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Select the gateway you want to delete using {U} or {T}, and then press the
{OK} key.
F Press [Yes].
Reference
p.4 “Accessing User Tools”
p.107 “Parameter Settings List”
92
Administrator Tools
Administrator Tools
This section describes the user tools in the Administrator Tools Settings menu
under Fax Features.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
❖ Print Journal
Prints a Journal. Up to 50 of the latest results of transmission/delivery results
can be checked on this machine.
You can also print the journal using the {Job Information} key.
❖ Print TX Standby File List
Use this function to print the transmission standby file list.
You can also print the transmission standby file list using the {Job Information}
key.
4
❖ Communication Page Count
Checks the transmission and reception, and totals on the display.
❖ Memory Lock
When you switch Memory Lock on, received documents are stored in memory and not printed automatically. When a document is received in the Memory Lock mode, the Confidential File indicator blinks. To print this document,
enter the Memory Lock ID. A user without the ID cannot print the document.
This prevents unauthorized users from accessing the document.
The default setting is Off.
To use Memory Lock, program the Memory Lock ID, and then switch Memory Lock on.
To store incoming documents from Special Senders only in Memory Lock,
program each sender. with "Program Special Sender".
This function is not available with Internet Fax.
A Select [Fax Features] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Memory Lock] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [On] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
❖ Forwarding
Specify whether or not received fax messages are to be forwarded to a programmed receiver.
The default setting is Off.
93
Fax Features
❖ Folder TX Result Report
When a folder is included in the forwarding destination or the forwarding
destination by special sender, the specified destination will be notified of the
results of forwarding.
To forward to two or more destinations, specify group destination. For information about how to specify group destination, see "Registering a Names to
a Group".
The default setting is Do not E-mail.
Even when an e-mail to notify the results of forwarding a folder cannot be
sent, no report is out from this machine.
A Select [Fax Features] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Folder TX Result Report] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
D Select [E-mail] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Search and select a receiver using the Quick Dial keys or the {Search Destination} key, and then press the {OK} key.
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
4
❖ Parameter Setting
Parameter Setting allow you to customize various settings to suit your needs.
To change function settings, set the Parameter Switches. For details, see "Parameter Setting".
❖ Program Special Sender
Program/Change/Delete Special Senders, perform initial setup, and print
the Special Sender List. You can set functions for each sender if Special Senders are preprogrammed. For details, see "Program Special Sender".
❖ Program Memory Lock ID
Program a Memory Lock ID to be entered before printing documents when
the Memory Lock function is activated.
Preprogram the ID when you set "Memory Lock" and "Memory Lock" in Special Senders function.
A Select [Fax Features] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Program Memory Lock ID] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
D Enter the ID using the number key, and then press the {OK} key.
A Memory Lock ID can be any four-digit number, except 0000.
If you make a mistake, press the {Clear/Stop} key before pressing the {OK}
key, and then enter again.
94
Administrator Tools
❖ Select Dial/Push Phone
Use this function to select a line type.
Dial and Push lines are available for selection.
The default setting is Push Phone.
This function is not available in some areas.
A Select [Fax Features] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Select Dial/Push Phone] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
D Select [Push Phone] or [Dial Phone (10PPS)] using {U} or {T}, and then press
the {OK} key.
❖ G3 Analog Line
You need to make the following settings for the G3 Analog Line before you
connect the machine to a standard G3 analog line.
• When your machine is connected through a PABX, set to Extension. If it is
connected directly to the telephone network, set to Outside.
• Outside Access No.
Use this setting if your machine is connected to a PABX that requires you
to dial a certain number such as "0" followed by a pause to connect to the
outside line. By programming "0" as the PSTN Access Number, a pause
will be inserted automatically after the "0" when dialing.
A Select [Fax Features] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [G3 Analog Line] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [Extension/Outside] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Select [Extension] or [Outside] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
F Select [Outside Access No.] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
G Enter the Outside Access No. using the number key, and then press the
{OK} key.
You can program the number up to two digits.
If you make a mistake, press the {Clear/Stop} key, and then enter again.
H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
4
95
Fax Features
❖ RDS On/Off (Remote Diagnostic System)
If your machine has a problem, a service representative can perform various
diagnostic tasks over the telephone line from the service station to try to find
out what is wrong with your machine. The service representative can also use
RDS to change some of your machine's settings if you request it. When the
machine is shipped, this feature is turned on.
Reference
p.4 “Accessing User Tools”
p.244 “Registering Names to a Group”
p.107 “Parameter Setting”
p.117 “Program Special Sender”
4
96
Registering Fax Information
Registering Fax Information
You can send information to the other party when transmitting or receiving a fax
document. This information is shown on the display of the other machine and
printed as a report. The following information can be sent.
Important
❒ You can confirm programmed settings from the Parameter Settings List. It is
recommended to print and keep the Parameter Settings List when you program or change settings. For information about how to print the Parameter
Settings List, see "Printing the Parameter Settings List".
❒ In the USA, the Fax Header must contain the telephone number of the line
your machine is connected to. It will be printed on the header of every page
you send. Required in the USA.
4
❖ Fax Header
The Fax Header is printed as the header of every fax you send. You should
include your name in the Fax Header.
You can register "Fax Header" using up to 32 alphanumeric characters, numbers, and spaces.
You can set whether or not to print the Fax Header (for printing) in [Print Fax
Header] under [TX Mode]. For details about how to set, see "Fax Header Print",
Facsimile Reference.
❖ Own Name
The Own Name is sent to the other party when you send or receive a fax . This
name should include your name. The Own Name is shown on the display of
the other machine and printed in a report.
Own Name works only if the other machine is of the same manufacturer and
has the Own Name function.
You can register "Own Name" using up to 20 alphanumeric characters and
symbols.
❖ Own Fax Number (facsimile number of sender)
The sender's Own Fax Number is sent to the other party when sending a fax.
The received facsimile number is shown on the display of the other machine
and printed in a report.
This function is available regardless of the manufacturer of the other party's
machine.
You can register "Own Fax Number" using up to 20 numbers, spaces, and the
"+" symbol.
Reference
p.112 “Printing the Parameter Settings List”
"Fax Header Print", Facsimile Reference
97
Fax Features
Registering Fax Information
A Select [Fax Features] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [General Settings/Adjust] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
4
C Select [Program Fax Information] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
D Select fax information you want to program/change using {U} or {T}, and
then press the {OK} key.
E Program/change the selected fax information, and then press the {OK} key.
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
98
Registering Fax Information
Programming/Changing Fax Header
A Select [Fax Header] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Enter a fax header including your Own Name and Fax Number, and then
press the {OK} key.
4
To change the programmed Fax Header, press the {Clear/Stop} key, and then
enter again.
Note
❒ You can register up to 32 characters in the Fax Header.
❒ You can use characters, symbols, numbers, and spaces.
Reference
"Entering Text", About This Machine
Programming/Changing Own Name
A Select [Own Name] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Enter the own name, and then press the {OK} key.
To change the programmed Own Name, press the {Clear/Stop} key, and then
enter again.
99
Fax Features
Note
❒ You can register "Own Name" using up to 20 alphanumeric characters and
symbols.
Reference
"Entering Text", About This Machine
Programming/Changing Own Fax Number
A Select [Own Fax Number] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
4
B Enter the source fax number using the number key, and then press the {OK}
key.
To change the programmed source fax header, press the {Clear/Stop} key, and
then enter again.
When you enter "+" and space, press [n], [Space] for each.
If you make a mistake, press the {Clear/Stop} key, and then enter again.
Note
❒ You can register "Own Fax Number" using up to 20 numbers, space, and
"+" symbol.
100
Registering Fax Information
Deleting Fax Information
A Select [Fax Features] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [General Settings/Adjust] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
4
C Select [Program Fax Information] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
D Select fax information you want to delete using {U} or {T}, and then press
the {OK} key.
E Press the {Clear/Stop} key.
The programmed information is deleted.
101
Fax Features
F Press the {OK} key.
G Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
4
102
Forwarding
Forwarding
Print documents received and forward to a specified End Receiver. This is useful
if, for example, you are visiting another office and would like a copy of your documents to be sent to that office.
You can also specify a "folder" as the forwarding destination.
Important
❒ To use this function, set [Forwarding] under [Administrator Tools] to [On].
❒ The Forwarding function does not forward documents received with Memory Lock.
❒ You can select end receivers only from among destinations programmed in
the Address Book. You cannot specify programmed transfer stations as end
receivers.
A fax number, e-mail address, IP-Fax destination, and folder can be set as the
forwarding destination.
When you wish to change the end receivers depending on the senders, specify
the end receivers by the senders, at "Program Special Sender". Documents not received from specified senders are sent to the destination specified in this function.
You can set whether or not to print the forwarded documents on this machine in
"Parameter Setting"(switch 11, bit 6). The default is "On".
Deleting a destination specified as a forward destination from the destination
list causes the settings of the forward destination to be deleted, so they must be
registered again. When a destination is changed, a document is transmitted to
the new destination. If there is no destination of the specified type, you can set
which destination to be used as an alternative destination. See "Parameter Setting" (switch 32, bit 0).
You can program one of the User Function keys with operations for this function.
If you have specified a folder for forwarding, you can specify the file format
used for forwarding. See "Parameter Setting" (switch 21, bit 3).
4
Reference
p.85 “General Settings/Adjust”
p.107 “Parameter Setting” (switch 11, bit 6)
p.107 “Parameter Setting” (switch 32, bit 0)
p.107 “Parameter Setting” (switch 21, bit 3)
p.87 “Reception Settings”
p.117 “Program Special Sender”
103
Fax Features
Programming an End Receiver
Important
❒ One end receiver can be registered for each special sender. To register two or
more end receivers, use group destination. How ever maximum of 100 destinations can be specified in a group.
A Select [Fax Features] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
4
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Forwarding] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [On] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
To cancel forwarding, press [Off] and proceed to step F.
E Search and select a receiver using the Quick Dial keys or the [
and then press the {OK} key.
If you make a mistake, press the {Clear/Stop} key, and then enter again.
104
],
Forwarding
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Reference
p.107 “Parameter Setting” (switch 21, bit 3)
p.205 “Registering Folders”
Canceling Receiver Settings
A Select [Fax Features] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
4
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Forwarding] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [Off] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
The set receiver name is deleted.
E Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
105
Fax Features
Printing a Forwarding Mark
You can print a Forwarding Mark on receiver's documents that have been forwarded.
The receiver can distinguish between forwarded and normally received documents.
Specify whether or not to print a Forwarding Mark in the "Parameter Setting"
(switch 02, bit 0). The default is "ON".
4
This function is not available when forwarding is performed to a folder destination.
Reference
p.107 “Parameter Setting” (switch 02, bit 0)
106
Parameter Setting
Parameter Setting
Parameter Setting allow you to customize various settings to suit your needs. To
change function settings, set the Parameter Switches.
❖ Switches and Bits
Each parameter setting has a set of switches, and each of the switches consist
of eight bits, whose values are "0" or "1". The right most bit is bit 0 and the left
most is bit 7. You can adjust the settings to match your needs by switching the
value of bits between "0" and "1".
Switch 02:
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
4
❖ Parameter Settings List
Parameter Settings are outlined below.
Switch Bit
Item
0
1
02
0
Forwarding Mark
Off
On
02
3
TSI Print
Off
On
03
0
Automatic printing of the Memory
Transmission Result Report
Off
On
03
2
Automatic Printing of the Memory
Storage Report
Off
On
03
3
Whether or not to print the SEP
Off
Code RX Reserve Report automatically.
On
03
4
Whether or not to print the SEP
Code RX Result Report automatically.
Off
On
03
5
Automatic printing of the Immedi- Off
ate Transmission Result Report
On
03
7
Automatic printing of the Journal
Off
On
04
1
Whether or not to print the Commu- Off
nication Failure Report and Transfer
Result Report automatically.
On
04
4
Indicates the parties
Off
On
04
5
Include sender's name on reports
Off
On
04
7
Include a portion of the image on
reports
Off
On
05
0
Receive Service Call (SC) Condition (Substitute Reception during
service call)
Possible
Not possible
(Substitute RX)
(Reception Off)
107
Fax Features
Switch Bit
Item
0
05
Substitute the reception when the
machine cannot print (because all
paper trays have run out of paper,
toner is empty, or all paper trays
are out of order)
00: Enabled unconditionally
(Free)
2,1
1
01: Enabled
when Own
Name / Own
Fax Number is
received
11: Disabled
(Reception off)
4
05
5
Print sheet is limited to that which
has highest priority.
Off
On
05
7
Empty tray alert (Paper Empty
Warning) even when one paper
tray is empty
Off
On
07
2
Parallel Memory Transmission
Off
On
08
2
Authorized Reception Type
Receiving from
only specified
senders
Receiving all
messages except
those from specified senders
Authorized RX is "ON"
10
6
Use both e-mail notification and
printed reports to confirm the
transmission results
Off
On
11
2
Detection of Blank Sheet Transmis- Off
sion
On
11
6
Local print when forwarding
Off
On
14
0
Print documents received with
Auto Power-On Reception (Night
Printing mode)
Immediate
printing (On)
When turning
on the operation
switch (Off)
14
1
Long Document Transmission
(Well Log)
Off
On
14
3
Reset when function changed
Off
On
15
0, 1, 2
Select an available paper feed tray
001: Tray 1
010: Tray 2
108
15
5
Fix the specified paper feed tray
On
Off
17
2
Whether you need to press [Add
Dest] after entering a Quick Dial/Group Dial when broadcasting
Not necessary
Necessary
18
0
Print date with Fax Header
Off
On
18
1
Print transmitter origin with Fax
Header
Off
On
18
2
Print file number with Fax Header
Off
On
18
3
Print page number with Fax Header Off
On
Parameter Setting
Switch Bit
Item
0
1
19
1
Sort Journal by line type
Off
On
20
0
Reprint documents that could not
be printed using LAN-Fax Driver
Off
On
20
5,4,3,2
Reprinting time of stored documents in memory that could not be
printed using LAN-Fax Driver
when document reprint (switch 20,
bit 1) has been set to on.
0000: 0 minute
0001: 1 minute
0010: 2 minutes
0011: 3 minutes
0100: 4 minutes
0101:5 minutes
0110: 6 minutes
0111: 7 minutes
4
1000: 8 minutes
1001: 9 minutes
1010: 10 minutes
1011: 11 minutes
1100: 12 minutes
1101: 13 minutes
1110: 14 minutes
1111: 15 minutes
21
0
Print results of sending Return Re- Off
ceipt Request message
On
21
1
Respond to e-mail reception acknowledgment request
Off
On
21
3
File format for files forwarded to
folder destinations
TIFF
PDF
21
4
Transmit Journal by E-mail
Off
On
21
6
Not displaying Network Errors
Off
On
21
7
Transmit Error Mail Notification
On
Off
22
0
Detect a dial tone before sending
faxes when using the telephone
line
Not detect (Off)
Detect (On)
32
0
Select priority order for alternative
destinations if there is no destination of the specified type.
Paper Output
Priority
Electronic Output Priority
<Priority Order>
<Priority Order>
1. IP-Fax destina- 1. E-mail address
tion
2. Folder
2. Fax number
3. IP-Fax
3. E-mail address 4. Fax number
4. Folder
34
0
Use gatekeeper with IP-Fax
Off
On
34
1
Use SIP server with IP-Fax
Off
On
109
Fax Features
Changing the User Parameters
This section describes how to set parameters.
Important
❒ Access to some User Parameter Setting may require options, or other settings
may need to be made beforehand.
❒ It is recommended that you print and store the "Parameter Settings List"
when you program or change parameter settings.
❒ Do not change any bit switches other than those shown on the previous pages.
A Select [Fax Features] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
4
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Parameter Setting] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [Parameter Setting] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Select the switch number you want to change using the scroll keys, and
then press the {OK} key.
110
Parameter Setting
F Select the bit number you want to change.
When the bit number is pressed, the current value switches between 1 and 0.
Repeat step F to change another bit number for the same switch.
G Press the {OK} key.
4
H Repeat steps E and F to change the switch settings.
I After all the settings are finished, press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Reference
p.112 “Printing the Parameter Settings List”
111
Fax Features
Printing the Parameter Settings List
Print this list to see the current Parameter Settings. However, only items of importance or often-used items are included in the list.
A Select [Fax Features] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
4
C Select [Parameter Setting] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [Parameter Settings List] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Press the {Start} key.
To cancel printing a list, press the {Escape} key. The display returns to that of
step C.
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
112
Home Position
Home Position
Specify the type of original immediately after the power is turned on and when
the {Clear Modes} key is pressed.
❖ Home Position
• Image Density
Allows one of five image density steps to be set as the home position.
For details, see "Image Density (Contrast)", Facsimile Reference.
• Resolution
Allows either Standard, Details, or Fine to be set as the home position.
For details, see "Resolution", Facsimile Reference.
• Original Type
Allows either Text or Photo to be set as the home position.
For details, see "Original Type", Facsimile Reference.
• Home Position
Enables or disables the home position settings. When Home Position is set
to on, the home position settings are enabled and items return to their
home positions when scanning and transmission are completed.
• Transmission Mode
Allows either Immediate Transmission or Memory Transmission to be set
as the home position.
For details, see "Transmission Modes", Facsimile Reference.
• Label Insertion
Allows the label insertion as the home position to be set to on or off.
For details, see "Label Insertion", Facsimile Reference.
• Auto Reduce
Allows the auto reduce as the home position to be set to on or off. When
set to on, if the receiver's paper is smaller than the paper you are sending
on, the message is automatically reduced to fit onto the paper available at
the other end.
If you turn this function off, the scale of the original is maintained and
some parts of the image may be lost at the other end.
• Fax Header
Allows the fax header as the home position to be set to on or off.
For details, see "Fax Header Print", Facsimile Reference.
4
113
Fax Features
❖ Home Position Parameter List
For details about setting parameters, see "Parameter Setting".
Do not change switches other than those listed.
Switch Bit
Item
0
00
Image density
000: Normal density
3,2,1
1
001:
The lightest density
010:
The darkest density
101: Lighter density
110: Darker density
00
5,4
Resolution
00: Standard
01: Detail
4
10: Fine
01
1,0
Original Type
00: Text
01: Photo
01
7
Home Position
Off
On
02
1
Transmission mode
Memory transmission
Immediate
transmission
02
2
Label insertion
Off
On
02
4
Auto Reduce
Off
On
02
6,5
Fax Header
00: Off
01: On
Reference
p.107 “Parameter Setting”
"Image Density (Contrast)", Facsimile Reference
"Resolution", Facsimile Reference
"Original Type", Facsimile Reference
"Transmission Modes", Facsimile Reference
"Label Insertion", Facsimile Reference
"Fax Header Print", Facsimile Reference
114
Home Position
Changing the Home Position
A Select [Fax Features] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
4
C Select [Parameter Setting] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [Home Position] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Select the switch number you want to change using the scroll keys, and
then press the {OK} key.
F Select the bit number you want to change.
115
Fax Features
G Press the {OK} key.
4
116
Program Special Sender
Program Special Sender
By programming particular senders in advance, you can set the following function for each sender:
• Authorized RX
• Forwarding
• Memory Lock
Use Own Name or Own Fax Number to program your senders. If the sender has
a machine of the same manufacturer, program an Own Name that has already
been programmed as a sender. If the machine is not from the same manufacturer, Own Fax Number is used. You can apply the same settings to all programmed numbers. You can then customize the settings for individual numbers
as necessary using the Special Sender Registration function.
The following items can be programmed.
4
❖ Special Senders
Up to 30 Special Senders can be registered. A maximum of 20 characters can
be used for each name when using G3.
❖ Full/ Partial agreement
When you program own names and facsimile names for multiple destinations, you can program a common sequence of characters to identify destinations.
Using a Full agreement:
Destination to be programmed
(Own Name)
Number of programmed identifications
NEW YORK BRANCH
3
HONG KONG BRANCH
SYDNEY BRANCH
Using a Partial agreement:
Destination to be programmed
(Own Name)
Number of programmed identifications
BRANCH
1
You can program up to 30 wild cards.
Spaces are ignored when identifications are compared.
You can use wild cards for the following functions:
• Forwarding
• Authorized RX (Authorized Reception)
117
Fax Features
Note
❒ You cannot program senders as Special Senders if they do not have Own
Name or Own Fax Number programmed.
❒ The machine cannot differentiate between Polling Reception and Free Polling
documents from Special Senders.
❒ You cannot use the following functions with Internet Fax receptions.
• Authorized RX
• Memory Lock
❒ You can program up to 24 characters for the sender.
❒ To use Forwarding, with Internet Fax reception, program the sender's e-mail
address.
❒ You can check Own Name and Own Fax Number using the Journal. You can
check programmed Special Senders using the specified sender list.
4
Reference
p.127 “Printing Special Sender List”
Authorized Reception
Use this function to limit incoming senders. The machine only receives faxes
from programmed Special Senders, and therefore, it helps you screen out unwanted documents, such as junk mail, and saves wasting fax paper.
Note
❒ To use this function, program the Special Senders function, and then select
"On" in "Authorized Reception" with "Reception Settings".
❒ Without programming Special Senders, the Authorized RX function will not
work, even if you select "On".
❒ If you select "Off" for "Authorized RX" in "Initial Set Up", settings are the same
as the Reception Settings.
❒ You can change Special Senders in the same way as you program them.
Reference
p.107 “Parameter Setting” (switch 08, bit 2)
118
Program Special Sender
Forwarding
Print received documents, and then transfer them to those receivers programmed beforehand.
Folder destination can be registered.
It is also possible to forward faxes sent only by senders programmed as Special
Senders.
Note
❒ To use this function, program your Special Senders, and then select "On" for
"Forwarding" in "Reception Settings".
❒ If you specify "On" in "Forwarding" and select [Same as Basic Settings], the fax
document is forwarded to the receivers programmed in "Specify End Receiver.".
❒ If you do not program any Special Senders, the machine transfers all incoming documents to the other end receivers specified in "Specify End Receiver.".
❒ You can set the fax destination, Internet Fax destination, IP-Fax destination,
and folder destination, as a forward destination.
❒ Set folder destinations using the Address Book Management function under
System Settings. See "Registering Folders".
❒ If you have specified a folder for forwarding, you can specify the file format
you want to use for forwarding.
4
Reference
p.103 “Forwarding”
p.107 “Parameter Setting” (switch 21, bit 3)
Memory Lock
Store incoming documents from programmed senders (Special Senders) in
memory without printing them. People without the Memory Lock ID cannot
print the documents, and therefore this function is useful for receiving confidential documents. If you do not program any senders, the machine receives fax
document from all senders using Memory Lock reception.
Important
❒ You must register Memory Lock ID in advance.
❒ If you program the same sender in Memory Lock and Forwarding, Forwarding is disabled.
119
Fax Features
Programming/Changing Special Senders
Program and change Special Senders.
A Select [Fax Features] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
4
C Select [Program Special Sender] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Select senders using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
120
Program Special Sender
F Enter the sender name, and then press the {OK} key.
Enter a destination name using Own Name or Own Fax Number.
G Select [Full Agreement] or [Partial Agreement] using {U} or {T}, and then press
the {OK} key.
4
H Select items using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
You must select only the item you want to program.
To cancel these settings, press the {Escape} key. The display returns to that of
step E.
I Press [Exit].
J Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Reference
p.122 “Authorized RX (Authorized Reception)”
p.122 “Forwarding”
p.124 “Memory Lock”
121
Fax Features
Authorized RX (Authorized Reception)
Specify when programming a Special Sender.
A Select [Authorized RX] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [On] or [Off] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
4
Forwarding
Specify when programming a Special Sender.
Important
❒ One forward destination can be registered for each Special Sender. To register
two or more forward destinations, use group destinations. However a maximum of 100 destinations can be specified in a group.
A Select [Forwarding] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [On] or [Off] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
If you select [Off], proceed to step D.
122
Program Special Sender
C Specify an End Receiver using the Quick Dial keys or [
press the {OK} key.
], and then
D Press the {OK} key.
4
Note
❒ Selecting [Same as Basic Settings] will result in the same setting made for
[Forwarding] under [Administrator Tools].
❒ Press the button on the right of the display to switch the destination between fax number, e-mail address, IP-Fax destination, and folder.
❒ Set folder destinations using [Address Book Management] under [System Settings]. For details about registering folder destinations, see "Registering
Folders".
❒ When a folder is specified as the forward destination, you can set a file format for forwarding. See "Parameter Setting" (switch 21, bit 3).
❒ Deleting a destination specified as a forward destination from the destination list causes the settings of the forward destination to be deleted, so they
must be registered again. When a destination is changed, a document is
transmitted to the new destination. If there is no destination of the specified type, you can set which destination to be used as an alternative destination. See "Parameter Setting" (switch 32, bit 0).
Reference
p.107 “Parameter Setting”
p.205 “Registering Folders”
123
Fax Features
Memory Lock
Specify when programming a Special Sender.
A Select [Memory Lock] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [On] or [Off] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
4
Note
❒ Selecting [Same as Basic Settings] will result in the same setting made for
[Program Memory Lock ID] under [Administrator Tools].
Programming Initial Set Up of a Special Sender
Program the "Initial Set Up" of a Special Sender.
A Select [Fax Features] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Program Special Sender] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
124
Program Special Sender
D Select [Initial Set Up] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Select [Authorized Reception] or [Special RX Function] using {U} or {T}, and
then press the {OK} key.
4
F Select [On] or [Off] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
G Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Deleting a Special Sender
Use this function to delete "Initial Set Up" of a Special Sender.
A Select [Fax Features] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
125
Fax Features
C Select [Program Special Sender] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
D Select [Delete Special Sender] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
4
E Select the sender you want to delete using {U} or {T}, and then press the
{OK} key.
F Press [Yes].
To cancel deleting a special sender, press [No]. The display returns to that of
step D.
G Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
126
Program Special Sender
Printing Special Sender List
You can display programmed Special Senders.
A Select [Fax Features] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
4
C Select [Program Special Sender] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
D Select [Print Special Sender List] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
E Press the {Start} key.
The screen returns to step C after completion of printing.
To cancel printing, press the {Escape} key. The screen returns to step C.
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
127
Fax Features
4
128
5. Printer Features
This chapter describes user tools in the Printer Features menu. For details on
how to access Printer Features, see "Accessing User Tools".
List/Test Print
This section describes the user tools in the Test Print menu under Printer Features.
For machines with the DDST Unit, see "Printer Features Parameters", Printer/Scanner Reference.
These items are related to test print, including printing the Config. Page.
If changes are made to the machine's environment or its print-related settings,
or a new program is registered, we recommend you print the list of settings, so
they can be checked.
For viewing purposes, it is also possible to print out every printable character
and entire character sets (fonts).
❖ Multiple Lists
You can print the configuration page and error log.
❖ Config. Page
You can print the machine's current configuration values.
❖ Error Log
You can print error logs listing all errors that occurred during printing. The
records of Auto Job Cancel and jobs canceled manually from the control panel
can be printed.
The most recent 30 errors are stored in the error log. If a new error is added
when there are 30 errors already stored, the oldest error is deleted.
❖ Menu List
You can print a Menu List showing the Print Features.
❖ PCL Config./Font Page
You can print the current configuration and installed PCL font list.
❖ PS Config./Font Page
You can print the current configuration and installed PostScript font list.
This menu can be selected only when the optional PostScript 3 unit is installed.
❖ PDF Config./Font Page
You can print the current configuration and installed PDF font list.
This menu can be selected only when the optional PostScript 3 unit is installed.
129
Printer Features
❖ Hex Dump
You can print in the Hex Dump mode.
Note
❒ The layout of the list produced by the test print is fixed to A4 (letter size). We
recommend you load A4 or letter size paper (plain or recycled) in one of the
paper trays.
❒ The tray that contains A4 (letter) size paper is automatically selected. If A4
(letter) size paper is not loaded in any of the paper trays, Paper Tray Priority
is selected. If the paper size loaded in the Paper Tray Priority is smaller than
A4 (letter) size, the edges may be lost. If the paper size placed in the Paper
Tray Priority is larger than A4 (letter) size, margins may become too large.
Reference
p.4 “Accessing User Tools”
"Printer Features Parameters", Printer/Scanner Features
5
Printing the List/Test page
A Select [Printer Features] using {U}or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [List/Test Print] using {U}or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select desired list to print using {U}or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
130
Maintenance
Maintenance
This section describes the user tools in the Maintenance menu under Printer Features.
For machines with the DDST Unit, see "Printer Features Parameters", Printer/Scanner Reference.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
❖ List/Test Print Lock
You can Lock the [List/Test Print] menu.
The default setting is Off.
Reference
p.4 “Accessing User Tools”
p.41 “System Settings”
"Printer Features Parameters", Printer/Scanner Features
5
131
Printer Features
System
This section describes the user tools in the System menu under Printer Features.
For machines with the DDST Unit, see "Printer Features Parameters", Printer/Scanner Reference.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
❖ Print Error Report
Select this to have an error report printed when a printer or memory error occurs.
The default setting is Off.
❖ Auto Continue
You can select this to enable Auto Continue. When it is On, printing continues
after a system error occurs.
The default setting is Off.
5
❖ Memory Overflow
Select this to have a memory overflow error report printed.
The default setting is Do not Print.
Select "Do not Print" to not print on pages where errors occur. The cancelled
page and subsequent pages are not printed.
If you select "Error Report", pages where errors occur are printed up to where
the error occurred. Subsequent pages are printed normally, and an Error Report is printed at the end. However, sort instruction is cancelled.
❖ Memory Usage
You can select the amount of memory used in Font Priority or Frame Priority,
according to paper size or resolution.
Font Priority setting uses memory for registering fonts.
Frame Priority setting uses frame memory for high speed printing.
The default setting is Frame Priority.
❖ Duplex
You can select to have print on both sides of each page.
The default setting is Off.
❖ Copies
You can set the number of copies.
The default setting is 1.
• 1 to 999 by 1
❖ Blank Page Print
Specify whether or not to eject the paper if there is no data to be printed and
blank sheets are left when the ejection command is received.
The default setting is On.
132
System
❖ Edge Smoothing
You can set to smoothen the edges of printed characters.
The default setting is On.
If Toner Saving is set to On, Edge Smoothing is ignored even if it is set to On.
❖ Toner Saving
You can save toner.
The default setting is Off.
❖ Printer Language
Specify the printer language.
The default setting is Auto.
❖ Sub Paper Size
You can enable the Auto Substitute Paper Size (A4 and LT) feature.
The default setting is Off.
❖ Page Size
You can select the default paper size.
• The paper size you can select:
81/2 × 14, 81/2 × 13, 81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 13, 8 × 13, 71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 × 81/2,
41/8 × 91/2, 37/8 × 71/2, A4, A5, B5JIS, C5 Env, C6 Env, DL Env, 16K,
Custom Size
The default setting is A4 (Metric version) / 81/2 × 11 (Inch version).
5
❖ Letterhead Setting
You can rotate original images when printing.
When printing, original images are always rotated by 180 degrees. Therefore,
output might not be as expected when printing onto letterhead or preprinted
paper requiring orientation. Using this function, you can specify image rotation.
The default setting is Off.
When set to Off, original images are rotated by 180 degrees.
When set to Auto Detect, the machine detects a letterhead or preprinted paper automatically, and does not rotate the image.
When set to On (Always), the machine does not rotate them.
This function reduces printing speed.
❖ Bypass Tray Priority
Specify whether (Printer) Driver / Command or Machine Settings, has priority for determining the paper size for the bypass tray.
The default setting is Driver/Command.
❖ Edge to Edge Print
Specify whether to print on the paper as fully as possible.
The default setting is Off.
133
Printer Features
❖ Default Printer Lang.
You can set the default printer language if the machine cannot find the printer
language automatically.
The default setting is PCL.
❖ Tray Switching
You can set to switch the paper tray.
The default setting is Off.
❖ RAM Disk
You can specify how much data the RAM disk can hold. If you do not want
to use the RAM disk, select [0 MB]. This setting does not appear if the function
upgrade option is installed.
The default setting is 4 MB.
Note
❒ Setting of [Bypass Tray Priority] is for bypass tray only.
5
Reference
p.4 “Accessing User Tools”
"Loading Paper", Troubleshooting
"Printer Features Parameters", Printer/Scanner Features
134
Host Interface
Host Interface
This section describes the user tools in the Host Interface menu under Printer
Features.
For machines with the DDST Unit, see "Printer Features Parameters", Printer/Scanner Reference.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
❖ I/O Buffer
You can set the size of the I/O Buffer. Normally it is not necessary to change
this setting.
The default setting is 128 KB.
❖ I/O Timeout
You can set how many seconds the machine should wait before ending a print
job. If data from another port usually arrives in the middle of a print job, you
should increase this timeout period.
The default setting is 15 seconds.
5
Reference
p.4 “Accessing User Tools”
"Printer Features Parameters", Printer/Scanner Features
135
Printer Features
PCL Menu
This section describes the user tools in the PCL Menu under Printer Features.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
❖ Orientation
You can set the page orientation.
The default setting is Portrait.
❖ Form Lines
You can set the number of lines per page.
The default setting is 64 (Metric version) / 60 (Inch version).
• 5 to 128 by 1
❖ Font Source
You can set the storage location of the default font.
The default setting is Resident.
RAM, SD and SD Font Download can be selected only when fonts have been
downloaded to the machine.
5
❖ Font Number
You can set the ID of the default font you want to use.
The default setting is 0.
• 0 to 63 by 1
❖ Point Size
You can set the point size you want to use for the selected font.
This setting is effective only with variable-space fonts.
The default setting is 12.00.
• 4.00 to 999.75 by 0.25
❖ Font Pitch
You can set the number of characters per inch for the selected font.
This setting is effective only with fixed-space fonts.
The default setting is 10.00 pitch.
• 0.44 to 99.99 by 0.01
❖ Symbol Set
Specify the set of print characters for the selected font.
The available options are as follows:
Roman-8, ISO L1, ISO L2, ISO L5, PC-8, PC-8 D/N, PC-850, PC-852, PC8-TK,
Win L1, Win L2, Win L5, Desktop, PS Text, VN Intl, VN US, MS Publ, Math-8,
PS Math, VN Math, Pifont, Legal, ISO 4, ISO 6, ISO 11, ISO 15, ISO 17, ISO 21,
ISO 60, ISO 69, Win 3.0
The default setting is PC-8.
136
PCL Menu
❖ Courier Font
You can select a courier font type.
The default setting is Regular.
❖ Ext. A4 Width
You can extend the printing area width (when printing on A4 sheet with
PCL).
The default setting is Off.
When the setting is On, the width will be 81/2 inches.
❖ Append CR to LF
When set to On, a carriage return will follow each line feed: CR=CR, LF=CR−LF,
FF=CR−FF.
The default setting is Off.
❖ Resolution
You can set the print resolution in dots per inch.
The default setting is 600 dpi.
5
Reference
p.4 “Accessing User Tools”
137
Printer Features
PS Menu
This section describes the user tools in the PS Menu under Printer Features.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
This menu appears only when the optional PostScript 3 unit is installed.
❖ Data Format
You can select a data format.
The default setting is TBCP.
This setting is not effective when operating the machine with a parallel or
EtherTalk connection.
When operating the machine with a parallel connection, and also if the binary
data is sent from the printer driver, the print job is canceled.
When operating the machine with an Ethernet connection, the print job is canceled under the following conditions;
• The printer driver data format is TBCP, and the data format selected on the
display panel is Binary Data.
• The printer driver data format is binary, and the data format selected on
the display panel is TBCP.
5
❖ Resolution
You can set the print resolution in dots per inch.
The default setting is 600 dpi.
Reference
p.4 “Accessing User Tools”
138
PDF Menu
PDF Menu
This section describes the user tools in the PDF Menu under Printer Features.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
❖ Change PDF Password
Set the password for the PDF file executing PDF Direct Print.
• Current Password
• New Password
• Confirm New Password
A password can be set using on the Web Image Monitor, but in this case the
password information is sent through the network. If security is a priority, set
the password using this menu from the control panel.
❖ PDF Group Password
Set the group password already specified with DeskTopBinder.
• Current Password
• New Password
• Confirm New Password
A password can be set using on the Web Image Monitor, but in this case the
password information is sent through the network. If security is a priority, set
the password using this menu from the Control Panel.
5
❖ Resolution
You can set the print resolution in dots per inch.
The default setting is 600 dpi.
Reference
p.4 “Accessing User Tools”
139
Printer Features
5
140
6. Scanner Features
This chapter describes user tools in the Scanner Features menu. For details on
how to access Scanner Features, see "Accessing User Tools".
Scan Settings
This section describes the user tools in the Scan Settings menu under Scanner
Features.
For machines with the DDST Unit, see "Setting Originals", Printer/Scanner Reference.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
❖ Default Scan Settings
Various basic settings (resolution and scan size) can be set. You can register
the scan settings in the same way as specifying them. For details, see "Specifying Send Options", Scanner Reference.
The default setting for "Resolution" is 200 dpi.
• Paper size for setting
A4S, A5R, A5S, B5 JISS, 8 1 / 2 ×14S, 8 1 / 2 ×13S, 8 1 / 2 ×11S,
51/2×81/2R, 51/2×81/2S, Custom Size
The default setting for "Scan Size" is A4S / 81/2×11S .
You can specify a custom size as follows:
139.0 to 216.0 mm (5.5 to 8.5 inch) vertically, and 139.0 to 356.0 mm (5.5 to 14.0
inch) horizontally.
❖ Original Setting
This setting is available only when you have installed the optional ARDF
(Auto Document Feeder capable of scanning both sides of a sheet).
Set the default for whether originals are one-sided or two-sided and if twosided, the relationship between those sides. When the originals are always the
same, set this for the default to make operation easier.
The default setting is 1 Sided Original.
❖ Orig. Orientation Priority
Select the default for Original Orientation. When originals are always placed
in the same way, select that orientation as the default to make operation easier.
❖ Original Type Setting
Make these settings according to the paper type of the original.
Settings made here are assigned to the {Color Scan} and {Original} keys of the
scanner function.
The default setting for Type 1 (Color: Text) is Full Color: Text / Photo.
The default setting for Type 2 (Color: Photo ) is Full Color: Glossy Photo.
The default setting for Type 3 (B&W Text) is Text/Line Art.
The default setting for Type 4 (B&W: Photo) is Photo.
141
Scanner Features
❖ Color Mode Priority
Specify whether to scan originals in Full Color or Black & White mode.
The default setting is Black & White.
Reference
p.4 “Accessing User Tools”
"Specifying Send Options", Scanner Reference
6
142
Destination List Settings
Destination List Settings
This section describes the user tools in the Destination List Settings menu under
Scanner Features.
For machines with the DDST Unit, see "Setting Originals", Printer/Scanner Reference.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
Select the defaults for the display priority and the titles for the destination list of
e-mail and delivery server.
❖ Dest. List Priority 1
Select a destination list to be displayed when the machine is in the initial state.
The default setting is Delivery Server.
❖ Update Server Dest. List
Normally, the delivery server destination list is automatically updated. This
function allows manual updating at any time.
To update the delivery server destination list, press [Update Server Dest. List].
❖ Dest. List Priority 2
In the machine's address book, select which address book appears by default.
This function is enabled when [E-mail] is selected in [Dest. List Priority 1].
The default setting is E-mail Address.
6
Reference
p.4 “Accessing User Tools”
"Specifying Send Options", Scanner Reference
143
Scanner Features
Send Settings
This section describes the user tools in the Send Settings menu under Scanner
Features.
For machines with the DDST Unit, see "Setting Originals", Printer/Scanner Reference.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
This section explains how to set the defaults for settings such as the compression
level for the scan file and switching to and from the network TWAIN scanner
function.
Details of items of Send Settings are as follows:
❖ TWAIN Standby Time
When the machine is being used to send e-mail or a file, or functioning as
Document Server or a network delivery scanner, a scanning request to the
machine as a TWAIN scanner will switch the machine to the network TWAIN
scanner function. This setting determines the delay until the machine switches to the network TWAIN scanner function.
The default setting is On, 10 sec..
When [On] is selected, you can enter the number of seconds to switch with the
number keys (3-30 seconds). The machine will switch to the TWAIN scanner
mode only when the time set here has elapsed after the last key operation.
When [Off] is selected, the machine will switch to the network TWAIN scanner mode immediately.
6
❖ File Type Priority
Select whether to send the scanned originals as single-page files or a multiplepage file.
For single-page files, select either TIFF/JPEG or PDF. For multi-page files, select either TIFF or PDF.
The default setting is Multi-page:TIFF.
❖ Compression (B&W)
Select whether or not to compress black and white scan files.
The default setting is On.
The actual time required for file transfer will vary depending on the file size
and network load.
Compression reduces the time required for transferring the scan file.
❖ Compress. (Gray/Full Clr)
Specify whether or not to compress multi-level (grayscale) scan files.
The default setting is On.
If you select [On], you can specify the compression level between one and five.
The image quality is better for lower compression, but the time required for
file transfer increases accordingly.
The actual time required for file transfer will vary depending on the file size
and network load.
144
Send Settings
❖ Print&Del. Scanner Journal
Up to 100 transmission/delivery results can be checked on this machine. If
the stored transmission/delivery results reach 100, select whether to print the
delivery journal.
Depending on security settings, the journal might not be printed.
The default setting is Print and Delete All.
• Print and Delete All
The transmission/delivery journal is printed automatically. The printed
journal is deleted.
• Do not Print: Delete Oldest
Transmission/delivery results are deleted one by one as new results are
stored.
• Do not Print: Disable Send
Transmission/delivery cannot be performed when the journal is full.
When printed, all records are deleted after printing. When not printed,
records over the limit are automatically deleted in succession from the oldest
record.
While the journal is being printed, files with the status waiting cannot be sent.
❖ Print Scanner Journal
The scanner journal is printed and deleted.
6
❖ Delete Scanner Journal
The scanner journal is deleted without being printed.
❖ Max. E-mail Size
Select whether or not to limit the size of an e-mail to which an image is attached.
The default setting is On, 2048 KB.
When [On] is selected, enter the size limit (128-45,389 KB) with the number
keys.
When the SMTP limits the size, match that setting.
❖ Divide & Send E-mail
Select whether or not an image exceeding the size specified in [Max. E-mail Size]
should be divided and sent using more than one e-mail. This function is enabled only when [On] is selected for [Max. E-mail Size].
The default setting is On (per max. size), 5 (Maximum Number of Divisions).
When [On (per max. size)] is selected, enter the Max. Number of Divisions (2355) with the number keys.
When [Multi-page:TIFF] or [Multi-page:PDF] is selected, the image will not be divided.
When [On (per max. size)] is selected, some received files may not be able to be
restored, depending on the type of e-mail software.
When [Off] is selected, the e-mail is not sent if its size exceeds the limit, and an
error message appears. The scan file is discarded.
Set the maximum e-mail size within the capacity of the SMTP server.
145
Scanner Features
❖ E-mail Informatn. Language
Select the language in which e-mail information such as title, date, administrator mail address is sent.
Select one of the following 20 languages:
British English, American English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch,
Portuguese, Polish, Czech, Swedish, Finnish, Hungarian, Norwegian, Danish, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Russian, and Hangul.
The default setting is American English.
The e-mail text which is a template cannot be changed.
Reference
p.4 “Accessing User Tools”
"Specifying Send Options", Scanner Reference
6
146
7. Registering Addresses and Users
for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
This chapter describes how to register destinations and users in the Address
Book. For details on how to access System Settings see "Accessing User Tools".
Address Book
Registering information such as the names of users and their e-mail addresses in
the Address Book allows you to manage them easily.
You can also use Web Image Monitor to register names in the Address Book. For
details about Web Image Monitor, see the Web Image Monitor Help.
For details on how to access Web Image Monitor, see "Using Web Image Monitor".
Important
❒ Address Book data is stored in memory. It can be lost if there is some kind of
memory failure. The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any damages
resulting data loss.
You can register and manage the following items in the Address Book:
❖ Name
You can register the name of the user. This is the basic information required
for managing user of the machine.
To register a fax number or e-mail address in the address book, you must first
register your user name and destination.
❖ Authentication Information
You can register user codes in order to restrict particular functions to certain
users, and to check their use of each function. You can also register login user
names and login passwords to be used when sending e-mail, sending to folders, or accessing an LDAP server.
147
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
❖ Protection
You can set protection codes to stop sender's name from being used or folders
from being accessed without authorization.
❖ Fax Settings
You can register fax numbers, line, fax header and select label insertion.
When using IP-Fax, you can register the IP-Fax destination and select the protocol.
❖ E-mail Settings
You can register e-mail destinations in the Address Book.
7
148
Address Book
❖ Folder Information
You can register the protocol, path name and server name.
• SMB
• FTP
• NCP
❖ Register Group to
You can put registered e-mail and folder destinations into a group for easier
management.
7
Note
❒ Using [Address Management Tool] in SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, you can
backup Address Book data. We recommend backing up data when using the
Address Book.
❒ For operating instructions, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
Reference
p.267 “SMTP Authentication”
p.205 “Registering Folders”
p.271 “LDAP authentication”
149
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Managing names in the Address Book
By registering a name beforehand, you can specify e-mail and folder destinations simply by selecting the Quick Dial keys.
Reference
p.152 “Registering Names”
Sending fax by Quick Dial
Register a fax number in the Address Book so you can specify a destination simply by selecting it from destination search or selecting the Quick Dial keys when
sending a fax. When label insertion is set to "ON", the receiver's name and standard messages are printed on the fax message when it is received at the other
end.
Registered IP-Fax numbers can be used and printed as sender’s IP-Fax numbers.
Reference
p.174 “Fax Destination”
Sending e-mail by Quick Dial
7
By registering e-mail addresses in the Address Book, you can specify e-mail destinations simply by selecting it from destination search or selecting the Quick
Dial keys when sending a document by Internet Fax.
A registered e-mail address can be used as the sender's address, and the sender's
address are automatically entered in the "From" field of an e-mail header.
Reference
p.196 “E-mail Destination”
Sending scanned files to a shared folder directly
After registering the path name, user name and password, you can connect to a
shared folder simply by selecting it from destination search or selecting the
Quick Dial keys whenever sending files using the scanner function to a shared
folder.
To share the folder using Windows, select the SMB protocol.
To register the folder to the FTP server, select the FTP protocol.
To register the folder to the NetWare server, select the NCP protocol.
Reference
p.205 “Registering Folders”
150
Address Book
Preventing unauthorized user access to shared folders from the
machine
After registering a protection code, you can specify the object of protection to
prevent an e-mail destination from being used without permission.
You can prevent unauthorized access to registered folders.
Reference
p.260 “Registering a Protection Code”
Managing users and machine usage
Register user codes to limit users to the following functions and check their use
of each function:
• Copier
• Facsimile
• Scanner
• Printer
Reference
p.158 “Authentication Information”
7
p.282 “Using Web Image Monitor”
151
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Registering Names
Register user information including their names.
The user name is useful for selecting a destination when sending faxes or e-mail.
You can also use it as a folder destination.
You can register up to 150 names.
Registering Names
This section describes how to register names.
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
7
C Select [Address Book Management] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
152
Registering Names
E Enter the registration number you want to program using the number keys
or the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
When you register a new Reg. No., currently available numbers are automatically displayed.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
F Enter the name and then press the {OK} key.
For the user name, up to 20 characters are usable.
G Press the {OK} key.
7
H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Reference
"Entering Text", About This Machine
153
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Changing a Registered Name
This section describes how to change a name.
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Address Book Management] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
7
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the registration number you want to change using the number keys
or the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
If you do not wish to change the registration number, proceed to the next step.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, registration number, user
code, fax number, e-mail address, or folder destination.
154
Registering Names
F Enter the new name, and then press the {OK} key.
G To change a registration number, press [Reg. No.]. Using the number keys or
a Quick Dial key, enter a new number, and then press the {OK} key.
H Press the {OK} key.
I Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
7
Reference
"Entering Text", About This Machine
155
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Deleting a Registered Name
This section describes how to delete a name.
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Address Book Management] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
7
D Select [Delete] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the registration number you want to delete using the number keys or
the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, registration number, user
code, fax number, e-mail address, or folder destination.
156
Registering Names
F Press [Yes].
G Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
7
157
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Authentication Information
Following describes the procedure for authenticating a user code.
Important
❒ The functions associated with each user code are the same. If you change or
delete user codes, management data and limits associated with that code become invalid.
Register user codes to limit users to the following functions and check their use
of each function:
Copier
Facsimile
Scanner
Printer
Note
❒ The number of copies scanned using the scanner function is counted for each
user code. This allows you to check each user's usage.
❒ To automatically register the printer driver user code, select [Auto Program] for
the printer in User Code Authentication. To use the user code set in User
Tools, set the user codes registered in User Tools for the printer driver.
❒ For details about setting user codes for the printer driver, see Printer Driver
Help.
7
Reference
p.61 “User Auth. Management”
Registering a User Code
This section describes how to register a user code.
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
158
Authentication Information
C Select [Address Book Management] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the registration number you want to change using the number keys
or the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
7
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, registration number, user
code, fax number, e-mail address, or folder destination.
F Press the {OK} key.
G Press [Details].
159
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
H Select [Auth. Info] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
I Select [User Code] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
J Enter the user code using the number keys, and then press the {OK} key.
If you have entered a wrong code, press the {Clear/Stop} key and then enter
the correct code again.
You can use up to eight digits for specifying the user code.
7
K Select [Function Permissions] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
L Select the function you want to set the user code for using {V}, and then
press the {OK} key.
M Press the {Escape} key.
160
Authentication Information
N Press [End].
O Press the {OK} key.
P Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒ You can enter a one-to eight-digit user code.
❒ For registration of a name, see "Registering Names".
Reference
p.152 “Registering Names”
Changing a User Code
This section describes how to change a user code.
Important
❒ Even if you change a user code, the counter value will not be cleared.
7
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Address Book Management] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
161
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the registration number you want to change using the number keys
or the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, registration number, user
code, fax number, e-mail address, or folder destination.
F Press the {OK} key.
7
G Press [Details].
H Select [Auth. Info] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
I Select [User Code] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
162
Authentication Information
J Enter the new user code using the number keys, and then press the {OK}
key.
K Select [Function Permissions] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
L Select the function you want to change the user code for using {U} or {T},
then confirm it by pressing {V}, and then press the {OK} key.
M Press the {Escape} key.
7
N Press [End].
O Press the {OK} key.
P Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒ To change the name, see "Changing a Name".
Reference
p.154 “Changing a Registered Name”
163
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Deleting a User Code
This section describes how to delete a user code.
Important
❒ After clearing the user code, the counter is automatically cleared.
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Address Book Management] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
7
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
164
Authentication Information
E Enter the registration number you want to delete using the number keys,
and then press the {OK} key.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, registration number, user
code, fax number, e-mail address, or folder destination.
F Press the {OK} key.
G Press [Details].
7
H Select [Auth. Info] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
I Select [User Code] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
J Press the {Clear/Stop} to delete the user code, and then press the {OK} key.
165
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
K Press the {Escape} key.
L Press [End].
M Press the {OK} key.
N Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒ To delete a name entirely, see "Deleting a Registered Name".
Reference
p.156 “Deleting a Registered Name”
7
Displaying the Counter for Each User
This section describes how to display the counter for each user.
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
166
Authentication Information
C Select [Disp./Print User Counter] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
D Select [Display] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Select the function you want to display the counter for using {U} or {T},
and then press the {OK} key.
7
Counters for individual function usage under each user code appear.
F Press the {OK} key.
G Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
167
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Printing the Counter for Each User
This section describes how to print the counter for each user.
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Disp./Print User Counter] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
7
D Select [Print] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Select [Per User] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
F Select the path destination procedure using {U} or {T}, and then press the
{OK} key.
168
Authentication Information
G Select the user to print.
If you select [Manual] in step F, enter the user code and then press the {OK}
key.
If you select [Display List] in step F, confirm the user code using {V} and then
press the {OK} key.
H Select the function you want to print the counter for using {U} or {T}, then
confirm it by pressing {V}, and then press the {OK} key.
7
I Press the {Start} key.
J Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
169
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Printing the Counter for All User
This section describes how to print the counter for all user.
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Disp./Print User Counter] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
7
D Select [Print] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Select [All Users] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
F Select the function you want to print the counter for using {U} or {T}, then
confirm it by pressing {V}, and then press the {OK} key.
170
Authentication Information
G Press the {Start} key.
H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Clearing the Number of Prints
This section describes how to clear the counter.
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
7
C Select [Disp./Print User Counter] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
D Select [Clear] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
171
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
E Select [Per User] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
F Select the path destination procedure using {U} or {T}, and then press the
{OK} key.
G Select the user to clear
If you select [Manual] in step F, enter the user code and then press the {OK}
key.
7
If you select [Display List] in step F, confirm the user code using {V} and then
press the {OK} key.
H Select the function you want to clear the counter for using {U} or {T}, then
confirm it by pressing {V}, and then press the {OK} key.
I Press [Yes].
172
Authentication Information
J If you want to clear the counter for all users, select [All Users] using {U} or
{T}, and then press the {OK} key.
K Select the function you want to clear the counter for using {U} or {T}, then
confirm it by pressing {V}, and then press the {OK} key.
L Press [Yes].
M Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
7
173
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Fax Destination
Register a fax destination so you do not need to enter fax numbers each time, and
can send documents that have been scanned in using the fax function.
• It is easy to select the fax destination if you register "Name" for the fax destination.
• You can register fax destinations by selecting them from redial function.
• Registered Fax numbers can be used as sender's Fax numbers.
There are two types of fax destination, as shown below:
• Fax Number
Select this to send the fax over the telephone network.
• IP-Fax Destination
Select this to send the fax to a machine on a TCP/IP network. You cannot send
the fax to a machine on another network if that network is behind a firewall.
You can program the following items in a fax destination:
❖ Fax number
Registers the destination's fax number. You can enter a fax number using up
to 128 digits. You must include every digit in the number.
❖ SUB Code
Registering a SUB Code allows you to use Confidential Transmission to send
messages to the other fax machines which support a similar function called
"SUB Code". See "Setting SUB Codes for Transmission", Facsimile Reference.
7
❖ SEP Code
Registering a SEP Code allows you to use Polling Reception to receive faxes
from the other fax machines which support Polling Reception. See "Setting
SEP Codes for Reception", Facsimile Reference.
❖ International TX Mode
When setting the International TX mode to [On], the machine transmits more
carefully by lowering transmission speed. However, communication times
increase.
174
Fax Destination
❖ Label insertion
Use label insertion to print information such as the destination name on the
sheet printed out at the destination.
Data is printed as follows:
• Destination Name
The destination name specified in [Fax Destination] is printed with "To" before it at the top of the sheet.
• Standard Message
A registered two-line sentence is printed under "Destination Name". To
use this function, set Label Insertion to [On] when programming fax destinations and also select [Programmed Name] when sending fax documents.
Fax header and label insertion are also printed when sending by e-mail using the fax function.
You can program a standard message other than those registered in the
machine. See "Specifying Options", Facsimile Reference.
You can program the following items in an IP-Fax Destination:
❖ IP-Fax
Register the IP-Fax destination. You can register the name using up to 128
characters. You must make this setting when using IP-Fax.
This setting only works if the IP-Fax function has been selected.
❖ SUB Code
Registering a SUB Code allows you to use Confidential Transmission to send
messages to the other fax machines which support a similar function called
"SUB Code". See "Setting SUB Codes for Transmission", Facsimile Reference.
7
❖ SEP Code
Registering a SEP Code allows you to use Polling Reception to receive faxes
from the other fax machines which support Polling Reception. See "Setting
SEP Codes for Reception", Facsimile Reference.
❖ Select Protocol
Select the protocol for the IP-Fax transmission.
This setting only works if the IP-Fax function has been selected.
Reference
p.244 “Registering Names to a Group”
p.260 “Registering a Protection Code”
175
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Fax Destination
This section describes how to register a fax number.
Registering a Fax Destination
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Address Book Management] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
7
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the registration number you want to program using the number keys
or the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, registration number, user
code, fax number, e-mail address, or folder destination.
176
Fax Destination
F Press the {OK} key.
G Press [Details].
H Select [Fax Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
I Enter the fax number using the number keys, and then press the {OK} key.
7
J Specify optional settings such as "SUB Code", "SEP Code", "International
TX Mode", and "Label Insertion".
K Press [End].
L Press the {OK} key.
177
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
M Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒ After entering a fax number, be sure to press the {OK} key. If you press the
{Escape} key without pressing the {OK} key, the entered number is not
registered.
❒ When a group is registered, you can also add this fax destination to the
group. For details about registering group, see "Registering Names to a
Group".
❒ For registration of a name, see "Registering Names".
Reference
p.152 “Registering Names”
p.180 “Using a Fax Destination as a sender”
p.182 “Programming the SUB Code”
p.183 “Programming the SEP Code”
p.184 “Setting the International TX Mode”
p.185 “Setting label insertion”
p.246 “Registering Names to a Group”
Changing a Fax Destination
7
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Address Book Management] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
178
Fax Destination
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the registration number you want to change using the number keys
or the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, registration number, user
code, fax number, e-mail address, or folder destination.
F Press the {OK} key.
7
G Press [Details].
H Select [Fax Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
I Enter again the item to be changed.
179
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
J Press [End].
K Press the {OK} key.
L Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒ To change the name, see "Changing a Name".
Reference
p.181 “Changing a fax number”
p.182 “Programming the SUB Code”
p.183 “Programming the SEP Code”
p.184 “Setting the International TX Mode”
p.185 “Setting label insertion”
p.154 “Changing a Registered Name”
7
Using a Fax Destination as a sender
Following describes the procedure for using a fax number as the sender (sending
number).
A Press [Details].
B Select [Auth. Protect] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
180
Fax Destination
C Select [Register as] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [Sender Only] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Press the {Escape} key.
F Press [End].
7
G Press the {OK} key.
Reference
p.158 “Registering a User Code”
Changing a fax number
A Enter the new fax number using the number keys, and then press the {OK}
key.
181
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Programming the SUB Code
A Press [Option].
B Select [SUB Code] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Enter the SUB Code using the number keys and then press the {OK} key.
7
D Enter the password using the number keys and then press the {OK} key.
E Press [Exit].
182
Fax Destination
Programming the SEP Code
A Press [Option].
B Select [SEP Code] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Enter the SEP Code using the number keys and then press the {OK} key.
7
D Enter the password using the number keys and then press the {OK} key.
E Press [Exit].
183
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Setting the International TX Mode
A Press [Option].
B Select [International TX Mode] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [On] or [Off] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
7
D Press [Exit].
184
Fax Destination
Setting label insertion
When Label Insertion is set to ON, the receiver's name and standard messages
are printed on the fax message when it is received at the other end.
A Press [Option].
B Select [Label Insertion] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [On] or [Off] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
7
D Press [Exit].
Using the tone
This function allows the machine to send tonal signals when it is connected to a
pulse dialing line (for example: to use a special service on a tone dialing line).
A Press [Tone].
A tone is shown as a "T" on the display.
185
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Deleting a registered Fax Destination
Important
❒ If you delete a destination that is a specified delivery destination, messages to
its registered personal Box, for example, cannot be delivered. Be sure to check
the settings in the fax function before deleting any destinations.
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Address Book Management] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
7
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the registration number you want to delete using the number keys or
the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
186
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, registration number, user
code, fax number, e-mail address, or folder destination.
Fax Destination
F Press the {OK} key.
G Press [Details].
H Select [Fax Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
I Press the {Clear/Stop} key to delete the fax number, then press the {OK} key.
7
J Press [End].
K Press the {OK} key.
187
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
L Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒ When you want to delete a user code along with the user itself, see "Deleting a User".
Reference
p.156 “Deleting a Registered Name”
IP-Fax Destination
This section describes how to register a IP-Fax destination.
Reference
For details about sending an IP-Fax, see "Sending by IP-Fax", Facsimile Reference.
Registering an IP-Fax Destination
Important
❒ To use an IP-Fax destination as the sender (transmission number), you must
first register the user code.
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
7
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Address Book Management] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
188
Fax Destination
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the registration number you want to register using the number keys
or the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, registration number, user
code, fax number, e-mail address, or folder destination.
F Press the {OK} key.
7
G Press [Details].
H Select [Fax Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
I Press [IP].
189
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
J Select the protocol using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
K Enter the IP-Fax destination and then press the {OK} key.
L Press [Option] to select the items to be set.
M Press the {OK} key.
7
N Press [End].
O Press the {OK} key.
P Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒ For registration of a name, see "Registering Names".
Reference
p.152 “Registering Names”
190
p.158 “Registering a User Code”
p.244 “Registering Names to a Group”
"Entering Text", About This Machine
Fax Destination
Changing a Registered IP-Fax Destination
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Address Book Management] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
7
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the registration number you want to change destination using the
number keys or the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, registration number, user
code, fax number, e-mail address, or folder destination.
191
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
F Press the {OK} key.
G Press [Details].
H Select [Fax Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
I Enter again the item to be changed.
J Press [End].
7
K Press the {OK} key.
L Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒ To change the name, see "Changing a Name".
Reference
p.180 “Using a Fax Destination as a sender”
p.193 “Changing a Registered IP-Fax Destination”
p.154 “Changing a Registered Name”
"Entering Text", About This Machine
192
Fax Destination
Changing a Registered IP-Fax Destination
A Press [IP].
B Select the new protocol using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Enter the new IP-Fax destination and then press the {OK} key.
7
Deleting a Registered IP-Fax Destination
If you delete a destination that is a specified delivery destination, messages to its
registered personal Box, for example, cannot be delivered. Be sure to check the
settings in the fax function before deleting any destinations.
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
193
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
C Select [Address Book Management] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the registration number you want to delete using the number keys or
the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, registration number, user
code, fax number, e-mail address, or folder destination.
7
F Press the {OK} key.
G Press [Details].
H Select [Fax Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
194
Fax Destination
I Press [IP] and then press the {OK} key.
J Press the {Clear/Stop} key to delete the IP-Fax destination, then press the
{OK} key twice.
K Press [End].
L Press the {OK} key.
7
M Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒ To change the name, see "Changing a Name".
❒ When you want to delete a user code along with the user itself, see "Deleting a User".
Reference
p.154 “Changing a Registered Name”
p.156 “Deleting a Registered Name”
195
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
E-mail Destination
Register e-mail destinations so you do not need to enter an e-mail address every
time, and can send scan files from scanner or fax function by e-mail.
• It is easy to select the e-mail destination if you register "User (Destination)
Name" for the e-mail destination.
• You can register e-mail destinations as a group.
• You can use the e-mail address as the sender's address when sending scan
files in scanner mode. If you want to do this, set a protection code on the sender address to prevent unauthorized access.
Note
❒ You can select an e-mail address from an LDAP server, and then register it in
the Address Book. See "Sending Scan Files by E-mail", Scanner Reference.
❒ You can set the machine to send a Transmission Result Report by e-mail
whenever a transmission is sent. See Facsimile Reference.
Reference
p.260 “Registering a Protection Code”
Registering E-mail Destination
7
Important
❒ When using a e-mail destination as the sender, you must register the user
code previously.
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
196
E-mail Destination
C Select [Address Book Management] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the registration number you want to program using the number keys
or the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, registration number, user
code, fax number, e-mail address, or folder destination.
7
F Press the {OK} key.
G Press [Details].
H Select [E-mail Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
197
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
I Enter the e-mail address using the number keys and the Quick Dial keys,
and then press the {OK} key.
J Select [E-mail/Internet Fax Dest.] or [Internet Fax Dest. only] using {U} or {T}, and
then press the {OK} key.
K Select [Send] or [Do not send] to specify whether or not SMTP server is to be
used using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
7
L Press [End].
M Press the {OK} key.
198
E-mail Destination
N Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
When a group is registered, other e-mail destinations can be added to the
group. For the registration procedure, see "Registering a Name to Group".
Note
❒ Up to 128 alphanumerical characters are usable for the mail address.
❒ For registration of a name, see "Registering Names".
Reference
p.152 “Registering Names”
p.158 “Registering a User Code”
p.246 “Registering Names to a Group”
"Entering Text", About This Machine
Changing a Registered E-mail Destination
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
7
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Address Book Management] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
199
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
E Enter the registration number you want to change using the number keys
or the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, registration number, user
code, fax number, e-mail address, or folder destination.
F Press the {OK} key.
G Press [Details].
7
H Select [E-mail Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
I Enter the new e-mail address using the number keys and the Quick Dial
keys, and then press the {OK} key.
200
E-mail Destination
J Select [E-mail/Internet Fax Dest.] or [Internet Fax Dest. only] using {U} or {T}, and
then press the {OK} key.
K Select [Send] or [Do not send] to specify whether or not SMTP server is to be
used using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
L Press [End].
M Press the {OK} key.
7
N Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒ To change the name, see "Changing a Name".
Reference
p.154 “Changing a Registered Name”
"Entering Text", About This Machine
201
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Deleting a Registered E-mail Destination
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Address Book Management] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
7
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the registration number you want to delete using the number keys or
the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, registration number, user
code, fax number, e-mail address, or folder destination.
202
E-mail Destination
F Press the {OK} key.
G Press [Details].
H Select [E-mail Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
I Press the {Clear/Stop} key to delete the mail address, then press the {OK}
key.
7
J Press [End].
K Press the {OK} key.
203
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
L Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒ To delete a name entirely, see "Deleting a Registered Name".
Reference
p.156 “Deleting a Registered Name”
7
204
Registering Folders
Registering Folders
By registering a shared folder, you can send scan files to it directly.
There are three types of protocol you can use:
• SMB
For sending files to shared Windows folders.
• FTP
Use when sending files to an FTP server.
• NCP
Use when sending files to an Net- Ware server.
Note
❒ For details about protocols, server names, and folder levels, consult your network administrator.
❒ You can prevent unauthorized users from accessing folders from the machine. See "Registering a Protection Code".
❒ You can only select either SMB, FTP, or NCP. If you change protocol after finishing your settings, all previous entries are cleared.
Reference
p.260 “Registering a Protection Code”
7
Using SMB to Connect
Note
❒ To register a folder in an FTP server, see "Using FTP to Connect".
❒ To register a folder in an NetWare server, see "Using NCP to Connect".
Reference
p.219 “Using FTP to Connect”
p.230 “Using NCP to Connect”
Registering an SMB folder
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
205
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Address Book Management] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the registration number you want to program using the number keys
or the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
7
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, registration number, user
code, fax number, e-mail address, or folder destination.
F Press the {OK} key.
G Press [Details].
206
Registering Folders
H Select [Auth. Info] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
I Select [Folder Authentication] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
J Select [Specify Other Auth. Info] using {U} or {T}, and then press [User].
K Enter the login user name, and then press the {OK} key.
7
L Press [Password].
M Enter the password, and then press the {OK} key.
207
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
N Enter the password again to confirm, and then press the {OK} key.
O Press the {OK} key.
P Press the {Escape} key.
Q Select [Folder Info] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
7
R Select [SMB] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
S Select [Manual Entry] or [Browse Network] to specify the path entry method using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
To specify a folder, you can either enter the path manually or locate the folder
by browsing the network. See "Locating the folder manually" and "Locating
the folder using Browse Network".
208
Registering Folders
T Press [Com.Test] to check the path is set correctly.
U Press [Exit].
V Press the {Escape} key.
W Press [End].
7
X Press the {OK} key.
209
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Y Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒ For registration of a name, see "Registering Names".
❒
❒
❒
❒
You can enter up to 64 characters for the user name.
You can enter up to 64 characters for the password.
If the connection test fails, check the settings, and then try again.
When [Do not Specify] is selected in step J, the SMB User Name and SMB
Password that you have specified in Default User Name / Password
(Send) of File Transfer settings applies.
❒ If User Authentication is specified, contact your administrator.
Reference
p.152 “Registering Names”
p.210 “Locating the SMB folder manually”
p.211 “Locating the SMB folder using Browse Network”
p.55 “File Transfer”
"Entering Text", About This Machine
Locating the SMB folder manually
7
A Select [Manual Entry] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Enter the path and then press the {OK} key.
If the format of the entered path is not correct, a message appears. Press [Exit],
and then enter the path again.
Note
❒ Enter the path using this format: "\\ServerName\ShareName\PathName".
❒ You can also enter an IPv4 address.
❒ You can enter a path using up to 128 characters.
Reference
"Entering Text", About This Machine
210
Registering Folders
Locating the SMB folder using Browse Network
A Select [Browse Network] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select a work group using the scroll keys, and then press the {OK} key.
The client computers sharing the same network as the machine appear.
Network display only lists client computers you are authorized to access.
C Select a client computer using the scroll keys, and then press the {OK} key.
Shared folders under it appear.
7
You can press [Up] to switch between levels.
D Select the folder you want to register using the scroll keys, and then press
[Apply].
E Press the {OK} key.
211
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
If a Login Screen Appears
This section explains how to log in to the machine if a login screen appears when
you try to access a folder by browsing the network. The login screen appears if
you have not specified folder authentication, or if an incorrect user name or
password has been entered for folder authentication.
A Enter the login user name, and then press the {OK} key.
Enter the login user name specified for folder authentication.
B Enter the password, and then press the {OK} key.
The path to the selected folder appears.
If a message appears, press [Exit], and then enter the login user name and
password again.
7
Reference
"Entering Text", About This Machine
Changing a registered SMB folder
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
212
Registering Folders
C Select [Address Book Management] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the registration number you want to change using the number keys
or the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, registration number, user
code, fax number, e-mail address, or folder destination.
7
F Press the {OK} key.
G Press [Details].
H Select [Folder Info] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
213
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
I Select [SMB] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
J Select [Manual Entry] or [Browse Network] to specify the path entry method using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
To specify a folder, you can either enter the path manually or locate the folder
by browsing the network. See "Locating the folder manually" and "Locating
the folder using Browse Network".
K Specify the folder.
7
L Press [Com.Test] to check the path is set correctly.
M Press [Exit].
N Press the {Escape} key.
214
Registering Folders
O Press [End].
P Press the {OK} key.
Q Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒ To change the name, see "Changing a Registered Name".
Reference
p.210 “Locating the SMB folder manually”
p.211 “Locating the SMB folder using Browse Network”
p.154 “Changing a Registered Name”
"Entering Text", About This Machine
7
Changing the protocol
A Select [FTP] or [NCP] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
A confirmation message appears.
B Press [Yes].
Changing the protocol will clear all settings made under the previous protocol.
215
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
C Enter each item again.
Reference
p.219 “Registering an FTP Folder”
p.230 “Registering an NCP folder”
Deleting the SMB registered folder
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Address Book Management] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
7
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
216
Registering Folders
E Enter the registration number you want to delete using the number keys or
the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, registration number, user
code, fax number, e-mail address, or folder destination.
F Press the {OK} key.
G Press [Details].
7
H Select [Folder Info] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
I Select the protocol which is not currently selected using {U} or {T}, and
then press the {OK} key.
A confirmation message appears.
217
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
J Press [Yes].
K Press the {Escape} key twice.
L Press [End].
M Press the {OK} key.
7
N Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒ To delete a name entirely, see "Deleting a Registered Name".
Reference
p.156 “Deleting a Registered Name”
218
Registering Folders
Using FTP to Connect
Note
❒ To register a shared folder configured in Windows, see "Using SMB to Connect".
❒ To register a folder in an NetWare server, see "Using NCP to Connect".
Reference
p.205 “Using SMB to Connect”
p.230 “Using NCP to Connect”
Registering an FTP Folder
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
7
C Select [Address Book Management] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
219
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
E Enter the registration number you want to program using the number keys
or the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, registration number, user
code, fax number, e-mail address, or folder destination.
F Press the {OK} key.
G Press [Details].
7
H Select [Auth. Info] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
I Select [Folder Authentication] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
J Select [Specify Other Auth. Info] using {U} or {T}, and then press [User].
220
Registering Folders
K Enter the login user name, and then press the {OK} key.
L Press [Password].
M Enter the password, and then press the {OK} key.
N Enter the password again to confirm, and then press the {OK} key.
7
O Press the {OK} key.
P Press the {Escape} key.
221
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Q Select [Folder Info] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
R Select [FTP] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
S Enter the server name, and then press the {OK} key.
T If you want to change the port number, enter the new port number, and
then press the {OK} key.
Otherwise, just press the {OK} key.
7
You can enter 1 to 65535.
U Enter the path, and then press the {OK} key.
You can also enter an IPv4 address.
V Press [Com.Test] to check the path is set correctly.
222
Registering Folders
W Press [Exit].
X Press the {Escape} key.
Y Press [End], and then press the {OK} key.
Z Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
7
Note
❒ For registration of a name, see "Registering Names".
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
You can enter up to 64 characters for the user name.
You can enter up to 64 characters for the password.
You can enter a server name using up to 64 characters.
You can enter an absolute path, using this format: "/user/ home/username"; or a relative path, using this format: directory/sub-directory".
If you leave the path blank, the login directory is assumed to be the current
working directory.
You can enter a path using up to 128 characters.
If the connection test fails, check the settings, and then try again.
When [Do not Specify] is selected in step J, the FTP User Name and FTP
Password that you have specified in Default User Name / Password
(Send) of File Transfer settings applies. For details, see "File Transfer".
If User Authentication is specified, contact your administrator.
Reference
p.152 “Registering Names”
p.210 “Locating the SMB folder manually”
p.211 “Locating the SMB folder using Browse Network”
"Entering Text", About This Machine
223
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Changing the FTP registered folder
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Address Book Management] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
7
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the registration number you want to change using the number keys
or the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, registration number, user
code, fax number, e-mail address, or folder destination.
224
Registering Folders
F Press the {OK} key.
G Press [Details].
H Select [Folder Info] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
I Select [FTP] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
7
J To change the server name, enter the new server name, and then press the
{OK} key.
Otherwise, just press the {OK} key.
K To change the port number, enter the new port number, and then press the
{OK} key.
Otherwise, just press the {OK} key.
225
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
L To change the path, enter the new path, and then press the {OK} key.
Otherwise, just press the {OK} key.
M Press [Com.Test] to check the path is set correctly.
N Press [Exit].
O Press the {Escape} key.
7
P When you have finished making changes, press [End].
Q Press the {OK} key.
226
Registering Folders
R Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒ To change the name, see "Changing a Registered Name".
Reference
p.154 “Changing a Registered Name”
"Entering Text", About This Machine
Changing the protocol
A Select [SMB] or [NCP] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
A confirmation message appears.
B Press [Yes].
Changing the protocol will clear all settings made under the previous protocol.
7
C Enter each item again.
Reference
p.205 “Registering an SMB folder”
227
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Deleting the FTP registered folder
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Address Book Management] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
7
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the registration number you want to delete using the number keys or
the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, registration number, user
code, fax number, e-mail address, or folder destination.
228
Registering Folders
F Press the {OK} key.
G Press [Details].
H Select [Folder Info] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
I Select the protocol which is not currently selected using {U} or {T}, and
then press the {OK} key.
7
A confirmation message appears.
J Press [Yes].
K Press the {Escape} key twice.
229
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
L Press [End].
M Press the {OK} key.
N Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒ To delete a name entirely, see "Deleting a Registered Name".
Reference
p.156 “Deleting a Registered Name”
Using NCP to Connect
7
Note
❒ To register a shared folder configured in Windows, see "Using SMB to Connect".
❒ To register a folder in an FTP server, see "Using FTP to Connect".
Reference
p.205 “Using SMB to Connect”
p.219 “Using FTP to Connect”
Registering an NCP folder
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
230
Registering Folders
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Address Book Management] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the registration number you want to program using the number keys
7
or the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, registration number, user
code, fax number, e-mail address, or folder destination.
F Press the {OK} key.
231
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
G Press [Details].
H Select [Auth. Info] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
I Select [Folder Authentication] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
J Select [Specify Other Auth. Info] using {U} or {T}, and then press [User].
7
K Enter the login user name, and then press the {OK} key.
L Press [Password].
232
Registering Folders
M Enter the password, and then press the {OK} key.
N Enter the password again to confirm, and then press the {OK} key.
O Press the {OK} key.
P Press the {Escape} key.
7
Q Select [Folder Info] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
R Select [NCP] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
233
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
S Select the connection type using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
If you want to specify a folder in an NDS tree, press [NDS]. If you want to specify a folder on a NetWare server, press [Bindery].
T Select [Manual Entry] or [Browse Network] to specify the path entry method using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
To specify a folder, you can either enter the path manually or locate the folder
by browsing the network. See "Locating the folder manually" and "Locating
the folder using Browse Network".
U Press [Com.Test] to confirm whether or not the paths have been correctly set.
7
V Press [Exit].
W Press the {Escape} key.
234
Registering Folders
X Press [End].
Y Press the {OK} key.
Z Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒ To register the name, see "Registering Names".
❒ You can enter up to 64 characters for the user name.
❒ If you select [NDS] for the connection type, after the user name, enter the
context name where the user object resides. If the user name is "user" and
the context name is "context", the user name you would enter is "user.context".
❒ You can enter up to 64 characters for the password.
❒ To specify a folder, you can either enter the path manually or locate the
folder by browsing the network.
❒ When [Do not Specify] is selected, the NCP User Name and NCP Password
that you have specified in Default User Name / Password (Send) of File
Transfer settings applies.
❒ If User Authentication is specified, contact your administrator.
7
Reference
p.152 “Registering Names”
p.236 “Locating the NCP folder manually”
p.236 “Locating the NCP folder using Browse Network”
"Entering Text", About This Machine
235
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Locating the NCP folder manually
A Select [Manual Entry] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Enter the path name, and then press the {OK} key.
Note
❒ If you set "Connection Type" to [NDS], and if the NDS tree name is "tree",
the name of the context including the volume is "context", the volume
name is "volume" and the folder name is "folder", then the path will be
"\\tree\volume. context\folder".
❒ If you set "Connection Type" to [Bindery], and if the NetWare server name
is "server", the volume name is "volume" and the folder name is "folder",
then the path will be "\\server\volume\folder".
❒ You can enter a path using up to 128 characters.
❒ If the connection test fails, check the settings, and then try again.
7
Locating the NCP folder using Browse Network
A Select [Browse Network] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B If you have set "Connection Type" to [NDS], a list of items in the NDS tree
appears. If you have set "Connection Type" to [Bindery], a list of items on the
NetWare server appears.
236
Registering Folders
C Search for the destination folder in the NDS tree or NetWare server, and
then press [Apply].
You can press [Up] to switch between levels.
D Press the {OK} key.
Note
❒ Only the folders you are allowed to access appear in [Browse Network].
❒ If the languages used on the machine and the destination you want to view
differ, the items in the list may not appear correctly.
❒ Up to 100 items can be displayed in the list.
7
Changing the NCP registered folder
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Address Book Management] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
237
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the registration number you want to change using the number keys
or the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, registration number, user
code, fax number, e-mail address, or folder destination.
F Press the {OK} key.
7
G Press [Details].
H Select [Folder Info] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
I Select [NCP] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
238
Registering Folders
J Select the connection type using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
If you want to specify a folder in an NDS tree, press [NDS]. If you want to specify a folder on a NetWare server, press [Bindery].
K Select [Manual Entry] or [Browse Network] to specify the path entry method using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
To specify a folder, you can either enter the path manually or locate the folder
by browsing the network. See "Locating the folder manually" and "Locating
the folder using Browse Network".
L Specify the folder.
7
M Press [Com.Test] to check the path is set correctly.
N Press [Exit].
239
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
O Press the {Escape} key.
P Press [End].
Q Press the {OK} key.
R Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
7
Note
❒ To change the name, see "Changing a Registered Name".
Reference
p.154 “Changing a Registered Name”
240
Registering Folders
Changing the protocol
A Select [SMB] or [FTP] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
A confirmation message appears.
B Press [Yes].
Changing the protocol will clear all settings made under the previous protocol.
Reference
p.205 “Registering an SMB folder”
p.219 “Registering an FTP Folder”
7
Deleting the NCP registered folder
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Address Book Management] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
241
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the registration number you want to delete using the number keys or
the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, registration number, user
code, fax number, e-mail address, or folder destination.
F Press the {OK} key.
7
G Press [Details].
H Select [Folder Info] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
242
Registering Folders
I Select the protocol which is not currently selected using {U} or {T}, and
then press the {OK} key.
A confirmation message appears.
J Press [Yes].
K Press the {Escape} key twice.
7
L Press [End].
M Press the {OK} key.
N Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒ To delete a name entirely, see "Deleting a Registered Name".
Reference
p.156 “Deleting a Registered Name”
243
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Registering Names to a Group
You can register names to a group to enable easy management of e-mail addresses and folders for each group. To add names to a group, the groups must be registered beforehand.
Important
❒ When using Scan to Folder function, you cannot send scan files to a group
with over 50 folders registered.
❒ The maximum number of group is 10.
❒ The maximum number of destinations registrable to a group is 100.
Note
❒ You can set a protection code to prevent unauthorized access to the folders
registered in a group. For details, see "Registering a Protection Code".
Reference
p.260 “Registering a Protection Code”
Registering a New Group
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
7
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Prgrm./Change/Delete Group] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
244
Registering Names to a Group
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the registration number you want to program using the number keys
or the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
F Enter the group name, and then press the {OK} key.
7
G Press the {OK} key.
H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Reference
"Entering Text", About This Machine
245
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Registering Names to a Group
You can put names that have been registered in the Address Book into a group.
When registering new names, you can also register groups at the same time.
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Address Book Management] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
7
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the registration number you want to change using the number keys
or the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, registration number, user
code, fax number, e-mail address, or folder destination.
246
Registering Names to a Group
F Press the {OK} key.
G Press [Details].
H Select [Register Group to] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
I Select the group name to which you want to register using {V}, and then
press the {OK} key.
7
J Press [End].
K Press the {OK} key.
L Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
247
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Adding a Group to Another Group
You can add a group to another group.
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Prgrm./Change/Delete Group] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
7
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the registration number of the group that you want to put into another group using the number keys or the Quick Dial keys, and then press the
{OK} key.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, or registration number.
248
Registering Names to a Group
F Press the {OK} key.
G Press [Details].
H Select [Register Group to] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
I Select the group name to which you want to register using {V}, and then
press the {OK} key.
7
J Press [End].
K Press the {OK} key.
L Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
249
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Displaying Names Registered in Groups
You can check the names or groups registered in each group.
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Prgrm./Change/Delete Group] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
7
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the registration number you want to display using the number keys
or the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, or registration number.
250
Registering Names to a Group
F Press the {OK} key.
G Press [Details].
H Select [Programd. User/Group] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
All the user (destination) names in the specified group appear.
I Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
7
251
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Removing a Name from a Group
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Address Book Management] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
7
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the registration number you want to delete using the number keys or
the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
Press the key of the user to be deleted or enter the registration number from
the number keys.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, registration number, user
code, fax number, e-mail address, or folder destination.
252
Registering Names to a Group
F Press the {OK} key.
G Press [Details].
H Select [Register Group to] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
I Select the group name from which you want to delete using {W}, and then
press the {OK} key.
7
J Press [End].
K Press the {OK} key.
L Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
253
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Deleting a Group within Another Group
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Prgrm./Change/Delete Group] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
7
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the registration number of the group that you want to delete from using the number keys or the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, or registration number.
254
Registering Names to a Group
F Press the {OK} key.
G Press [Details].
H Select [Register Group to] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
I Select the group you want to delete using {U} or {T}, then confirm it by
pressing {W}, and then press the {OK} key.
7
J Press [End].
K Press the {OK} key.
L Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
255
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Changing a Group Name
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Prgrm./Change/Delete Group] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
7
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the registration number you want to change using the number keys
and the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, or registration number.
256
Registering Names to a Group
F Enter the new group name using the number keys and the Quick Dial keys,
and then press the {OK} key.
G To change the registration number, press [Regist.].
H Enter the new registration number using the number keys or the Quick
Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
I Press the {OK} key.
7
J Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
257
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Deleting a Group
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Prgrm./Change/Delete Group] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
7
D Select [Delete] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the registration number you want to delete using the number keys or
the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, or registration number.
258
Registering Names to a Group
F Press [Yes].
G Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
7
259
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Registering a Protection Code
You can stop sender's names or folders being accessed by setting a protection
code.
You can use this function to protect the following:
• Folders
You can prevent unauthorized access to folders.
• Sender's names
You can prevent misuse of sender's names.
Reference
p.158 “Registering a User Code”
Registering a Protection Code to a Single User
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
7
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Address Book Management] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
260
Registering a Protection Code
E Enter the registration number you want to protect using the number keys
or the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, registration number, user
code, fax number, e-mail address, or folder destination.
F Press the {OK} key.
G Press [Details].
7
H Select [Auth. Protect] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
I Select [Register as] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
261
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
J Select [None], [Destination Only ], [Sender Only] or [Dest. & Sender] using {U} or
{T}, and then press the {OK} key.
K Select [Dest.Protect Obj.] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
L Select [Folder] or [Sender] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
If you select [Destination Only ] in [Register as], only [Folder] can be selected.
If you select [Sender Only] in [Register as], only [Sender] can be selected.
7
M Select [Protect] or [Do not protect] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
[Protect] or [Do not protect] can be selected for both [Folder] and [Sender] at the
same time.
N Select [Dest.Protect Code] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
262
Registering a Protection Code
O Enter a protection code using the number keys, and then press the {OK}
key.
P Press the {Escape} key.
Q Press [End].
R Press the {OK} key.
7
S Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒ Specify a protection code of up to eight digits. You can also specify "Protection" without specifying a protection code.
263
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Registering a Protection Code to a Group User
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Prgrm./Change/Delete Group] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
7
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the registration number of group you want to protect using the number keys or the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, or registration number.
264
Registering a Protection Code
F Press the {OK} key.
G Press [Details].
H Select [Auth. Protect] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
I Select [Folder Protect] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
7
J Select [On] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
K Select [Destination Protect] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
265
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
L Enter a protection code using the number keys, and then press the {OK}
key.
M Press [Exit], and then press [End].
N Press the {OK} key.
O Press the {User Tools/Counter}.
7
Note
❒ Specify a protection code of up to eight digits. You can also specify "Protection" without specifying a protection code.
266
Registering SMTP and LDAP Authentication
Registering SMTP and LDAP Authentication
SMTP Authentication
For each user registered in the Address Book, you can register a login user name
and login password to be used when accessing an SMTP server.
To use an SMTP server, you need to program it beforehand.
Important
❒ When [Do not Specify] is selected for SMTP Authentication, the User Name and
Password that you have specified in SMTP Authentication of File Transfer
settings applies. For details, see "File Transfer".
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
7
C Select [Address Book Management] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
267
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
E Enter the registration number you want to register using the number keys
or the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, registration number, user
code, fax number, e-mail address, or folder destination.
F Press the {OK} key.
G Press [Details].
7
H Select [Auth. Info] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
I Select [SMTP Authentication] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
J Select [Specify Other Auth. Info] using {U} or {T}, and then press [User].
268
Registering SMTP and LDAP Authentication
K Enter the login user name, and then press the {OK} key.
L Press the [Password].
M Enter the password, and then press the {OK} key.
N Enter the password again to confirm, and then press the {OK} key.
7
O Press the {Escape} key twice.
P Press [End].
269
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Q Press the {OK} key.
R Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒ To register the name, see "Registering Names".
❒ You can enter up to 191 characters for the user name.
❒ When using POP before SMTP Authentication, you can enter up to 63 alphanumeric characters.
❒ You can enter up to 128 characters for the password.
❒ To change the SMTP Authentication settings, repeat step B to P.
Reference
p.152 “Registering Names”
p.15 “Network Settings”
"Entering Text", About This Machine
7
270
Registering SMTP and LDAP Authentication
LDAP authentication
For each user registered in the Address Book, you can register a login user name
and login password to be used when accessing an LDAP server.
To use an LDAP server, you need to program it beforehand.
Important
❒ When [Do not Specify] is selected for LDAP Authentication, the User Name
and Password that you have specified in Program/Change LDAP Server of
Administrator Tools settings applies. For details about LDAP authentication,
consult your administrator.
A Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
7
C Select [Address Book Management] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
D Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
271
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
E Enter the registration number you want to register using the number keys
or the Quick Dial keys, and then press the {OK} key.
You can automatically specify registration numbers 001-016 by pressing the
Quick Dial keys.
Press [Search] to search by name, destination list, registration number, user
code, fax number, e-mail address, or folder destination.
F Press the {OK} key.
G Press [Details].
7
H Select [Auth. Info] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
I Select [LDAP Authentication] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
J Select [Specify Other Auth. Info] using {U} or {T}, and then press [User].
272
Registering SMTP and LDAP Authentication
K Enter the login user name, and then press the {OK} key.
L Press [Password].
M Enter the password, and then press the {OK} key.
N Enter the password again to confirm, and then press the {OK} key.
7
O Press the {Escape} key twice.
P Press [End].
273
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Q Press the {OK} key.
R Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Note
❒ To register the name, see "Registering Names".
❒ When [Do not Specify] is selected for LDAP Authentication, the User Name
and Password that you have specified in Program/Change LDAP Server
of Administrator Tools settings applies.
❒ You can enter up to 128 characters for the user name.
❒ To change the LDAP Authentication settings, repeat step B to P.
Reference
p.152 “Registering Names”
p.64 “Program/Change/Delete LDAP Server”
"Entering Text", About This Machine
7
274
Searching
Searching
You can search for the user information stored in [Address Book Management] under [Administrator Tools] in [System Settings] by displaying a list. Alternatively,
you can search by name, registration number, user code, fax number, e-mail address, or destination folder name.
This section explains how to search for a user name or destination registered in
the address book.
For details about accessing [Address Book Management], see "Registering Names".
Reference
p.152 “Registering Names”
Searching by Name
Search the address book using a destination or user name.
A Press [Search].
7
B Select [Search by Name] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Enter the name you want to search for, and then press the {OK} key. You can
also search by entering part of the name.
D Press the {OK} key.
The search results appear.
275
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
E Select the name using {U} or {T}, then confirm it by pressing {V}, and then
press the {OK} key.
Reference
"Entering Text", About This Machine
Searching from the List
Search the address book by displaying a list of registered user names and destinations.
A Press [Search].
7
B Select [Display List] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
The list of registered user names or destination names appears.
C Select the destination using {U} or {T}, then confirm it by pressing {V},
and then press the {OK} key.
Reference
"Entering Text", About This Machine
276
Searching
Searching by Registration Number
Search the address book using the registration number of a user or destination.
A Press [Search].
B Select [Search by Registration No.] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
C Enter the registration number you want to search for using the number
keys, and then press the {OK} key.
7
D Select the name using {U} or {T}, then confirm it by pressing {V}, and then
press the {OK} key.
277
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Searching by User Code
Search the address book using registered user codes.
A Press [Search].
B Select [Search by User Code] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Enter the user code you want to search for using the number keys, and then
press the {OK} key.
7
D Press the {OK} key.
The search results appear.
E Select the name using {U} or {T}, then confirm it by pressing {V}, and then
press the {OK} key.
278
Searching
Searching by Fax Number
Search the address book using registered fax numbers.
A Press [Search].
B Select [Search Fax Destination] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Enter the fax number you want to search for using the number keys, and
then press the {OK} key.
To search by IP-Fax number, press [IP], enter the IP-Fax number, and then
press the {OK} key.
7
D Press the {OK} key.
The search results appear.
E Select the name using {U} or {T}, then confirm it by pressing {V}, and then
press the {OK} key.
Reference
"Entering Text", About This Machine
279
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Searching by E-mail Address
Search the address book using registered e-mail addresses.
A Press [Search].
B Select [Search by E-mail Address] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
C Enter the e-mail address you want to search for, and then press the {OK}
key.
You can also search by entering part of the e-mail address.
7
D Press the {OK} key.
The search results appear.
E Select the name using {U} or {T}, then confirm it by pressing {V}, and then
press the {OK} key.
Reference
"Entering Text", About This Machine
280
Searching
Searching by Destination Folder Name
You can search for a destination folder name registered in the address book.
A Press [Search].
B Select [Search by Folder Name] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Enter the destination folder name, and then press the {OK} key.
You can also search by entering part of the destination folder name.
7
D Press the {OK} key.
The search results appear.
E Select the name using {U} or {T}, then confirm it by pressing {V}, and then
press the {OK} key.
Reference
"Entering Text", About This Machine
281
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Using Web Image Monitor
This section describes how to access the Web Image Monitor.
Using Web Image Monitor, you can register names in the Address Book.
A Start your Web browser.
B Enter “http://(machine's address)/” in the address bar of a Web browser.
Top page of Web Image Monitor appears.
If the machine's host name has been registered on the DNS or WINS server,
you can enter it.
When setting SSL, a protocol for encrypted communication, under environment which server authentication is issued, enter "https://(machine's address)/".
7
C Click [Login].
D Enter a login user name and password, and then click [Login].
For details about the login user name and password, consult your network
administrator.
E Click [Address Book].
Note
❒ For details about how to register names in Address Book by using Web Image Monitor, see the Web Image Monitor Help.
282
8. Other User Tools
Initial settings allow you switch the language as well as checking the number of
printed paper by displaying the counter. For the details on how to access respective settings, see "Accessing User Tools".
Changing the Display Language
Following describes [Language] provided for the machine.
You can change the language used on the display. English is set as default.
A Select [Language] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B Select the language using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Reference
p.4 “Accessing User Tools”
283
Other User Tools
Counter
Displaying the Total Counter
You can display the total counter value used for all functions.
A Select [Counter] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
B To print the counter list, press [Print].
C Press the {Start} key.
8
A counter list prints out.
Reference
p.4 “Accessing User Tools”
284
9. Appendix
Copyright Information about Installed
Software
expat
• The software including controller, etc. (hereinafter "software") installed on
this product uses the expat under the conditions mentioned below.
• The product manufacturer provides warranty and support to the software of
the product including the expat, and the product manufacturer makes the initial developer and copyright holder of the expat, free from these obligations.
• Information relating to the expat is available at:
http://expat.sourceforge.net/
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center, Ltd. and Clark
Cooper.
Copyright © 2001, 2002 Expat maintainers.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of
this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the
Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the
Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all
copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
285
Appendix
NetBSD
9
1. Copyright Notice of NetBSD
For all users to use this product:
This product contains NetBSD operating system:
For the most part, the software constituting the NetBSD operating system is not
in the public domain; its authors retain their copyright.
The following text shows the copyright notice used for many of the NetBSD
source code. For exact copyright notice applicable for each of the files/binaries,
the source code tree must be consulted.
A full source code can be found at http://www.netbsd.org/.
Copyright © 1999, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
A Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
B Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
C All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgment:
This product includes software developed by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
and its contributors.
D Neither the name of The NetBSD Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND
CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
2.Authors Name List
All product names mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective owners.
The following notices are required to satisfy the license terms of the software
286 that we have mentioned in this document:
Copyright Information about Installed Software
• This product includes software developed by the University of California,
Berkeley and its contributors.
• This product includes software developed by Jonathan R. Stone for the NetBSD Project.
• This product includes software developed by the NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
and its contributors.
• This product includes software developed by Manuel Bouyer.
• This product includes software developed by Charles Hannum.
• This product includes software developed by Charles M. Hannum.
• This product includes software developed by Christopher G. Demetriou.
• This product includes software developed by TooLs GmbH.
• This product includes software developed by Terrence R. Lambert.
• This product includes software developed by Adam Glass and Charles Hannum.
• This product includes software developed by Theo de Raadt.
• This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone and Jason R.
Thorpe for the NetBSD Project.
• This product includes software developed by the University of California,
Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory and its contributors.
• This product includes software developed by Christos Zoulas.
• This product includes software developed by Christopher G. Demetriou for
the NetBSD Project.
• This product includes software developed by Paul Kranenburg.
• This product includes software developed by Adam Glass.
• This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone.
• This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone for the NetBSD
Project.
• This product includes software developed by Winning Strategies, Inc.
• This product includes software developed by Frank van der Linden for the
NetBSD Project.
• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Frank
van der Linden
• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Jason R.
Thorpe.
• The software was developed by the University of California, Berkeley.
• This product includes software developed by Chris Provenzano, the University of California, Berkeley, and contributors.
9
287
Appendix
Sablotron
Sablotron (Version 0.82) Copyright © 2000 Ginger Alliance Ltd. All Rights Reserved
a) The application software installed on this product includes the Sablotron software Version 0.82 (hereinafter, "Sablotron 0.82"), with modifications made by
the product manufacturer. The original code of the Sablotron 0.82 is provided by
Ginger Alliance Ltd., the initial developer, and the modified code of the Sablotron 0.82 has been derived from such original code provided by Ginger Alliance Ltd.
b) The product manufacturer provides warranty and support to the application
software of this product including the Sablotron 0.82 as modified, and the product manufacturer makes Ginger Alliance Ltd., the initial developer of the Sablotron 0.82, free from these obligations.
c) The Sablotron 0.82 and the modifications thereof are made available under the
terms of Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (hereinafter, "MPL 1.1"), and the application software of this product constitutes the "Larger Work" as defined in
MPL 1.1. The application software of this product except for the Sablotron 0.82
as modified is licensed by the product manufacturer under separate agreement(s).
d) The source code of the modified code of the Sablotron 0.82 is available at: http://support-download.com/services/device/sablot/notice082.html
e) The source code of the Sablotron software is available at: http://www.gingerall.com
f) MPL 1.1 is available at: http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/MPL-1.1.html
JPEG LIBRARY
9
• The software installed on this product is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
288
Copyright Information about Installed Software
SASL
CMU libsasl
Tim Martin
Rob Earhart
Rob Siemborski
Copyright (c) 2001 Carnegie Mellon University. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
A Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
B Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
C The name "Carnegie Mellon University" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission.
For permission or any other legal details, please contact:
Office of Technology Transfer
Carnegie Mellon University
5000 Forbes Avenue
Pittsburgh, PA 15213-3890
(412) 268-4387, fax: (412) 268-7395
tech-transfer@andrew.cmu.edu
D Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by Computing Services at Carnegie Mellon University (http://www.cmu.edu/computing/)."
CARNEGIE MELLON UNIVERSITY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH
REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO EVENT SHALL CARNEGIE
MELLON UNIVERSITY BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.
9
289
Appendix
MD4
Copyright (C) 1990-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. All rights reserved.
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as
the "RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material
mentioning or referencing this software or this function.
License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such
works are identified as "derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4 MessageDigest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work.
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software or the suitability of this software for any particular
purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty of any kind.
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation
and/or software.
MD5
Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved.
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as
the "RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material
mentioning or referencing this software or this function.
9
License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such
works are identified as "derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 MessageDigest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work.
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software or the suitability of this software for any particular
purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty of any kind.
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation
and/or software.
290
Copyright Information about Installed Software
Samba(Ver 3.0.4)
For SMB transmission, this machine uses Samba ver 3.0.4 (hereinafter referred to
as Samba 3.0.4).
Copyright © Andrew Tridgell 1994-1998
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the
terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
Note
❒ The source code for SMB transmission by this machine can be downloaded
from the following website:
http://support-download.com/services/scbs
RSA BSAFE®
9
• This product includes RSA BSAFE® cryptographic or security protocol software from RSA Security Inc.
• RSA and BSAFE are registered trademarks of RSA Security Inc. in the United
States and/or other countries.
• RSA Security Inc. All rights reserved.
291
Appendix
Open SSL
Copyright (c) 1998-2004 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed
by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
9
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may
"OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the
OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND
ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
292 THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright Information about Installed Software
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Original SSLeay License
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found
in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL
code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the
same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code
are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be
given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the
form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
9
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic
software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)" The word 'cryptographic'
can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic
related :-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the
apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This
product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
293
Appendix
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e this code cannot simply be copied and
put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]
Open SSH
The licences which components of this software fall under are as follows. First,
we will summarize and say that all components are under a BSD licence, or a licence more free than that.
OpenSSH contains no GPL code.
9
1)
Copyright (c) 1995 Tatu Ylonen <ylo@cs.hut.fi>, Espoo, Finland All rights reserved
As far as I am concerned, the code I have written for this software can be used
freely for any purpose. Any derived versions of this software must be clearly
marked as such, and if the derived work is incompatible with the protocol description in the RFC file, it must be called by a name other than "ssh" or "Secure
Shell".
[Tatu continues]
However, I am not implying to give any licenses to any patents or copyrights
held by third parties, and the software includes parts that are not under my direct control. As far as I know, all included source code is used in accordance with
the relevant license agreements and can be used freely for any purpose (the
GNU license being the most restrictive); see below for details.
[However, none of that term is relevant at this point in time. All of these restrictively licenced software components which he talks about have been removed
294 from OpenSSH, i.e.,
Copyright Information about Installed Software
- RSA is no longer included, found in the OpenSSL library
- IDEA is no longer included, its use is deprecated
- DES is now external, in the OpenSSL library
- GMP is no longer used, and instead we call BN code from OpenSSL
- Zlib is now external, in a library
- The make-ssh-known-hosts script is no longer included
- TSS has been removed
- MD5 is now external, in the OpenSSL library
- RC4 support has been replaced with ARC4 support from OpenSSL
- Blowfish is now external, in the OpenSSL library
[The licence continues]
Note that any information and cryptographic algorithms used in this software
are publicly available on the Internet and at any major bookstore, scientific library, and patent office worldwide. More information can be found e.g. at "http://www.cs.hut.fi/crypto".
The legal status of this program is some combination of all these permissions
and restrictions. Use only at your own responsibility. You will be responsible for
any legal consequences yourself; I am not making any claims whether possessing or using this is legal or not in your country, and I am not taking any responsibility on your behalf.
9
NO WARRANTY
BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE
OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
295
Appendix
IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO
IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY
WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE
OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN
IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
2)
The 32-bit CRC compensation attack detector in deattack.c was contributed by
CORE SDI S.A. under a BSD-style license.
Cryptographic attack detector for ssh - source code
Copyright (c) 1998 CORE SDI S.A., Buenos Aires, Argentina.
All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or
without modification, are permitted provided that this copyright notice is retained.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL CORE SDI S.A. BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OR MISUSE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Ariel Futoransky <futo@core-sdi.com>
<http://www.core-sdi.com>
9
3)
One component of the ssh source code is under a 3-clause BSD license, held by
the University of California, since we pulled these parts from original Berkeley
code.
Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1992, 1993, 1995
The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
296
Copyright Information about Installed Software
3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS
``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
4)
Remaining components of the software are provided under a standard 2-term
BSD licence with the following names as copyright holders:
Markus Friedl
Theo de Raadt
Niels Provos
Dug Song
Kevin Steves
Daniel Kouril
Wesley Griffin
Per Allansson
Jason Downs
Solar Designer
Todd C. Miller
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
9
297
Appendix
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
5)
Portable OpenSSH contains the following additional licenses:
c) Compatibility code (openbsd-compat)
Apart from the previously mentioned licenses, various pieces of code in the
openbsd-compat/ subdirectory are licensed as follows:
Some code is licensed under a 3-term BSD license, to the following copyright
holders:
Todd C. Miller
Theo de Raadt
Damien Miller
Eric P. Allman
The Regents of the University of California
9
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
298
Copyright Information about Installed Software
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS
``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Open LDAP
The OpenLDAP Public License Version 2.8, 17 August 2003
Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation ("Software"), with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1. Redistributions in source form must retain copyright statements and notices,
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce applicable copyright statements and notices, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution, and
9
3. Redistributions must contain a verbatim copy of this document.
The OpenLDAP Foundation may revise this license from time to time. Each revision is distinguished by a version number. You may use this Software under
terms of this license revision or under the terms of any subsequent revision of
the license.
299
Appendix
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION AND
ITS CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPENLDAP
FOUNDATION, ITS CONTRIBUTORS, OR THE AUTHOR(S) OR OWNER(S)
OF THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The names of the authors and copyright holders must not be used in advertising
or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealing in this Software without
specific, written prior permission. Title to copyright in this Software shall at all
times remain with copyright holders.
OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation.
Copyright 1999-2003 The OpenLDAP Foundation, Redwood City, California,
USA. All Rights Reserved. Permission to copy and distribute verbatim copies of
this document is granted.
9
300
INDEX
A
Address Book: Print List, 59
Address Book Management, 59
Adjust Sound Volume, 85
Admin. Auth. Management, 59
Admin. E-mail Address, 55
Administrator Tools (Fax Features), 93
Administrator Tools (System Settings), 59
AOF (Always On), 59, 72
Append CR to LF (PCL Menu), 136
Authorized Reception, 87
Authorized RX, 122
Auto Continue, 132
Auto Erase Memory Setting, 59
Auto Logout Timer, 46
Auto Off Timer, 46
Auto Specify Sender Name, 55
Auto Tray Switching, 81
B
Bidirectional Comm., 52
Blank Page Print, 132
Bypass Tray Priority, 132
C
Center Mark, 87
Change PDF Password, 139
Checkered Mark, 87
Communication Mode, 53
Communication Page Count, 93
Communication Speed, 53
Compression, 144
Config. Page, 129
Copier Auto Reset Timer (copier), 46
Copier Features, 81
Copies, 132
Copy Count Display, 41
Counter per User Code, 72
Courier Font (PCL Menu), 136
D
Data Format (PS Menu), 138
DDNS Configuration, 48
Default Printer Lang., 132
Default Scan Settings, 141
Default User Name/PW(Send), 55
Delete All Logs, 59
Delete Scanner Journal, 144
Delivery Option, 55
Destination List Settings (Scanner
Features), 143
Dest. List Priority 1, 143
Dest. List Priority 2, 143
Display / Print Counter, 72
Display/Print Counter, 59
Disp./Print User Counter, 59
Divide & Send E-mail, 144
DNS Configuration, 48
Domain Name, 48
Duplex, 132
Duplex Margin, 81
Duplex Mode Priority, 81
E
Edge to Edge Print, 132
Effective Protocol, 48
E-mail Communication Port, 55
E-mail Informatn. Language, 144
E-mail Recept. Interval, 55
E-mail Settings (Fax Features), 88
E-mail Storage in Server, 55
Enable H.323, 90
Enable SIP, 90
Energy Saver Timer, 46
Erase All Memory, 59
Error Log, 129
Ethernet Speed, 48
Ext. A4 Width (PCL Menu), 136
Extended Security, 59
F
Facsimile Auto Reset Timer (facsimile), 46
Fax E-mail Account, 55
Fax Features (Administrator Tools), 93
Fax Features (E-mail Settings), 88
Fax Features (General Settings/Adjust), 85
Fax Features (IP-Fax Settings), 90
Fax Features (Reception Settings), 87
File Transfer (System Settings), 55
File Type Priority, 144
Firmware Version, 59
Folder TX Result Report, 93
Font Number (PCL Menu), 136
Font Pitch (PCL Menu), 136
Font Source (PCL Menu), 136
Form Lines (PCL Menu), 136
Forwarding, 93, 119, 122
Function Priority, 41
301
G
G3 Analog Line, 93
Gateway Settings, 90
General Features (System Settings), 41
General Settings/Adjust (Fax Features), 85
H
H.323 Settings, 90
Hex Dump, 129
Host Interface (Printer Features), 135
Host Name, 48
I
IEEE 802.11b (Network), 53
I/F Settings List, 54
Input Prime, 52
Interface Setting (Network), 48
Interface Settings (System Settings), 48
Internet Fax Settings, 88
I/O Buffer, 135
I/O Timeout, 135
IP-Fax Settings (Fax Features), 90
IPv4 Gateway Address, 48
IPv6 Gateway Address, 48
IPv6 Stateless Setting, 48
K
Key Counter Management, 59, 72
key Operator Code, 72
Key Operator Tools(For machines with
copier function only or with the DDST
Unit) (System Settings), 72
Key Repeat, 41
L
LAN Type, 48
LDAP Search, 59
Letterhead Setting, 81, 132
List/Test Print Lock, 131
List/Test Print (Printer Features), 129
M
302
Machine IPv4 Address, 48
Machine IPv6 Address, 48
Machine Name, 48
Maintenance (Printer Features), 131
Max. E-mail Size, 144
Maximum E-mail Size, 88
Max. Number of Sets, 81
Max. Recept. E-mail Size, 55
Measurement Unit, 41
Memory Lock, 93
Memory Overflow, 132
Memory Usage, 132
Menu List, 129
Mixed Orig. Sizes Priority, 141
Multiple Lists, 129
N
NCP Delivery Protocol, 48
Network (IEEE 802.11b), 53
Network (Interface Settings), 48
Network (Parallel Interface), 52
Network Security Level, 59
NW Frame Type, 48
O
On Hook Release Time, 85
Orientation (PCL Menu), 136
Original Count Display, 81
Original Setting, 141
Original Type Setting, 81, 141
Orig. Orientation Priority, 141
P
Page Size, 132
Panel Key Sound, 41
Paper Size: Tray 1-2, 44
Paper Type: Bypass Tray, 44
Paper Type: Paper Tray1-2, 44
Parallel Comm. Speed, 52
Parallel Interface (Network), 52
Parallel Timing, 52
Parameter Setting, 93
PCL Config./Font Page, 129
PCL Menu (Printer Features), 136
PDF Config./Font Page, 129
PDF Group Password, 139
PDF Menu (Printer Features), 139
Permit SNMPv3 Communictn., 48
Permit SSL/TLS Comm., 48
Ping Command, 48
Point Size (PCL Menu), 136
POP3/IMAP4 Settings, 55
POP before SMTP, 55
Ppr Tray Priority: Copier (copier), 44
Ppr Tray Priority: Fax (facsimile), 44
Ppr Tray Priority: Printer (printer), 44
Preset R/E Priority, 81
Prgrm./Change/Delete Group, 59
Print&Del. Scanner Journal, 144
Printer Auto Reset Timer (printer), 46
Printer Bypass Paper Size, 44
Printer Features (Host Interface), 135
Printer Features (List/Test Print), 129
Printer Features (Maintenance), 131
Printer Features (PCL Menu), 136
Printer Features (PDF Menu), 139
Printer Features (PS Menu), 138
Printer Features (System), 132
Printer Language, 132
Print Error Report, 132
Print Journal, 93
Print Priority, 41
Print Reception Time, 87
Print Scanner Journal, 144
Print TX Standby File List, 93
Prog/Change/Del User Text, 41
Prog/Chnge/Del LDAP Server, 59
Program/Change Admin., 59
Program / Change User Code, 72
Program Fax Information, 85
Program Memory Lock ID, 93
Program Special Sender, 93
PS Config./Font Page, 129
PS Menu (Printer Features), 138
R
RAM Disk, 132
Reception Protocol, 55
Reception Settings (Fax Features), 87
Reproduction Ratio, 81
Resolution (PCL Menu), 136
Resolution (PDF Menu), 139
Resolution (PS Menu), 138
Restore Defaults, 53
S
Scanner Auto Reset Timer (scanner), 46
Scanner Features (Destination List
Settings), 143
Scanner Features (Scan Settings), 141
Scanner Features (Send Settings), 144
Scan Settings (Scanner Features), 141
Screen Contrast, 41
Security Type, 53
Select Dial/Push Phone, 93
Selection Signal Status, 52
Send Settings (Scanner Features), 144
Set Date, 46
Set Time, 46
Set User Function Key, 85
Signal Control, 52
SIP Settings, 90
SMB Computer Name, 48
SMB Work Group, 48
SMTP Authentication, 55
SMTP RX File Delivery, 88
SMTP Server, 55
SSID Setting, 53
Sub Paper Size, 132
Switch Reception Mode, 87
Symbol Set (PCL Menu), 136
System Auto Reset Timer, 46
System (Printer Features), 132
System Settings (Administrator Tools), 59
System Settings (File Transfer), 55
System Settings (General Features), 41
System Settings (Interface Settings), 48
System Settings (Key Operator Tools)
(For machines with copier function only
or with the DDST Unit), 72
System Settings (Timer Settings), 46
System Settings (Tray Paper Settings), 44
T
Timer Settings (System Settings), 46
Transfer Log Setting, 59
Tray Paper Settings (System Settings), 44
Tray Switching, 132
TWAIN Standby Time, 144
U
Update Server Dest. List, 143
User Auth. Management, 59
User Code Man.
Copier, 72
User Name, 150
W
Warm-up Beeper (copier), 41
WINS Configuration, 48
Wireless LAN Signal, 53
303
304
EN
USA
B262-7480
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:
a means POWER ON.
c means STAND BY.
Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows® and Windows NT® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Acrobat® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® Windows® 95
The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft® Windows® 98
The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows® Millennium Edition (Windows Me)
The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
The product names of Windows® XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
The product names of Windows ServerTM 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Web Edition
The product names of Windows® NT are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0
Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0
Copyright © 2006
Operating Instructions General Settings Guide
Type for 816/DSm416/LD016/Aficio MP 161
Type for 816f/DSm416f/LD016f/Aficio MP 161F
Type for 816mf/DSm416pf/LD016spf/Aficio MP 161SPF
EN USA B262-7480
Operating Instructions
Troubleshooting
1
When the Machine Does Not Operate As Wanted
2
Troubleshooting When Using the Copy Function
3
Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function
4
Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function
5
Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function
6
Troubleshooting When Using the DDST Unit
7
Adding Paper and Replacing Toner
8
Clearing Misfeeds
9
Remarks
Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the
Safety Information in "About This Machine" before using the machine.
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine. For your
safety and benefit, read this manual carefully before using the machine. Keep this manual in a handy
place for quick reference.
Important
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine.
Notes:
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Depending on which country you are in, certain units may be optional. For details, please contact your
local dealer.
Caution:
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.
For good copy quality, the supplier recommends that you use genuine toner from the supplier.
The supplier shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts
other than genuine parts from the supplier with your office products.
Power Source
120V, 60Hz, 8A or more
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as shown above. For details about power
source, see p.97 “Power Connection”.
Manuals for This Machine
Refer to the manuals that are relevant to what you want to do with the machine.
Manuals for machines with copier function only or with the DDST Unit are different. See “Manuals for Machines with Copier Function Only or with the DDST
Unit”.
Important
❒ Media differ according to manual.
❒ The printed and electronic versions of a manual have the same contents.
❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader must be installed in order to view the
manuals as PDF files.
❒ Depending on which country you are in, there may also be html manuals. To
view these manuals, a Web browser must be installed.
❖ About This Machine
Be sure to read the Safety Information in this manual before using the machine.
This manual provides an introduction to the functions of the machine. It also
explains the control panel, preparation procedures for using the machine,
how to enter text, and how to install the CD-ROMs provided.
❖ General Settings Guide
Explains User Tools settings, and Address Book procedures such as registering fax numbers, e-mail addresses, and user codes. Also refer to this manual
for explanations on how to connect the machine.
❖ Troubleshooting
Provides a guide to solving common problems, and explains how to replace
paper, toner, and other consumables.
❖ Security Reference
This manual is for administrators of the machine. It explains security functions that the administrators can use to protect data from being tampered
with, or prevent the machine from unauthorized use.
Also refer to this manual for the procedures for registering administrators, as
well as setting user and administrator authentication.
❖ Copy Reference
Explains Copier functions and operations. Also refer to this manual for explanations on how to place originals.
❖ Facsimile Reference
Explains Facsimile functions and operations.
❖ Printer Reference
Explains Printer functions and operations.
❖ Scanner Reference
Explains Scanner functions and operations.
i
❖ Network Guide
Explains how to configure and operate the machine in a network environment, and use the software provided.
This manual covers all models, and includes descriptions of functions and
settings that might not be available on this machine. Images, illustrations, and
information about operating systems that are supported might also differ
slightly from those of this machine.
❖ Other manuals
• PostScript3 Supplement
• UNIX Supplement
• Manuals for DeskTopBinder Lite
• DeskTopBinder Lite Setup Guide
• DeskTopBinder Introduction Guide
• Auto Document Link Guide
Note
❒ Manuals provided are specific to machine types.
❒ For “UNIX Supplement”, please visit our Web site or consult an authorized
dealer.
❒ “PostScript3 Supplement” and “UNIX Supplement” include descriptions of
functions and settings that might not be available on this machine.
Reference
p.iii “Manuals for Machines with Copier Function Only or with the DDST
Unit”
ii
Manuals for Machines with Copier Function Only or with the
DDST Unit
This section describes the manuals for machines with copier function only or
with the DDST Unit.
❖ About This Machine
Be sure to read the Safety Information in this manual before using the machine.
This manual provides an introduction to the functions of the machine. It also
explains the control panel, preparation procedures for using the machine, and
how to install the CD-ROMs provided.
❖ General Settings Guide
Explains User Tools settings. Also refer to this manual for explanations on
how to register user codes.
❖ Troubleshooting
Provides a guide to solving common problems, and explains how to replace
paper, toner, and other consumables.
❖ Copy Reference
Explains Copier functions and operations. Also refer to this manual for explanations on how to place originals.
❖ Printer/Scanner Reference
Explains system settings, functions and operations for the machine's printer/scanner unit. Also refer to this manual for explanations on how to connect
the machine.
❖ Network Guide
Explains how to configure and operate the machine in a network environment, and use the software provided.
Note
❒ Some manuals include descriptions of functions and settings that are not
available on machines with copier function only or with the DDST Unit.
iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Machine ......................................................................................i
Manuals for Machines with Copier Function Only or with the DDST Unit ................. iii
How to Read This Manual .....................................................................................1
Symbols .....................................................................................................................1
Name of Major Item....................................................................................................1
1. When the Machine Does Not Operate As Wanted
Indicators................................................................................................................3
Panel Tone..............................................................................................................4
When the Function Status Indicator Lights Up in Red.......................................5
When You Have Problems Operating the Machine.............................................6
When a Job Is Not Performed...............................................................................9
2. Troubleshooting When Using the Copy Function
When a Message Is Displayed ............................................................................11
When You Cannot Make Clear Copies ...............................................................13
When You Cannot Make Copies As Wanted .....................................................15
When Memory Is Full ...............................................................................................17
3. Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function
Adjusting the Volume ..........................................................................................19
When a Message Is Displayed ............................................................................22
When You Cannot Send or Receive Fax Messages As Wanted ......................28
When Memory Is Full ...............................................................................................32
When an Error Report Is Printed ........................................................................33
Turning Off the Main Power / In the Event of Power Failure............................34
When an Error Occurs Using Internet Fax ........................................................35
Error Mail Notification...............................................................................................35
Error Report (E-Mail)................................................................................................35
Server-Generated Error E-mail ................................................................................35
4. Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function
When a Message Is Displayed during Installation of the Printer Driver .........37
Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000 or Windows NT 4.0 .........................................37
Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003................................................37
Windows XP Home Edition ......................................................................................38
When a Message Is Displayed ............................................................................39
Status Messages......................................................................................................39
Alert Messages ........................................................................................................40
Printing the Error Log ...............................................................................................42
When You Cannot Print.......................................................................................43
Other Printing Problems .....................................................................................46
iv
5. Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function
When Scanning Is Not Done As Expected ........................................................53
When You Cannot Send Scanned Files .............................................................54
When You Cannot Browse the Network to Send a Scanned File ............................54
When the TWAIN Driver Cannot Be Started ............................................................54
The Network Delivery Function Cannot Be Used.....................................................54
Operations Are Not Possible When Messages Appear ...........................................55
When a Message Is Displayed ............................................................................56
When a Message Is Displayed on the Display Panel...............................................56
When a Message Is Displayed on the Client Computer...........................................60
6. Troubleshooting When Using the DDST Unit
The Printer Function............................................................................................65
When a Message Is Displayed.................................................................................65
When You Cannot Print ...........................................................................................68
Other Printing Problems...........................................................................................70
The Scanner Function .........................................................................................73
When Scanning Is Not Done As Expected...............................................................73
When a Message Is Displayed on the Client Computer...........................................74
7. Adding Paper and Replacing Toner
Loading Paper ......................................................................................................75
Loading Paper into the Paper Trays ........................................................................76
Orientation-Fixed Paper or Two-Sided Paper ..........................................................77
Changing the Paper Size.....................................................................................80
Changing the Paper Size in the Paper Tray (Tray 1) ...............................................80
Changing a Paper Size in the Optional Paper Tray Unit (Tray 2) ............................83
Adding Toner........................................................................................................87
Replacing Toner.......................................................................................................88
Sending Fax Messages When Toner Has Run Out .................................................89
Waste Toner.............................................................................................................89
8. Clearing Misfeeds
Removing Jammed Paper ...................................................................................91
9. Remarks
Where to Put Your Machine ................................................................................95
Machine Environment ..............................................................................................95
Moving......................................................................................................................96
Power Connection....................................................................................................97
Access to the Machine .............................................................................................98
When Not Used for a Long Time..............................................................................98
Maintaining Your Machine ..................................................................................99
Cleaning the Exposure Glass...................................................................................99
Cleaning the Exposure Glass Cover ......................................................................100
Cleaning the ARDF ................................................................................................100
INDEX....................................................................................................... 101
v
vi
How to Read This Manual
Symbols
This manual uses the following symbols:
Indicates important safety notes.
Ignoring these notes could result in serious injury or death. Be sure to read these
notes. They can be found in the “Safety Information” section of About This Machine.
Indicates important safety notes.
Ignoring these notes could result in moderate or minor injury, or damage to the
machine or to property. Be sure to read these notes. They can be found in the
“Safety Information” section of About This Machine.
Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations
of likely causes of paper misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure
to read these explanations.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine’s functions, and instructions on resolving user errors.
This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find further relevant information.
[]
Indicates the names of keys that appear on the machine’s display panel.
{}
Indicates the names of keys on the machine’s control panel.
Name of Major Item
Major item of this machine is referred to as follows in this manual:
• Auto Document Feeder capable of scanning both sides of a sheet → ARDF
1
2
1. When the Machine Does
Not Operate As Wanted
This section describes basic troubleshooting procedures that are applicable to all
functions of this machine.
Indicators
This section explains the indicators that light up when the machine requires the
user to remove misfed paper, add paper, or perform other procedures.
h: Error indicator
Appears when there is a misfeed, a cover is left open, or
another problem occurs. See p.91 “Clearing Misfeeds”.
B: Load Paper indicator
Appears when paper-out condition occurs. See p.75
“Loading Paper”.
D: Add Toner indicator
Appears when toner runs out. See p.87 “Adding Toner”.
3
When the Machine Does Not Operate As Wanted
Panel Tone
The following table explains the various beep patterns that the machine produces to alert users about machine conditions.
1
Beep pattern
Meaning
Cause
Two long beeps.
Machine has warmed
up.
After cooling or being switched on, the
machine has fully warmed up and is
ready for use.
Single short beep.
A valid operation is accepted.
A control panel key was pressed, the
machine was switched on, or a document was placed on the ARDF.
Five short beeps repeated Strong alert.
five times.
Machine requires user attention. Paper
might have jammed or toner might need
replenishing.
Note
❒ Users cannot mute the machine's beep alerts. When the machine beeps to alert
users of a paper jam or toner request, if the machine's covers are opened and
closed repeatedly within a short space of time, the beep alert might continue,
even after normal status has resumed.
Reference
For details about enabling or disabling beep alerts, see “General Features”,
General Settings Guide.
4
When the Function Status Indicator Lights Up in Red
When the Function Status Indicator Lights
Up in Red
1
If a function key is lit in red, press the key to switch to the screen for the corresponding function, and then follow the message that appears.
Problem
Cause
Documents and reports There is no copy paper left.
are not printed out.
An error has occurred.
Solution
Add more paper. See p.75 “Loading Paper”.
The function whose indicator is lit Record the code number shown
is defective.
in the display and contact your
service representative. See
“When a Message Is Displayed”
of each chapter. You can use other
functions normally.
The machine is unable to A network error has occurred.
connect to the network.
• Check the displayed message
and take an appropriate action. See “When a Message Is
Displayed” of each chapter.
• Check that the machine is correctly connected to the network, and that the machine is
correctly set. See “Network
Settings”, General Settings
Guide.
• Contact the administrator.
• When the function key is still
lit in red, even if you take the
measures above, contact your
service representative.
Note
❒ If an error occurs in the function you are using, check the message that appears on the display panel, and then refer to “When a Message Is Displayed”
for the relevant function.
Reference
p.11 “Troubleshooting When Using the Copy Function”
p.19 “Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function”
p.37 “Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function”
p.53 “Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function”
p.65 “Troubleshooting When Using the DDST Unit”
5
When the Machine Does Not Operate As Wanted
When You Have Problems Operating the
Machine
1
The following chart gives explanations of common problems and messages.
If other messages appear, follow the instructions displayed.
6
Problem
Cause
Solution
“Please wait...”
appears.
This message appears when you
turn on the operation switch or
change the toner bottle.
Wait for the machine to get ready.
“Please wait...”
appears.
If the machine has not been in use
for a long time, it may take longer
than normal to print or start up
when switched on.
Wait for the machine to get ready.
Although the copier
screen appears when
the machine is turned
on using the main
power switch, it cannot
be switched to another
screen by pressing the
{Facsimile} or {Scanner} key.
Functions other than the copier
function are not yet ready.
Wait a little longer.
The machine has just
been turned on and the
User Tools screen is
displayed, but the User
Tools menu has items
missing.
Functions other than the copier
function are not yet ready. Time
required varies by function.
Functions appear in the User
Tools menu when they become
ready for use.
Wait a little longer.
The display is difficult
to see.
Screen contrast is not adjusted.
Adjust the screen's contrast so
that you can see the display panel
properly. See “General Features”,
General Settings Guide.
The display is off.
The machine is in Energy Saver
mode.
Turn on the operation switch.
The display is off.
The operation switch is turned
off.
Turn on the operation switch.
Nothing happens
when the operation
switch is turned on.
The main power switch is turned
off.
Turn on the main power switch.
The operation switch
indicator continues
blinking and does not
turn off when pressed.
The machine is communicating
with external equipment.
Check if the machine is communicating with a computer.
When You Have Problems Operating the Machine
Problem
Original images are
printed on the reverse
side of the paper.
Cause
You may have loaded the paper
incorrectly.
Solution
Load paper correctly. Load paper
into Tray 1-2 with the print side
up, and into the bypass tray with
the print side down. See p.77
“Orientation-Fixed Paper or
Two-Sided Paper”.
1
Misfeeds occur frequently. Copy paper size setting is not correct. Set the proper paper size. See
“Tray Paper Settings”, General
Settings Guide and “Copy Paper”, About This Machine.
Misfeeds occur frequently. The tray's end fence may not be
set properly.
Check the end fence is set properly. See p.80 “Changing the Paper
Size”.
An error message remains, even if misfed
paper is removed.
Clear misfed paper, and then
open and close the cover. See p.91
“Removing Jammed Paper”.
When a misfeed message appears, it remains until you open
and close the cover as required.
Paper is still jammed in the tray.
Cannot print in duplex
mode.
You cannot use paper in the bypass tray for duplex printing.
For duplex printing, select Tray 12 in the copier mode or with the
printer driver.
Cannot print in duplex
mode.
You have selected a tray that is set
to [Off] for duplex printing in [Tray
Paper Settings] under [System Settings].
Select a paper tray in [Tray Paper
Settings] under [System Settings],
and then press [OK]. Then, select
[No Display (Plain Paper)] or [Recycled Paper] for Paper Type, press
[Duplex], and then select [On]. See
“Tray Paper Settings”, General
Settings Guide.
The user code entry
screen is displayed.
Users are restricted by user management.
Enter the user code (up to eight
digits), and then press the {OK} or
{q} key.
The Authentication
screen appears.
Basic Authentication, Windows
Authentication, LDAP Authentication or Integration Server Authentication is set.
Enter your login user name and
user password. See “When the
Authentication Screen is Displayed”, About This Machine.
“Temperature
The temperature inside the machine is too high or too low.
Locate the machine in an environment where the temperature remains between 10 and 32 °C. See
p.95 “Where to Put Your Machine”.
Alert. Turn
main power off,
adjust room
temp. and wait a
while before
restarting.” appears, and printing is
disabled.
“You do not have
privileges to
use this function.” appears.
The use of the function is restrict- Contact the administrator.
ed to authenticated users only.
7
When the Machine Does Not Operate As Wanted
Problem
1
Cause
Solution
Authentication failed.
The entered login user name or
password is not correct.
Ask the administrator for the correct login user name and password.
Authentication failed.
Cannot access the authentication Contact the administrator.
server when using Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server
Authentication.
Note
❒ If you cannot make copies as you want because of paper type, paper size, or
paper capacity problems, use recommended paper. See “Copy Paper”, About
This Machine.
8
When a Job Is Not Performed
When a Job Is Not Performed
If you cannot execute a function, it may be that the machine is being held up by
another function.
If you cannot execute a function, terminate any other functions currently active, and
then try executing the function again. In some cases, you can carry out another job (copier, facsimile, printer, or scanner) without canceling the current job being performed.
Performing multiple functions simultaneously like this is called “Multi-accessing”.
1
Copy
Using the control panel
×
×
Copying
×
×
Reception Transmission
Immediate
Transmission
Memory Reception
×
Scanning
Scanning
Using the control panel
Printing
Receive Data
Printing Received Data
Memory Reception
Immediate Transmission
Printer
Scanner
Print
×
×
×
*1
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
*1
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Printing Received
Data
*2
×
*2
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
*2
×
×
Receive Data
Print
Facsimile
Printer
TWAIN Scanner
×
Reception
*1
Transmission Operation
Scanning an Original for
Memory Transmission
Memory Transmission
Scanning an Original for
Memory Transmission
Memory Transmission
Transmission Operation
select
Facsimile
Transmission
Copying
Mode before you
Using the control panel
Mode after you select Copy
TWAIN
❖ Combination Chart
Printing
Using the control
panel
Scanning
Scanning
*1
×
×
*1
×
×
*1
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
…means that these functions can be used together.
…means that you can interrupt the current job with the function keys to proceed to a subsequent job.
…means that another job will automatically start after the current job is finished.
×…means that you must manually start another job after the current job is finished (i.e., these functions cannot be used together).
*1
*2
You can scan a document once the preceding job documents are all scanned.
During parallel reception, any subsequent job is suspended until reception is completed.
9
When the Machine Does Not Operate As Wanted
Note
❒ If the machine is capable of executing multiple functions simultaneously,
specify which function should have priority in “Print Priority”. This setting is
factory-preset to “Display mode”. For setting of Printing Priority Function,
see “General Features”, General Settings Guide.
1
❒ While printing is in progress, scanning a document using another function
may take more time.
10
2. Troubleshooting When
Using the Copy Function
This chapter describes likely causes of and possible solutions for copier function
problems.
When a Message Is Displayed
This section describes the machine's main messages. If other messages appear,
follow the instructions they contain.
Important
❒ For messages that are not listed here, see “When You Have Problems Operating the Machine”.
Message
Cause
Solution
Cannot dup. copy
this size.
Duplex mode does not support
the selected paper size.
Duplex mode supports the following paper sizes: A4L, B5
JISL, 81/2"×14"L, 81/4"×14"L,
81/2"×11"L, 81/2"×13"L,
81/4"×13"L, 16KL. Select one of
these sizes.
Cannot sort this
size.
The specified paper size is not
available with the Sort function.
This message appears when the
bypass tray is selected.
Use copy paper that is not longer
than 356 mm.
Size error in
Combine mode.
The specified paper size is not avail- This message appears when the
able with the Combine function.
bypass tray is selected.
Use copy paper that is not longer
than 356 mm.
Cannot select
Bypass Tray in
current setting.
The specified function is not
available with the bypass tray.
Select a paper tray other than the
bypass tray.
Original with
this length cannot be duplex
scanned.
The specified custom length is not
available for duplex printing
from the ARDF (eg. 2 Sided → 2
Sided, 2 Sided → 1 Sided, 2 Sided
→ Combine).
Do not place originals that are
longer than 356 mm.
Max. number of
sets is nn.
The number of copies exceeds the
maximum copy quantity.
You can change the maximum
copy quantity. See “Copier Features”, General Settings Guide.
Cannot copy.
Original is being scanned by
another function.
The scanner function is in use.
Cancel the current scan job. To do
this, press the {Clear/ Stop} key on
the scanner screen to display the
message “Clear/Stop key
was pressed. Stop scanning?”, and then press [Stop].
11
Troubleshooting When Using the Copy Function
Message
2
Cause
Solution
You do not have
privileges to
use this function.
The use of this function is restrict- Contact the administrator.
ed to authentified users only.
Authentication
failed.
The entered login user name or
password is not correct.
Authentication
failed.
Cannot access the authentication Contact the administrator.
server when using Windows Authentication , LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server
Authentication.
Ask the administrator for the correct login user name and password.
Reference
p.6 “When You Have Problems Operating the Machine”
12
When You Cannot Make Clear Copies
When You Cannot Make Clear Copies
This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for unclear copies.
Problem
Copies appear dirty.
Copies contain blots or
are patchy.
Cause
Image density is too dark.
Solution
Adjust the image density. See
“Adjusting Image Density”,
Copy Reference.
2
The machine is not on a level surface. Place the machine on a stable and
level surface.
Make sure the machine's environment meets requirements. See
p.95 “Where to Put Your Machine”.
Copies contain blots or
are patchy.
The paper is creased, curled, or
has blemishes.
Smooth out the wrinkles from the
paper, or replace it. See “Copy Paper”, About This Machine.
If paper comes out curled, adjust
the Output Tray. See “Originals”,
Copy Reference.
Copies contain blots or
are patchy.
Image density is too light.
Adjust the image density. See
“Adjusting Image Density”,
Copy Reference.
Copies contain blots or
are patchy.
The paper is damp.
Use paper that has been stored in
the recommended temperature and
humidity condition. See “Copy Paper”, About This Machine.
Copies are too dark or
too light.
The correct paper type settings
are not made.
Check the paper loaded on the
paper tray or bypass tray matches
the paper type set on the display
panel. See “Copy Paper”, About
This Machine.
Copies are too dark or
too light.
The image was not printed on a
suitable surface.
Before printing on special paper,
check its surface carefully. Printing on non-print surfaces reduces
print quality and can damage the
machine's internal components.
See “Copy Paper”, About This
Machine.
Copies are dirty.
Use of non-recommended toner
can result in loss of print quality
and other problems.
Use manufacturer-genuine toner.
Contact your service representative.
The reverse side of an
Image density is too dark.
original image is copied.
Adjust the image density. See
“Adjusting Image Density”,
Copy Reference.
13
Troubleshooting When Using the Copy Function
Problem
A shadow appears on
copies if you use pasted originals.
Cause
Image density is too dark.
Solution
Adjust the image density. See
“Adjusting Image Density”,
Copy Reference.
Change the orientation of the original.
Put mending tape on the pasted area.
2
The same copy area is
dirty whenever making copies.
The exposure glass or ARDF is
dirty.
Clean them. See p.99 “Maintaining Your Machine”.
Copies are too light.
Image density is too light.
Adjust the image density. See
“Adjusting Image Density”,
Copy Reference.
Copies are too light.
The paper is damp or rough.
Use the recommended paper. A
light copy may result when you
use damp or rough grain paper.
Copies are too light.
The toner bottle is almost empty.
Add toner. See p.87 “Adding
Toner”.
Parts of images are not
copied.
The original is not placed correctly. Place originals correctly. See “Placing Originals”, Copy Reference.
Parts of images are not
copied.
The correct paper size is not selected. Select the proper paper size.
White lines appear.
The exposure glass or scanning
glass is dirty.
Copies are blank.
The original is not placed correctly. When using the exposure glass,
place originals face down. When
using the ARDF, place them face
up. See “Placing Originals”, Copy
Reference.
Clean them. See p.99 “Maintaining Your Machine”.
A moiré pattern is pro- Your original has a dot pattern
duced on copies.
image or many lines.
Place the original on the exposure
glass at a slight angle.
Black spots appear on
the copy of a photographic print.
Place the print on the exposure glass
in either of the following ways:
Because of high humidity, the
photographic print has stuck to
the exposure glass.
• Place an OHP transparency on
the exposure glass, and then
place the print on top of the
OHP transparency.
• Place the print on the exposure glass, and then place two
or three sheets of white paper
on top of it. Leave the exposure glass cover or ARDF
open when copying.
14
When You Cannot Make Copies As Wanted
When You Cannot Make Copies As
Wanted
This section describes causes and remedies when copy results are not as expected.
❖ Basic
Problem
Cause
2
Solution
Misfeeds occur frequently. The number of sheets loaded ex- Load paper only as high as the
ceeds the capacity of the machine. upper limit markings on the side
fences of the paper tray or bypass
tray. See “Copy Paper”, About
This Machine.
Misfeeds occur frequently. The paper is damp.
Use paper that has been stored in
the recommended temperature and
humidity condition. See “Copy Paper”, About This Machine.
Misfeeds occur frequently. The paper is too thick or too thin. Use recommended paper. See
“Copy Paper”, About This Machine.
Misfeeds occur frequently. The copy paper is wrinkled or has
been folded/creased.
Use recommended paper. Use paper that has been stored in the
recommended temperature and
humidity condition. See “Copy
Paper”, About This Machine.
Misfeeds occur frequently. Printed paper is used.
Use recommended paper. Do not reuse copy paper that has been already
copied or printed onto. See “Copy
Paper”, About This Machine.
Copy paper becomes
creased.
The paper is damp.
Use paper that has been stored in
the recommended temperature and
humidity condition. See “Copy Paper”, About This Machine.
Copy paper becomes
creased.
The paper is too thin.
Use recommended paper. See “Copy
Paper”, About This Machine.
You cannot combine
several functions.
Selected functions cannot be used
together.
Check the combination of functions and make the settings again.
See “Combination Chart”, Copy
Reference.
Print is slanted.
The paper is feeding in at a slant.
Load the paper correctly. See p.75
“Loading Paper”.
Print is slanted.
The machine's cover is open.
Make sure the right and lower
right covers are properly closed.
15
Troubleshooting When Using the Copy Function
❖ Edit
Problem
2
Cause
Solution
When using the Duplex You set a wide erased margin.
Margin function, parts
of the original image
are not copied.
Set a narrower margin with User
Tools. You can set the width between 0 - 50 mm (0" - 2").
When using the Duplex There is a lack of margin space on
Margin function, parts the opposite side of the binding
of the original image
position.
are not copied.
Set a narrower margin with User
Tools. You can set the width between 0 - 50 mm (0" - 2").
See “Copier Features”, General
Settings Guide.
See “Copier Features”, General
Settings Guide.
❖ Combine
Problem
When using Combine,
parts of the image are
not copied.
Cause
Solution
You specified a reproduction ra- When you specify a reproduction
tio that does not match the sizes ratio using the Manual Paper Seof your originals and copy paper. lect function, make sure that the
ratio matches your originals and
the copy paper.
(Select the correct reproduction
ratio before using the Combine
function.)
When using Combine,
parts of the image are
not copied.
Your originals are not identical in
size and direction.
Copies are not in correct order.
You placed the originals in the in- When placing a stack of originals
correct order.
in the ARDF, the last page should
be on the bottom.
Use originals that are identical in
size and direction.
If you place an original on the exposure glass, start with the first
page to be copied.
16
When You Cannot Make Copies As Wanted
❖ Duplex
Problem
Cause
Solution
Cannot print in duplex
mode.
You may have loaded paper on
the bypass tray.
Remove paper loaded on the bypass tray. Load paper in Tray 1 - 2.
Cannot print in duplex
mode.
You have loaded paper exceeding
90 g/m2.
Change the paper.
Cannot print in duplex
mode.
You have selected a tray that is set
to [Off] for duplex printing in
[Tray Paper Settings] under [System
Settings].
Select a paper tray in [Tray Paper
Settings] under [System Settings],
and then press [OK]. Then, select
[No Display (Plain Paper)] or [Recycled Paper] for Paper Type, press
[Duplex], and then select [On]. See
“Tray Paper Settings”, General
Settings Guide.
Order of copies is not
correct.
You placed the originals in the in- When placing a stack of originals
correct order.
in the ARDF, the last page should
be on the bottom.
2
If you place an original on the exposure glass, start with the first
page to be copied.
When using Duplex,
copy is made Top to
Bottom even though
[Top to Top] is selected.
You placed the originals in the
wrong orientation.
Place the original in the correct
orientation. See “Original Orientation”, Copy Reference.
Parts of the original im- The margin is too wide.
age are not copied.
Set a narrower margin with User
Tools. See “User Tools Menu (Copier Features)”, Copy Reference.
Parts of the original im- There is a lack of margin space on
age are not copied.
the opposite side of the binding
position.
Set a narrower margin with User
Tools. See “User Tools Menu (Copier Features)”, Copy Reference.
When Memory Is Full
This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for problems related to full memory.
Message
Press [Resume]
to scan and copy
remaining originals.
Cause
Solution
The machine checks if the remain- To continue copying, remove all
ing originals should be copied, af- copies, and then press [Resume].
ter the scanned original has been To stop copying, press [Stop].
printed.
17
Troubleshooting When Using the Copy Function
2
18
3. Troubleshooting When
Using the Facsimile Function
This chapter describes likely causes of and possible solutions for facsimile function problems.
Adjusting the Volume
The following describes how to adjust the volume.
You can change the volume of the following sounds that the machine makes.
❖ On Hook Mode
Heard when the {On Hook Dial} key is pressed.
❖ At Transmission
Heard when immediate transmission is performed.
❖ At Reception
Heard when the machine receives a document.
❖ At Dialing
Heard after pressing the {Start} key, until the line connects to the destination.
❖ At Printing
Heard when a received document is printed.
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
ASO032S
B Select [Fax Features] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
19
Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function
C Select [General Settings/Adjust] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [Adjust Sound Volume] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
3
E Select the item you want to adjust using {U} or {T}, and then press the
{OK} key.
F Select the volume using {W} or {V}, and then press the {OK} key.
Press the {Escape} key to cancel the setting and the display returns to that of
step E.
G Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
ASO032S
The standby display appears.
20
Adjusting the Volume
Note
❒ You can also adjust the On Hook volume when you press the {On Hook Dial} key. See “On Hook Dial”, Facsimile Reference.
❒ If the extended security function prevents you from changing this setting,
contact the administrator.
❒ You can set the volume level to between 0 and 7.
3
21
Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function
When a Message Is Displayed
This section describes the machine's main messages. If other messages appear,
follow their instructions.
Message
Cause
Error occurred,
and trans. was
cancelled.
A document jam occurred during
Immediate Transmission. There
may be a problem with the machine or the telephone line (for example, noise or cross talk).
Press [Exit], and then resend the
pages that have not been sent.
Put original
back, check it
and press Start
key.
Original jammed during Memory
Transmission.
Place originals that have not been
scanned on the exposure glass or
ARDF again.
3
LFunc. Problems There is a problem with the fax.
Data will be
initialized.
Solution
If the error reoccurs frequently,
contact your service representative.
Record the code number shown
in the display and contact your
service representative.
Other functions can be used.
Memory is full.
Scanning will be
stopped and only
scanned page(s)
will be stored.
The memory is full.
If you press [Exit], the machine returns to standby mode and starts
transmitting the pages that have
been stored.
Cannot send fax
as scanner is in
use by another
function.
The machine is scanning an origi- Before sending the fax, cancel the
nal under another function.
current scan job under the other
function. To do this, press the
{Clear/Stop} key on the control
panel to display the message
“Clear/Stop key was
pressed. Stop scanning?”, and then press [Stop].
22
Updating destination list. Reselect
destination(s)
or sender's name
later.
The destination list is being updated from the network using
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
or Web Image Monitor.
Wait until the message disappears. Do not switch off the power while this message is
displayed. Depending on the
number of destinations to be updated, there may be some delay
before you can resume operation.
Operations are not possible while
this message is displayed.
You do not have
privileges to
use this function.
Use of this function is restricted.
Contact the administrator.
Authentication
failed.
Wrong login user name or password. Confirm correct login user name
or password.
When a Message Is Displayed
Message
Cause
Solution
Authentication
failed.
Authentication is not possible
from this machine.
Contact the administrator.
Connection with
LDAP server has
failed. Check
the server status.
A network error has occurred and
connection has failed.
Try the operation once more. If
the message is still shown, the
network may be crowded. Check
the information of [System Settings]. See “Administrator Tools”,
General Settings Guide.
LDAP server auth. has failed.
Check the settings.
The entered user name or password does not match that specified for LDAP server
authentication.
Make settings correctly for the
user name and the password for
LDAP server authentication.
Exceeded max.
number of search
results which
can be displayed. Max.:
nnn
The number of search results has
exceeded the maximum number
of items that can be displayed.
Search again after changing the
search conditions.
LDAP server
search timed
out. Check the
server status.
A network error has occurred and
connection has failed.
Try the operation once more. If
the message is still shown, the
network may be crowded. Check
the information of [System Settings]. See “Administrator Tools”,
General Settings Guide.
Specified group
contains some
invalid dest. Do
you want to select only valid
dest.?
The specified group contains
some destinations for sending by
e-mail and some destinations for
sending by Scan to Folder.
To select destinations for sending
by e-mail, press [Select] for the
message displayed on the e-mail
screen. To select destination for
sending by Scan to Folder, press
[Select] for the message displayed
on the Scan to Folder screen.
Sender's name is
not selected.
Specify sender's name.
The sender has not been specified. A sender's name should be specified before sending e-mail. Send
e-mail after specifying the sender's name.
Check whether
there are any
network problems.
{13-10}
The alias telephone number you • Check the alias telephone
entered is already registered on
number is correctly prothe gatekeeper by another device.
grammed using the Web Image Monitor. See the Web
Image Monitor's Help.
3
(A figure is placed at
n.)
• Contact your network administrator.
23
Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function
Message
3
Cause
Solution
Check whether
there are any
network problems.
{13-11}
Cannot access gatekeeper.
• Use your Web Image Monitor
to check the gatekeeper address is correctly programmed. See the Web Image
Monitor's Help.
Check whether
there are any
network problems.
{13-17}
Registering of user name is reject- • Use your Web Image Monitor
ed by the SIP server.
to check the SIP server address and user name are correctly programmed. See the
Web Image Monitor's Help.
Check whether
there are any
network problems.
{13-18}
Cannot access the SIP server.
Check whether
there are any
network problems.
{14-01}
Cannot find the DNS server, SMTP
server or folder for forwarding.
• Contact your network administrator.
• Contact your network administrator.
• Use your Web Image Monitor
to check the SIP server address is correctly programmed. See the Web Image
Monitor's Help.
• Contact your network administrator.
• Check that the DNS server
IPv4 address is correctly programmed using Web Image
Monitor. See the Web Image
Monitor's Help.
• Check that the host name or
IPv4 address of the SMTP
server is correctly programmed using Web Image
Monitor. See the Web Image
Monitor's Help.
• Check that the SMTP server is
correctly programmed using
Web Image Monitor. See the
Web Image Monitor's Help.
• Check that the folder for
transfer is correctly specified.
• Check that the computer in
which the folder for transfer is
specified is operating correctly.
• Check that the LAN cable is correctly connected to the machine.
• Check the network connection
and radio wave status.
• Contact your network administrator.
24
When a Message Is Displayed
Message
Check whether
there are any
network problems.
{14-09}
Cause
Solution
E-mail transmission was refused • Check that the user name and
by SMTP authentication, POP bepassword for SMTP authentifore SMTP authentication or login
cation or POP before SMTP
authentication of the computer in
authentication are correctly
which the folder for forwarding is
programmed from [File Transspecified.
fer] under [System Settings].
See “File Transfer”, General
Settings Guide. You can also
use the Web Image Monitor
for confirmation. See the Web
Image Monitor's Help.
3
• Check that the user name and
password of the E-mail Account are correctly programmed from [File Transfer]
under [System Settings]. See
“File Transfer”, General Settings Guide. You can also use
the Web Image Monitor for
confirmation. See the Web Image Monitor's Help.
• Check that the user ID and
password for the computer in
which the folder for forwarding is specified are correctly
programmed.
• Check that the folder for forwarding is correctly specified.
• Check that the computer in
which the folder for forwarding
is specified is correctly operated.
• Contact your network administrator.
Check whether
there are any
network problems.
{14-33}
No machine e-mail address is
programmed.
• Check that the machine's email address is correctly programmed from [File Transfer]
under [System Settings]. See
“File Transfer”, General Settings Guide. You can also use
the Web Image Monitor for
confirmation. See the Web Image Monitor's Help.
• Contact your network administrator.
25
Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function
Message
Check whether
there are any
network problems.
{15-01}
Cause
Solution
No POP3/IMAP4 server address
is programmed.
• Check that the host name or
IPv4 address of the
POP3/IMAP4 server is correctly programmed using the
Web Image Monitor. See the
Web Image Monitor's Help.
• Contact your network administrator.
Check whether
there are any
network problems.
{15-02}
3
Cannot log on to the
POP3/IMAP4 server.
• Check that the user name and
password of the E-mail Account are correctly programmed using [File Transfer]
under [System Settings]. See
“File Transfer”, General Settings Guide. You can also use
the Web Image Monitor for
confirmation. See the Web Image Monitor's Help.
• Contact your network administrator.
Check whether
there are any
network problems.
{15-03}
No machine e-mail address is
programmed.
• Check that the machine's email address is correctly programmed using [File Transfer]
under [System Settings]. See
“File Transfer”, General Settings Guide. You can also use
the Web Image Monitor for
confirmation. See the Web Image Monitor's Help.
• Contact your network administrator.
Check whether
there are any
network problems.
{15-11}
Cannot find the DNS server or
POP3/IMAP4 server.
• Check that the DNS server
IPv4 address is correctly programmed using Web Image
Monitor. See the Web Image
Monitor's Help.
• Check that the POP3/IMAP4
server is correctly programmed using Web Image
Monitor. See the Web Image
Monitor's Help.
• Check the network connection
and radio wave status.
• Check that the LAN cable is correctly connected to the machine.
• Contact your network administrator.
26
When a Message Is Displayed
Message
Check whether
there are any
network problems.
{15-12}
Cause
Cannot log on to the
POP3/IMAP4 server.
Solution
• Check that the user name and
password of the E-mail Account are correctly programmed from [File Transfer]
under [System Settings]. See
“File Transfer”, General Settings Guide. You can also use
the Web Image Monitor for
confirmation. See the Web Image Monitor's Help.
• Check that the user name and
password for POP before
SMTP authentication are correctly programmed from [File
Transfer] under [System Settings]. See “File Transfer”,
General Settings Guide. You
can also use the Web Image
Monitor for confirmation. See
the Web Image Monitor's
Help.
3
• Contact your network administrator.
Note
❒ If “Check whether there are any network problems.” appears, the machine is not correctly connected to the network or the settings of the machine
are not correct. If you do not need to connect the machine to the network, you
can specify the setting so this message is not displayed, and then the {Facsimile} key no longer lights. See “Parameter Setting”, General Settings Guide. If
you reconnect the machine to the network, be sure to set “Display” with User
Parameters. Otherwise, you cannot check the status of the network connection.
❒ If the paper tray runs out of paper, “Out of paper. Load it, then press
[Exit].” appears on the display, add more paper. If there is paper left in the
other trays, you can receive documents as usual, even if the message appears
on the display. You can turn this function on or off with “Parameter Setting”.
See “Parameter Setting”, General Settings Guide.
27
Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function
When You Cannot Send or Receive Fax
Messages As Wanted
This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for transmission
and reception-related problems.
❖ Transmission/Reception
Problem
Cause
Both transmission and
The modular cable may be disreception are impossible. connected.
3
Solution
Make sure that the modular cable
is correctly connected. See “Connecting the Machine to a Telephone Line and Telephone”,
General Settings Guide.
Both transmission and
The terminal adaptor setting is in- Check the setting.
reception are impossible. correct.
❖ Transmission
Problem
28
Cause
Solution
Document appears
blank at the other end.
The original was placed upside
down.
Place it correctly. See “Placing
Originals”, Facsimile Reference.
Transmission failed
due to a “maximum email size” error.
The size of the Internet fax document exceeds the maximum email size specified on the machine.
Set [Maximum E-mail Size] under [Email Settings] to [Off], or set the
maximum e-mail size to a larger
value. Then, re-send the document. See “E-mail Settings”, General Settings Guide.
LAN-Fax Driver does
not work.
The entered login user name,
password, or driver encryption
key is incorrect.
Check your login user name,
password, or driver encryption
key, and enter them correctly.
Contact the administrator.
LAN-Fax Driver does
not work.
A high security level is set by the
extended security function.
Contact the administrator.
Cannot cancel a Memo- The document is being scanned.
ry Transmission.
Press the {Clear/Stop} key. See
“Canceling a Transmission”, Facsimile Reference.
Cannot cancel a Memo- The document is being sent or it is
ry Transmission.
in standby.
Press the {Clear/Stop} key. See
“Canceling a Transmission”, Facsimile Reference.
Cannot cancel an Immediate Transmission.
Press the {Clear/Stop} key. See
“Canceling a Transmission”, Facsimile Reference.
-
When You Cannot Send or Receive Fax Messages As Wanted
Problem
Cannot cancel Internet
Fax transmission.
Cause
Solution
Press the {Clear/Stop} key. See
“Canceling a Transmission”, Facsimile Reference.
-
Canceling Internet Fax transmission is possible only during scanning. It is impossible during
communication.
Although a group specification was set for the
following, reception
was not possible.
The number of specified destinations exceeds the maximum
number that can be specified as a
group.
A maximum of 100 parties can be
specified for a group. Check if
there are over the specified numbers registered in the address
book. If a group was registered in
another group, transmission is
canceled but an error message
does not appear. See “Registering
Names to a Group”, General Settings Guide.
Cause
Solution
Forwarding, Forwarding of Special Sender,
Email TX Result, routing email received via
SMTP.
3
❖ Reception
Problem
The machine failed to print If this happened when the Re• Load paper into the paper
received fax documents.
ceive File indicator was lit, the patray.
per or toner might have run out, • Add toner.
making printing impossible.
See “Substitute Reception”, Facsimile Reference.
The machine failed to print
received fax documents.
When the B Load Paper indicator is lit.
Load paper into the paper tray.
See p.75 “Loading Paper”.
Reception is impossible, but transmission is
possible.
The toner has run out.
Replace the toner bottle. See p.88
“Replacing Toner”.
Reception is possible, but The terminal adaptor setting is in- Check the setting.
transmission is impossible. correct.
Transmission is possible,
The terminal adaptor setting is in- Check the setting.
but reception is impossible. correct.
29
Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function
❖ Printing
Problem
Cause
Solution
Print is slanted.
The paper is fed in at a slant.
Load the paper correctly. See p.75
“Loading Paper”.
Print is slanted.
The machine's cover is open.
Make sure the right and lower
right covers are properly closed.
Misfeeds occur frequently. The number of sheets loaded ex- Load paper only as high as the
ceeds the capacity of the machine. upper limit markings on the side
fences of the paper tray or bypass
tray. See “Copy Paper”, About
This Machine.
3
Misfeeds occur frequently. The paper is damp.
Use paper that has been stored in
the recommended temperature and
humidity condition. See “Copy Paper”, About This Machine.
Misfeeds occur frequently. The paper is too thick or too thin. Use recommended paper. See
“Copy Paper”, About This Machine.
Misfeeds occur frequently. The copy paper is wrinkled or has
been folded/creased.
Use recommended paper. Use paper that has been stored in the
recommended temperature and
humidity condition. See “Copy
Paper”, About This Machine.
Copy paper becomes
creased.
Printed paper is used.
Use recommended paper. Do not
reuse copy paper that has been already printed onto. See “Copy
Paper”, About This Machine.
Copy paper becomes
creased.
The paper is damp.
Use paper that has been stored in
the recommended temperature and
humidity condition. See “Copy Paper”, About This Machine.
Copy paper becomes
creased.
The paper is too thin.
Use recommended paper. See
“Copy Paper”, About This Machine.
Printed images contain
blots or are patchy.
The machine is not on a level surface. The machine must be placed on a
stable and level surface.
Check the environment of location to select an appropriate location. See p.95 “Where to Put Your
Machine”.
30
Printed images contain
blots or are patchy.
The paper is creased, curled, or
has blemishes.
Straighten the paper if curled. Replace it if wrinkled or damaged.
See “Copy Paper”, About This
Machine.
The image is too dark
or too light.
The correct paper type settings
are not made.
Check the paper loaded on the
paper tray or bypass tray matches
the paper type set on the display
panel. See “Copy Paper”, About
This Machine.
When You Cannot Send or Receive Fax Messages As Wanted
Problem
The image is too dark
or too light.
Cause
Using toner bottles not recommended by the supplier or refilling the toner bottle may degrade
the print quality or cause a malfunction.
Solution
Use only toner bottles recommended by the supplier.
Background of received Image density is too dark.
images appears dirty.
Images from the back of
the page appear.
Adjust scan density. See “Image
Density (Contrast)”, Facsimile
Reference.
Printed or sent images
are spotty.
The exposure glass or ARDF is
dirty.
Clean them. See p.99 “Maintaining Your Machine”.
Received image is too
light.
When using moist, rough, or
processed paper, areas of print
may not be fully reproduced.
Only use recommended paper.
See “Copy Paper”, About This
Machine.
Received image is too
light.
The paper is damp.
Use paper that has been stored in
the recommended temperature and
humidity condition. See “Copy Paper”, About This Machine.
Received image is too
light.
• The image density has been
set too low.
• Increase the scanning density.
See “Image Density (Contrast)”, Facsimile Reference.
• The original of the transmitted
fax was printed on paper that
is too thin.
3
• Ask the sender to reprint the
original on thicker paper and
fax it again.
Received image is too
light.
When the D Add Toner indicator Replace the toner bottle soon. See
is lit, toner is beginning to run out. p.88 “Replacing Toner”.
Other fax machine's
name is not correctly
printed or displayed.
When a destination is programmed in the Address Book
using SmartDeviceMonitor for
Admin or Web Image Monitor, in
some languages, the programmed destination may not be
printed or displayed correctly.
Use ASCII characters (for example: a-z, 0- 9).
31
Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function
❖ Others
Problem
Cause
Solution
All fax documents
stored in memory have
been lost. Those documents include ones
stored through Memory
Transmission/Reception, Memory Lock, and
Substitute Reception.
All fax documents are lost from
memory if the machine remains
unpowered for approximately 12
hours or longer.
If any documents have been lost
for this reason, a Power Failure
Report is automatically printed
when the machine is turned on. If
fax documents stored for Memory Transmission have been lost,
check the destinations and resend
the documents. If fax documents
received through Memory, Memory Lock or Substitute Reception
have been lost, ask the senders to
resend the documents. See p.34
“Turning Off the Main Power /
In the Event of Power Failure”.
The following functions are not available:
Forwarding, routing
email received via
SMTP.
This function is made unavailable Contact the administrator.
by the enhanced security function.
3
When Memory Is Full
This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for problems related to full memory.
Message
Memory is full.
Scanning will be
stopped and only
scanned page(s)
will be stored.
32
Cause
The memory is full.
Solution
If you press [Exit], the machine returns to standby mode and starts
transmitting the stored pages.
When an Error Report Is Printed
When an Error Report Is Printed
An Error Report is printed if a document cannot be successfully sent or received.
Possible causes include a problem with the machine or noise on the telephone
line. If an error occurs during transmission, resend the original.
If an error occurs during reception, ask the sender to resend the document.
Note
❒ If an error happens frequently, contact your service representative.
❒ The “Page” column gives the total number of pages. The “Page not sent” or
“Page not received” column gives the number of pages not sent or received
successfully.
❒ You can display a destination with the User Parameters. See “Parameter Setting”, General Settings Guide.
❒ You can display a sender name with the User Parameters. See “Parameter Setting”, General Settings Guide.
3
33
Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function
Turning Off the Main Power / In the Event of
Power Failure
This section describes the machine status when the power is turned off or if the
power fails.
R CAUTION:
• When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the
plug (not the cable).
3
Important
❒ Do not turn off the main power switch while the power indicator is lit or
blinking. If you do, the memory may be damaged and failure could result.
❒ Turn off the main power switch before pulling out the plug. If you pull out
the plug with the switch on, the memory may be damaged and failure could
result.
❒ Make sure that 100% is shown on the display before you unplug the machine.
If a lower value is shown, some data is currently present in memory.
❒ Right after a power failure, the internal battery needs to be sufficiently recharged to guard against future data loss. Keep the machine plugged in and
the main power switch on for about 5 days after the power loss.
Even if the main power switch is turned off, the contents of the machine memory
(for example, programmed numbers) will not be lost. However, if power is lost
for about 12 hours because the main power switch is turned off, there is a power
cut, or the power cord is removed, contents of the Fax memory are lost. Lost
items will include any fax documents stored in memory using Memory Transmission/Reception, Memory Lock, or Substitute Reception.
If a file was deleted from memory, a Power Failure Report is automatically printed as soon as the power is restored.
This report can be used to identify lost files. If a document stored for Memory
Transmission was lost, resend it. If a document received by Memory Reception
or Substitute Reception was lost, ask the sender to resend it.
❖ RDS (Remote Diagnostic System)
If the machine has a problem, a service representative can perform various
settings over the telephone line from the service station. If you want to use
this function, change the User Parameter. See “Parameter Setting”, General
Settings Guide.
34
When an Error Occurs Using Internet Fax
When an Error Occurs Using Internet Fax
This section describes reports that the machine sends if an Internet Fax error occurs.
Error Mail Notification
The machine sends the Error Mail Notification to the sender when it is unable to
successfully receive a particular e-mail message. A “cc” of this notification is also
sent to the administrator's e-mail address when one is specified.
3
Note
❒ You can select to send Error Mail Notification with User Parameters. See “Parameter Setting”, General Settings Guide.
❒ If Error Mail Notification cannot be sent, the Error Report (E-Mail) is printed
by the machine.
❒ If an error occurs when e-mail is received via SMTP, the SMTP server sends
error e-mail to the originator of the document.
Error Report (E-Mail)
The Error Report (E-Mail) is printed by the machine when it is unable to send an
Error Mail Notification.
Server-Generated Error E-mail
The transmitting server sends this error e-mail to the originator of e-mail that
cannot be transmitted successfully (due to reasons such as specifying an incorrect e-mail address).
Note
❒ After server-generated error e-mail is printed, the first page of the sent document is printed.
35
Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function
3
36
4. Troubleshooting When
Using the Printer Function
This chapter describes likely causes of and possible solutions for printer function
problems. When using the DDST Unit, see “Troubleshooting When Using the
DDST Unit”.
When a Message Is Displayed during
Installation of the Printer Driver
This section describes what to do if a message appears when installing the printer driver.
The message number 58 or 34 indicates that the printer driver cannot be installed
using Auto Run. Install the printer driver using [Add Printer] or [Install Printer].
Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000 or Windows NT 4.0
This section describes the procedure under Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000
or Windows NT 4.0.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Double-click the Add Printer icon.
C Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.
If the printer driver is on a CD-ROM, the location of the RPCS printer driver
is either\DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN9X_ME, or \DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP.
If the installer starts, click [Cancel] to quit.
Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003
This section describes the procedure under Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003.
A On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
B Click [Add a printer].
C Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.
If the printer driver is on a CD-ROM, the location of the RPCS printer driver
is \DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP. If the installer starts, click [Cancel] to quit.
37
Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function
Windows XP Home Edition
This section describes the procedure under Windows XP Home Edition.
A On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
B Click [Add a Printer].
C Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.
If the printer driver is on a CD-ROM, the location of the RPCS printer driver
is \DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP. If the installer starts, click [Cancel] to quit.
4
38
When a Message Is Displayed
When a Message Is Displayed
This section describes the principal messages that appear on the display panel.
If a message not described here appears, act according to the message.
Reference
Before turning the main power off, see “Turning On the Power”, About This
Machine.
Status Messages
This section describes the machine status messages.
Message
4
Status
Ready
This is the default ready message. The machine is ready
for use. No action is required.
Printing...
The machine is printing. Wait a while.
Waiting...
The machine is waiting for the next data to print. Wait a
while.
Offline
The machine is offline. To start printing, switch the machine online by pressing the {Online} Key.
Please wait...
This message may appear for a few seconds. It means the
machine is initializing or executing maintenance operations. Wait a while.
Resetting Job...
The machine is resetting the print job. Wait until
“Ready” appears on the display panel.
Setting change...
The machine settings are being changed. Wait a while.
Hex Dump Mode
In Hex Dump mode, the machine prints received data in
hexadecimal format. Turn off the machine after printing,
and then turn back on. Hex Dump mode is used for advanced troubleshooting.
39
Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function
Alert Messages
This section describes the machine alert messages.
Message
4
Cause
Solution
Problem:Wireless card
An error may have occurred in
the IEEE 802.11b card.
Turn off the main power switch,
and back on again. If the message
appears again, contact your sales
or service representative.
Problem:Wireless board
An error may have occurred in
the IEEE 802.11b board.
Turn off the main power switch,
and back on again. If the message
appears again, contact your sales
or service representative.
Paper Tray is in
use.
The specified paper tray is in use
by another function, such as the
copier function.
Wait until the other function has
finished using the specified paper
tray.
Tray # Error
An error has occurred with the
paper tray.
Press [JobReset] to change the paper tray settings, or press [FormFeed] to select another paper tray
and print using that.
# indicates the tray number.
USB Error
An error has occurred in the USB
interface.
Turn off the main power switch,
and back on again. If the message
appears again, contact your sales
or service representative.
Duplex mode is
in off position
for Tray #
The selected paper tray has not been Press [JobReset] to change the paconfigured for duplex printing.
per tray settings or do single-sided printing.
# indicates the tray number.
For details about the tray settings,
see “Tray Paper Settings”, General Settings Guide.
Ethernet Board
Error
An error has occurred in the
Ethernet board.
Turn off the main power switch,
and back on again. If the message
appears again, contact your sales
or service representative.
NV-RAM Error
An error has occurred in the machine. Turn off the main power switch,
and back on again. If the message
appears again, call your sales or
service representative.
Authentication
failed.
• The login user name or password entered is incorrect.
• Check your login user name
and password.
• The machine currently cannot
perform authentication.
• Contact the administrator.
Parallel I/F Er- An error has occurred in the par- Contact your service representative.
allel interface board.
ror
Printer Font Er- An error has occurred in the font Turn off the main power switch,
settings.
and back on again. If the message
ror.
appears again, contact your sales
or service representative.
40
When a Message Is Displayed
Message
Memory Overflow
Cause
Maximum capacity of PCL or
PostScript3 list display has been
exceeded.
Solution
Reduce the value of [Resolution] in
the printer driver, or select [Font
Priority] from [Memory Usage] in
[System] (see “Printer Features”,
General Settings Guide). If this
message continues to appear after
taking these steps, decrease the
number of files sent to the machine.
4
41
Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function
Printing the Error Log
If files could not be printed due to printing errors, print the error log to identify
the problem.
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
4
ASO032S
B Select [Printer Features] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [List/Test Print] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [Error Log] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
An error log is printed.
Note
❒ The most recent 30 errors are stored in the error log. If a new error is added
when there are 30 errors already stored, the earliest error is deleted. You
can check any of these print jobs for error log information.
❒ If the main power switch is turned off, the log is deleted.
42
When You Cannot Print
When You Cannot Print
Use the following procedures if printing does not start even after performing
[Print].
Problem
Cause
Solution
Printing does not start.
The power is off.
Check the cable is securely
plugged into the power outlet
and the machine. Turn on the
main power switch.
Printing does not start.
The machine is set to “Offline”.
Press the {Online} key.
Printing does not start.
The cause is displayed on the dis- Check the error message or warnplay panel.
ing status on the display panel
and take the required action. See
p.39 “When a Message Is Displayed”.
Printing does not start.
The interface cable was connected Connect the interface cable before
after the machine was turned on. turning on the machine.
Printing does not start.
The interface cable is not connect- Connect the interface cable seed correctly.
curely. If it has a fastener, fasten
that securely as well. See “Connecting to the Interfaces”, General Settings Guide.
Printing does not start.
The appropriate interface cable is
not used.
The type of interface cable you
should use depends on the computer. Be sure to use the correct
one. If the cable is damaged or
worn, replace it. See “Connecting
to the Interfaces”, General Settings Guide.
Printing does not start.
If an extended wireless LAN is
used, failure to print might result
from a weak wireless signal.
To check signal status, press the
{User Tools/Counter} key, and then
select [System Settings] using {U}
or {T}. On [Interface Settings], select [IEEE 802.11b], and then press
[Wireless LAN Signal] using {U} or
{T}. If signal quality is poor,
move the machine to a location
where radio waves can pass or remove objects that might cause interference. (You can check signal
status only when using wireless
LAN in infrastructure mode.)
Printing does not start.
If the machine is operating in an
extended wireless LAN, the SSID
settings are incorrect.
Check using the machine's display panel that the SSID is correctly set. See “Network
Settings”, General Settings
Guide.
4
43
Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function
4
Problem
Cause
Solution
Printing does not start.
If the machine is operating in an
extended wireless LAN, the receiver's MAC address may be
preventing communication with
the access point.
Check access point settings when
in infrastructure mode. Depending
on the access point, client access
may be limited by MAC address.
Printing does not start.
The extended wireless LAN has
not started.
Confirm the orange LED is lit,
and the green LED is lit or blinks
during transmission.
Printing does not start.
Advanced encryption has been set
Check the settings of the Extended Seusing the Extended Security function. curity function with the administrator.
Printing does not start.
The login user name, password, or
driver encryption key is invalid.
Also, check there are no problems in
transmission between access point
and wired clients, and between access point and wireless clients.
Check the login user name, password,
or driver encryption key is correct.
The Data In indicator
If the Data In indicator is unlit or • When the machine is connectdoes not blink or light up. not flashing even after performed to a computer via a cable,
ing [Print], the machine has not recheck the computer print port
ceived the data.
settings are correct. For how
to check the print port, see
“Confirming the Connection
Method”, Printer Reference.
• When it is networked with a computer, contact the administrator.
44
The status indicator of
the machine is red.
The cause is displayed on the dis- Check the error message on the
play of the control panel.
display panel and take required
action. See p.39 “When a Message
Is Displayed”.
Updating the destination list. Reselect destination(s) or sender's
name later.
The destination list is being updated from the network using
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
or Web Image Monitor.
Wait until the message disappears. Do not switch off the power while this message is
displayed. Depending on the
number of destinations to be updated, there may be some delay
before you can resume operation.
Operations are not possible while
this message is displayed.
[List/Test Print] is disabled.
A mechanical error might have
occurred.
Contact your service representative. See “List/Test Print”, General Settings Guide.
Printing does not start
when using extended
wireless LAN in Adhoc mode.
Correct communication mode is
not set.
Turn the main power off and back
on. See “Turning On the Power”,
About This Machine.
Or, change the settings in [Network] under [Interface Settings] of
[System Settings]. See “Network
Settings”, General Settings Guide.
If the printing does not start, contact your service representative.
When You Cannot Print
❖ When the machine is connected to the computer using the interface cable
The following shows how to check the print port when the Data In indicator
does not light up or blink.
Check if the print port setting is correct. When it is connected using a parallel
interface, connect it to LPT1 or LPT2.
For Windows 95/98/Me
A Click the [Start] button, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Click the icon of the machine. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C Click the [Details] tab.
D In the [Print to the following port:] list, confirm the correct port is selected.
For Windows 2000 or Windows NT 4.0
A Click the [Start] button, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Click the icon of the machine. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C Click the [Ports] tab.
D In the [Print to the following port(s)] list, confirm the correct port is selected.
For Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003
A Click the [Start] button, and then click [Printers and Faxes].
B Click the icon of the machine. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C Click the [Ports] tab.
D In the [Print to the following port(s)] list, confirm the correct port is selected.
For Windows XP Home Edition
A Click the [Start] button, and then click [Control Panel].
B Click [Printers and Other Hardware].
C Click [Printers and Faxes].
D Click the icon of the machine. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
E Click the [Ports] tab.
F In the [Print to the following port(s)] list, confirm the correct port is selected.
4
45
Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function
Other Printing Problems
This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for problems that
can occur when printing from a computer.
Problem
4
46
Cause
Solution
The print on the
entire page is
faded.
The paper is
damp.
Use paper that has been stored in the recommended temperature and humidity condition. See “Copy Paper”,
About This Machine.
The print on the
entire page is
faded.
The paper is un- Use recommended paper. (Printing on coarse or treated
suitable.
paper might result in faint print image.) See “Copy Paper”, About This Machine.
The print on the
entire page is
faded.
On the printer
driver, under
[Print Quality],
[Level Color] is
checked.
See the printer driver Help.
Printed images
contain blots or
are patchy.
Settings for
thick paper
have not been
made when
printing on
thick paper.
• PCL 6/5e and PostScript3
Select [Thick] in the [Type:] list on the [Paper] tab.
Printed images
contain blots or
are patchy.
Printing on
Use supplier-recommended paper. See “Copy Paper”,
coarse paper or
About This Machine.
treated paper
can result in faint
print image.
Printed images
contain blots or
are patchy.
The paper is
damp.
Use paper that has been stored in the recommended temperature and humidity condition. See “Copy Paper”,
About This Machine.
Printed images
contain blots or
are patchy.
Check the machine is set on a
level surface.
The machine
must be placed
on a stable and
level surface.
Check the environment of location to select an appropriate
location. See p.95 “Where to Put Your Machine”.
Printed images
contain blots or
are patchy.
The paper is
Smooth out the wrinkles from the paper, or replace it. See
creased, curled, “Copy Paper”, About This Machine.
or has blemishes.
• RPCS
Select [Thick] in the [Paper type:] list on the [Print Settings] tab.
The image is too The correct padark or too light. per type settings are not
made.
Check the paper loaded on the paper tray or bypass tray
matches the paper type set on the display panel. See
“Copy Paper”, About This Machine.
The image is too The paper is
dark or too light. loaded reverse
side up.
Before printing on special paper, check its surface carefully. Printing on non-print surfaces reduces print quality
and can damage the machine's internal components. See
“Copy Paper”, About This Machine.
Other Printing Problems
Problem
Cause
Solution
Image is dirty.
Use of non-rec- Use manufacturer-genuine toner. Contact your service
ommended ton- representative.
er can result in
loss of print
quality and other problems.
Print result differs from the
display.
A non-Windows OS is being used.
Check the application supports the printer driver.
Print result differs from the
display.
The machine is
not selected for
printing.
Use the machine's printer driver and check the machine is
the designated printer. See “Setting Up the Printer Driver”, Printer Reference.
Print result differs from the
display.
Data transmis- Check whether there is failed or cancelled data remaining.
sion failed or
See “Checking the Error Log”, Printer Reference.
was cancelled
during printing.
4
Characters differ The print densi- Adjust the image density. See the printer driver Help.
from the display. ty is too dark.
Characters differ The loaded paPrinting on recommended paper produces better resolufrom the display. per is unsuitable. tion. See “Copy Paper”, About This Machine.
It takes too
The data is so
much time to
large or comresume printing. plex that it takes
time to process.
If the Data In indicator is blinking, data is being processed.
Simply wait until printing resumes.
It takes too
The machine
much time to
was in Energy
resume printing. Saver mode.
To resume from Energy Saver mode, it has to warm up,
and this takes time. See “ENERGY STAR Program”,
About This Machine.
Optional components connected to the
machine are not
recognized
when using
Windows
95/98/Me, Windows 2000/XP,
and Windows
NT 4.0.
The option set- See the printer driver Help.
up in printer
properties is not
configured
when bidirectional transmission is not
enabled.
Paper is not fed
from the selected tray.
When you are
using a Windows operating
system, printer
driver settings
override those
set using the
display panel.
Set the desired input tray using the printer driver. See the
printer driver Help.
47
Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function
Problem
Cause
Solution
Some types of
data, such as
graphics data or
data from certain applications, do not
print.
The correct
printer driver
settings are not
made.
• On the [Details...] tab, for the [Print priority according to selected paper] group, select [Quality], and then print.
Some characters are not
printed or appear strange.
The correct
printer driver
settings are not
made.
• On the [Misc.] tab, select [Spool data in EMF format].
• In the [Change User Settings] dialog box, on the [Misc.]
tab, select [Print as bitmap].
See the printer driver Help.
• In the [Change User Settings] dialog box, on the [Misc.]
tab, select [Change methods to extract TrueType fonts].
• On the [Misc.] tab, select [Spool data in EMF format].
• In the [Change User Settings] dialog box, on the [Misc.]
tab, select [Print as bitmap].
See the printer driver Help.
4
Some characters are not
printed or appear faint.
The correct
printer driver
settings are not
made.
Print speed or
application relinquishing
speed is slow.
The correct
printer driver
settings are not
made.
• On the [Print Quality] tab, for the [Print priority according
to selected paper] group, select [Quality], and then print.
See the printer driver Help.
• On the [Print Quality] tab, for the [Print priority according
to selected paper] group, select [Fast].
• On the [Misc.] tab, select [Spool data in EMF format].
See the printer driver Help.
Quit any other applications.
Print ends mid-job. An error might
have occurred.
48
Check the machine's display panel to see if an error has occurred.
Image position
differs from the
display.
The correct
Check the page layout settings made using the applicapage layout set- tion. See the application's Help.
tings are not
made.
Image position
differs from the
display.
The correct
Check that the size of the loaded paper matches that specpage layout set- ified in the printer driver's [Printout paper size:] dialog box.
tings are not
See the printer driver Help.
made.
The printed image is different
from the image
on the computer
display.
With certain
functions, such
as enlargement
and reduction,
image layout
might be different to that on
the computer
display.
In the application, change the layout, character size, and
character settings.
The printed image is different
from the image
on the computer
display.
You might have
selected to replace TrueType
fonts with machine fonts in
the printing
process.
To print an image similar to that of the computer display,
make settings to print TrueType fonts as an image. See the
printer driver Help.
Other Printing Problems
Problem
Cause
Solution
Print is slanted.
The paper is
feeding in at a
slant.
Load the paper correctly. See p.75 “Loading Paper”.
Print is slanted.
The machine's
cover is open.
Make sure the right and lower right covers are properly
closed.
Misfeeds occur
frequently.
The number of
sheets loaded
exceeds the capacity of the
machine.
Load paper only as high as the upper limit markings on
the side fences of the paper tray or bypass tray. See “Copy
Paper”, About This Machine.
Misfeeds occur
frequently.
The paper is
damp.
Use paper that has been stored in the recommended temperature and humidity condition. See “Copy Paper”,
About This Machine.
Misfeeds occur
frequently.
The paper is too Use recommended paper. See “Copy Paper”, About This
thick or too thin. Machine.
Misfeeds occur
frequently.
The copy paper
is wrinkled or
has been folded/creased.
Use recommended paper. Use paper that has been stored
in the recommended temperature and humidity condition. See “Copy Paper”, About This Machine.
Misfeeds occur
frequently.
Printed paper is
being used.
Use recommended paper. See “Copy Paper”, About This
Machine.
Copy paper becomes creased.
The paper is
damp.
Use paper that has been stored in the recommended temperature and humidity condition. See “Copy Paper”,
About This Machine.
Copy paper becomes creased.
The paper is too
thin.
Use recommended paper. See “Copy Paper”, About This
Machine.
Garbled characters are printed.
The correct
printer language might
have not been
selected.
Set the correct printer language.
Images are print- The feed oriened in the wrong tation you seorientation.
lected and the
feed orientation
selected in the
printer driver's
option setup
might not be the
same.
Set the machine's feed orientation and the printer driver's
feed orientation accordingly. See the printer driver Help.
There is consider- “Sleep mode”
able delay between might be set.
the print start instruction and actual printing.
The machine requires time to warm up if it has been in
“Sleep mode”. See “Timer Settings”, General Settings Guide
and “ENERGY STAR Program”, About This Machine.
4
49
Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function
Problem
Cause
Solution
There is considerable delay between
the print start instruction and actual printing.
Processing time
depends on
data volume.
High volume
data, such as
graphics-heavy
documents,
takes longer to
process.
If the Data In indicator is blinking, data has been received
by the machine. Wait for a while.
Making the following setting on the printer driver may reduce the computer's workload.
For how to open the printing preferences dialog box, see
“Setting Up the Printer Driver”, Printer Reference.
❖ PCL 6/5e
Select the lower value for the [Resolution] list on the
[Print Quality] tab in the printing preferences dialog box.
❖ PostScript3
If your operating system is Windows, select [PostScript
(optimize for speed)] in the [PostScript Output Option] list.
[PostScript Output Option] is located as follows:
4
• Windows 95 / 98 / Me
[PostScript output format:] on the [PostScript] tab in
the printing preferences dialog box.
• Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003
[PostScript Output Option] in [PostScript Options] on
[Advanced...] on the [Layout] tab in the printing preferences dialog box.
• Windows NT 4.0
[PostScript Output Option] in [PostScript Options] on
[Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the printing preferences (document defaults) dialog box.
❖ RPCS
Select the lower value for [Resolution:] on the [Print Quality] tab in the printer driver's dialog box.
Select [Fast] for the [Document type] list on the [Print Quality] tab in the printer driver's dialog box.
To enable [Change User Settings...], select the [User settings] check box.
See the printer driver Help.
50
Graphics print
out differently
to how they appear on screen.
If the printer
If you want to print accurately, set the printer driver to
driver is config- print without using the graphics command. See the printured to use the
er driver Help.
graphics command, the graphics command
from the machine
is used to print.
Page layout is
not as expected.
Print areas differ Adjust the [Printable area:] setting in the [Printer Configuradepending on the tion...] dialog box on the [Print Settings] tab in the RPCS
machine used. In- printer driver. See the printer driver Help.
formation that fits
on a single page
on one machine
may not fit on a
single page of another machine.
Other Printing Problems
Problem
Cause
Solution
Photo images
are coarse.
Some applicaUse the application's settings to specify a higher resolution.
tions print at
lower resolution.
Solid lines are
printed as broken lines.
Dither patterns
do not match.
Make the following settings with the printer driver:
Optional components connected to the
machine are not
recognized
when using
Windows 95 /
98 / Me, Windows 2000 / XP,
Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0.
Bidirectional
communication
is not working.
Set up optional devices on the Properties of the machine.
• Change the [Dithering:] setting on the [Image Adjustments] tab in the [Change User Settings] dialog box, on
the [Print Quality] tab in the RPCS printer driver. See the
printer driver Help.
See the printer driver Help.
4
When using Win- dows 95/98/Me,
Windows
2000/XP, or Windows NT 4.0,
Auto Reduce/Enlarge print does
not come out as
expected.
Make sure the application's paper size and orientation settings match those of the printer driver.
The print job is
not canceled
even when the
machine is
switched to offline status.
-
Even when the machine is offline, printing is performed
when [Job Acceptance Priority] is selected for [Signal Control]
in [Parallel Interface] in [Interface Settings] under [System Settings]. Select [Printer Priority] for [Signal Control].
Images are incomplete, or excess pages are
printed.
You may be using paper smaller than the size
selected in the
application.
If a different paper size and orientation are set, select the
same size and orientation.
See “Interface Settings”, General Settings Guide.
Use the same size paper as that selected in the application.
If you cannot load paper of the correct size, use the reduction function to reduce the image, and then print.
See the printer driver Help.
Duplex printing is Duplex printing When using duplex printing, make settings to use paper
malfunctioning.
cannot be done from a tray other than the bypass tray.
with paper set in
the bypass tray.
Duplex printing is You have loadmalfunctioning.
ed thick paper,
OHP transparencies, or labels
specified as the
paper type.
Specify another paper type.
51
Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function
Problem
Cause
Solution
Duplex printing is Duplex printing Change the Paper Type setting for the tray to [On] on the
malfunctioning.
cannot be done System Settings menu. See “System Settings”, General Setwith a tray for
tings Guide.
which [Off] has
been specified
as Paper Type
on the System
Settings menu.
When using Windows 95 / 98 /
Me / 2000 / XP,
Windows Server
2003, or Windows
NT 4.0, combined
printing or booklet printing does
not come out as
expected.
4
The correct application or
printer driver
settings are not
made.
Make sure the application's paper size and orientation settings match those of the printer driver. If a different paper size
and orientation are set, select the same size and orientation.
A print instruc- User code mantion was issued agement may
from the comhave been set.
puter, but printing did not start.
Ask the administrator about valid user codes. To print, the
user code must be entered from the printer driver.
Printing by
Bluetooth is
slow.
• The number • Reduce the number of jobs.
of jobs ex• Remove the machine from close proximity with
ceeds the caIEEE802.11b wireless LAN devices.
pacity of the
• If there are active IEEE802.11b wireless LAN devices
machine.
or other Bluetooth devices nearby, relocate the ma• A communichine or deactivate those devices.
cation error
might have
occurred.
• Interference
from
IEEE802.11b
(wireless
LAN) devices affects
communication speed.
• Bluetooth
transmission speeds
are not high.
If the problem cannot be solved, contact your sales or service representative.
52
5. Troubleshooting When
Using the Scanner Function
This chapter describes likely causes of and possible solutions for scanner function problems. When using the DDST Unit, see “Troubleshooting When Using
the DDST Unit”.
When Scanning Is Not Done As Expected
This section describes causes and remedies when scan results are not as expected.
Problem
Cause
Solution
The scanned image is
dirty.
The exposure glass, scanning
glass, exposure glass cover or
ARDF is dirty.
Clean these parts. See p.99 “Maintaining Your Machine”.
The image is distorted
or out of position.
The original was moved during
scanning.
Do not move the original during
scanning.
The image is distorted
or out of position.
The original was not pressed flat
against the exposure glass.
Make sure that the original is
pressed flat against the exposure
glass.
The scanned image is
upside down.
The original was placed upside
down.
Place the original in the correct
orientation. See “Placing Originals”, Copy Reference.
No image results from
scanning.
The original was placed with the
front and back reversed.
When the original is placed directly on the exposure glass, the
side to be scanned must face
down. When the original is fed
via the ARDF, the side to be
scanned must face up. See “Placing Originals”, Copy Reference.
Images are scanned in
rotated orientation.
If you set the original with its up- • If you select [Top to Bottom] for
per edge backward and save grey
one- or two-sided originals,
scale images as a TIFF or JPEG
place your originals upper
file, they are scanned in rotated
edge first in the ARDF.
orientation.
• If you select [Top to Top] for
two-sided originals, select
[Single Page:PDF] or [Multipage:PDF] under [File Type Priority].
The scanned image
contains white spaces.
If you scan originals using functions other than the network
TWAIN scanner function, certain
paper size and resolution settings
may produce scanned images
that are larger than the specified
size because of margins being
added to the sides.
Scanning at a higher resolution
may reduce the margins.
53
Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function
When You Cannot Send Scanned Files
The following sections describe likely causes of and solutions for network delivery and e-mail sending-related problems.
When You Cannot Browse the Network to Send a Scanned File
This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for the browser network failing to operate when files are sent.
Problem
Cause
The network cannot be The following machine settings
browsed when specify- may not be correct:
ing the destination
• IPv4 address
folder.
• Subnet Mask
5
Solution
Check the settings. See “Network
Settings”, General Settings
Guide.
When the TWAIN Driver Cannot Be Started
This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for the TWAIN
driver failing to operate.
Problem
Cause
Solution
The Scanner Properties
dialog box cannot be
displayed.
Advanced encryption has been
specified in the extended security
setting.
For details about the extended security setting, contact the administrator.
The Network Delivery Function Cannot Be Used
This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for the Network
Delivery function failing to operate.
Problem
54
Cause
Solution
The network delivery
function cannot be
used.
The delivery software may be an
old version or a security setting
may be specified.
Contact the administrator.
The network delivery
function cannot be
used.
The network delivery function
setting is not correct.
Specify it correctly. See “Settings
Required to Use the Network Delivery Scanner”, General Settings
Guide.
When You Cannot Send Scanned Files
Operations Are Not Possible When Messages Appear
This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for messages that
appear when the machine fails to operate.
Message
Cause
Solution
Updating destination list. Reselect
destination(s)
or sender's name
later.
The destination list is being updated from the network using
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
or Web Image Monitor.
Wait until the message disappears. Do not switch off the power while this message is
displayed. Depending on the
number of destinations to be updated, there may be some delay
before you can resume operation.
Operations are not possible while
this message is displayed.
5
55
Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function
When a Message Is Displayed
This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for error messages
that may appear on the machine's display panel.
When a Message Is Displayed on the Display Panel
This section describes causes and remedies if an error message appears on the
display of the control panel.
Important
❒ For messages that are not listed here, see “When You Have Problems Operating the Machine”.
5
Message
Cause
Solution
Connection with
LDAP server has
failed. Check
the server status.
A network error has occurred and
connection has failed.
Try the operation once more. If
the message is still shown, the
network may be crowded. Check
the information of System Settings. See “Administrator Tools”,
General Settings Guide.
LDAP server auth. has failed.
Check the settings.
The user name and password dif- Make settings correctly for the
fer from those set for LDAP serv- user name and the password for
er authentication.
LDAP server authentication.
Destination
list has been
updated. Selected destinations/sender
will be cleared.
A specified destination or sender's name was cleared when the
destination list in the delivery
server was updated.
Specify the destination or sender's name again.
Updating destination list has
failed. Try
again?
A network error has occurred.
Check whether the server is connected.
Updating desti- The destination list is being updated. If a destination or sender's name
was already selected, re-select it
nation list. Reafter this message disappears.
select
destination(s)
or sender's name
later.
56
When a Message Is Displayed
Message
Cause
Solution
Exceeded max.
number of search
results which
can be displayed. Max.:
nnn
Search results have exceeded the
max. displayable number.
Search again after changing the
search conditions.
You do not have
privileges to
use this function.
Privileges to use this function.
Contact the administrator.
LDAP server
search timed
out. Check the
server status.
A network error has occurred and
connection has failed.
Try the operation once more. If
the message is still shown, the
network may be crowded. Check
the information of System Settings. See “Administrator Tools”,
General Settings Guide.
Specified group
contains some
invalid dest. Do
you want to select only valid
dest.?
The specified group contains
some destinations for sending by
e-mail and some destinations for
sending by Scan to Folder.
To select destinations for sending
by e-mail, press [Select] for the
message displayed on the e-mail
screen. To select destination for
sending by Scan to Folder, press
[Select] for the message displayed
on the Scan to Folder screen.
Connection has
failed. Check
settings and
check Scanned
File Status.
The correct network settings are
not made.
• Check the network settings of
the client computer.
(A figure is placed at
n.)
5
• Check that components such
as the LAN cable are connected properly.
• Check that the server settings
are correct and the server is
working properly.
Dest. authentication failed.
Check settings
and check
Scanned File
Status.
The entered user name or password was invalid.
• Check that the user name and
password are correct.
Sender's name is
not selected.
Specify sender's name.
The sender's name was not specified. A sender's name should be specified before sending e-mail. Send
e-mail after specifying the sender's name.
• Check that the ID and password for the destination folder are correct.
• A password of 128 or more characters may not be recognized.
57
Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function
Message
Cause
Solution
Cannot enter
manually more
than nnn destinations.
The e-mail has too many (nnn or
more) destinations.
Split the destinations into two or
more groups.
Cannot specify
more than 100
destinations.
The e-mail has too many (100 or
more) destinations.
Split the destinations into two or
more groups.
The number of
destination
folders selectable in one time
is limited to
32.
The maximum number of destination folders that can be selected
at one time has been exceeded.
Select 32 or fewer destination
folders.
(A figure is placed at
n.)
5
Exceeded max. E- The maximum e-mail size has
mail size. Send- been exceeded.
ing E-mail has
been cancelled.
• Increase the size of [Max. E-mail
Size].
• Set [Divide & Send E-mail] to [On
(per page)] or [On (per max.
size)].
See “Send Settings”, General Settings Guide.
Sending failed.
Check settings
and check
Scanned File
Status.
Press the {Job Information} key to
display the transmission results,
and then check which job has not
been sent. See “Confirmation Displays”, Scanner Reference.
Entered protec- The correct protection code was
not entered.
tion code for
dest. is incorrect. Please reenter.
Make sure the protection code is
correct, and then enter it again.
See “Registering a Protection
Code”, General Settings Guide.
The maximum enterable number
Exceeded max.
number of alpha- of alphanumeric characters has
numeric charac- been exceeded.
ters.
Make sure the maximum number
of characters which can be entered, and then enter it again. See
“Values of Various Set Items for
Transmission/Delivery Function”, Scanner Reference.
Authentication
failed.
58
While a file was being sent, a net- Try the operation once more. If
work error occurred and the file the message is still shown, the
could not be sent correctly.
network may be crowded. Contact the administrator.
The entered login user name or
password is incorrect.
Check the login user name and password. The machine is unable to authenticate. Contact the administrator.
When a Message Is Displayed
Message
Cause
Solution
Original is being scanned by
another function.
The machine is using another
function such as copying.
Retry scanning after the operation with the other function is
completed.
Exceeded
max.memory capa. Scanning
will be cancelled. Scanned
data will be
cleared.
The memory is full.
Try one of the following measures:
Exceeded max.
memory capacity. Do you want
to send the
scanned data?
The memory is full.
Specify whether to use the data or
not.
No valid dest.
lists. Check the
settings or the
server status.
The authentic settings for the delivery server are incorrect.
Check that the delivery server is
on and the authentic settings for
the delivery server are correct.
Sending has
failed. Press
Job Information
key to check the
status.
Sending has failed. Press the {Job Try the operation once more.
Information} key to check the status. If the message is still shown, the
network may be crowded. Contact your network administrator.
Out of paper.
Set paper on the
tray.
No paper is loaded in the specified paper tray.
Load paper of a size that is listed
in the message.
Check the resolution and reset
nnn original(s).
The scanned original exceeded
maximum data capacity.
Specify the scan size and resolution again. Note that it may not be
possible to scan very large originals at a high resolution. See “Relationship between Resolution and
Scan Size”, Scanner Reference.
(A figure is placed at
nnn.)
Exceeded max.
data capacity
Check resolution and Start.
• Wait for a while, and then retry the scan operation.
• Reduce the scan area or scanning resolution.
• Delete unneeded stored files.
5
Use the Job Information screen to
check for the file where the problem occurred. See “Confirmation
Displays”, Scanner Reference.
The scanned data exceeded maxi- Specify the scan size and resolumum data capacity.
tion again. Note that it may not be
possible to scan very large originals at a high resolution. See “Relationship between Resolution and
Scan Size”, Scanner Reference.
59
Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function
Message
Exceeded max.
page capacity.
Do you want to
send the scanned
data?
Cause
Solution
The number of scanned pages ex- Select whether to send the data so
ceeded maximum page capacity. far.
Reference
p.6 “When You Have Problems Operating the Machine”
When a Message Is Displayed on the Client Computer
This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for the main error
messages displayed on the client computer when using the TWAIN driver.
Important
❒ If an error message that is not included in this section appears, turn off the
main power switch of the machine, and then turn it on again. For information
about how to turn off the main power switch, see “Turning Off the Main Power”, About This Machine.
5
Message
Clear Misfeed(s) in ADF.
Cause
Solution
A paper misfeed has occurred in- Remove jammed originals, and
side the ARDF.
place them again.
Check whether the originals are suitable to be scanned by the machine.
Invalid Winsock
version. Please
use version 1.1
or higher.
You are using an invalid version
of Winsock.
The name is al- You tried to register a name that
is already in use.
ready in use.
Check the registered names.
60
Install the operating system of the
computer or copy Winsock from
the operating system CD-ROM.
Use another name.
Cannot add any
more scanning
mode.
The maximum number of registerable scanning modes has been
exceeded.
The maximum number of modes
that can be stored is 99. Delete unneeded modes.
Cannot specify
any more scanning area.
The maximum number of registerable scanning areas has been
exceeded.
The maximum number of scanning areas that can be stored is 99.
Delete unneeded scanning area.
Scanner is not
available on the
specified device.
The TWAIN scanner function
cannot be used on this machine.
Contact your service representative.
When a Message Is Displayed
Message
Scanner is not
available.
Check the scanner connection
status.
Cause
Solution
• The machine's main power
switch is off.
• Set the main power switch to
“On”.
• The machine is not connected
to the network correctly.
• Check whether the machine is connected to the network correctly.
• Deselect the personal firewall
function of the client computer.
• Use an application such as telnet to make sure SNMPv1 or
SNMPv2 is set as the machine’s protocol. See “Network Settings”, General
Settings Guide and “Remote
Maintenance by telnet”, Network Guide.
No response from
the scanner.
The machine is not connected to
the network correctly.
Check whether the machine is connected to the network correctly.
No response from
the scanner.
The network is crowded.
Wait for a while, and then try to
reconnect.
Error has occurred in the
scanner.
The application-specified scan
Check whether the scanning setconditions have exceeded the set- tings made with the application
ting range of the machine.
exceed the setting range of the
machine.
Fatal error has
occurred in the
scanner.
An unrecoverable error has occurred on the machine.
Call your service representative.
Cannot connect
to the scanner.
Check the network Access Mask
settings in User
Tools.
An access mask is set.
Contact the administrator.
Scanner is not
ready. Check the
scanner and the
options.
The ARDF cover is open.
Check whether the ARDF cover is
closed.
5
61
Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function
Message
Cause
Scanner memory is insufficient.
Insufficient
memory. Reduce
the scanning area.
Solution
• Reset the scan size.
• Lower the resolution.
• Set with no compression. See
TWAIN Driver help.
The problem may be due to the
following cause:
• “The Relationship between
the Resolution and the Scanning Area” chart in Help for
halftone scanning might not
always apply. Scanning cannot be performed if large values are set for brightness
when using halftone or high
resolution.
When a paper misfeed occurs in
Insufficient
the machine during printing,
memory. Reduce
the scanning ar- scanning cannot be performed.
ea.
5
Cannot find
“XXX” scanner
used for the
previous scan.
“YYY” will be
used instead.
(XXX and YYY indicate
a scanner name.)
• The main power switch of the
previously used scanner is not
set to “On”.
• The machine is not connected
to the network correctly.
After the misfed paper has been
removed, proceed with scanning.
• Check whether the main power switch of the scanner used
for the previous scan is turned
off.
• Check the previously used
scanner is connected to the
network correctly.
• Deactivate the personal firewall of the client computer.
• Use an application such as telnet to make sure SNMPv1 or
SNMPv2 is set as the machine’s protocol. See “Network Settings”, General
Settings Guide and “Remote
Maintenance by telnet”, Network Guide.
• Select the scanner used for the
previous scan.
Error has occurred in the
scanner driver.
An error has occurred in the driv- • Check whether the network
er.
cable is connected correctly to
the client computer.
• Check whether the Ethernet board
of the client computer is recognized correctly by Windows.
• Check whether the client computer can use the TCP/IP protocol.
62
When a Message Is Displayed
Message
Communication
error has occurred on the
network.
Cause
A communication error has occurred on the network.
Memory is insufficient.
Insufficient
memory. Close
all other applications, then
restart scanning.
Any of Login
User Name, Login
Password or
Driver Encryption Key is incorrect.
The entered login user name,
password, or driver encryption
key was invalid.
Solution
Check whether the client computer can use the TCP/IP protocol.
• Close all the unnecessary applications running on the client computer.
• Uninstall the TWAIN Driver,
restart the computer, and then
reinstall the TWAIN Driver.
• Check the login user name,
password, and driver encryption key.
• Permission to use this function has not been granted.
Contact the administrator.
5
63
Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function
5
64
6. Troubleshooting When
Using the DDST Unit
This chapter describes likely causes of and possible solutions for printer and
scanner function problems when using machines with the DDST Unit.
The Printer Function
When a Message Is Displayed
This section describes the principal messages that appear on the display panel.
If a message not described here appears, act according to the message.
Reference
Before turning the main power off, see “Turning On the Power”, About This
Machine.
❖ Status messages
Message
Status
Ready
The machine is ready for use. No action is required.
Printing...
The machine is printing. Wait a while.
Waiting...
The machine is waiting for the next data to print. Wait a while.
Offline
The machine is offline. To start printing, switch the machine online by pressing {Online} on the control panel.
Please wait...
Wait a while.
Resetting Job...
The machine is resetting the print job. Wait until “Ready” appears on the display.
Setting change...
The machine settings are being changed. Wait a while.
❖ Alert messages
Message
Change Tray # to the
following settings:
xxx yyy
Cause
Solution
The settings of the selected pa- Press [JobReset] to change the
paper tray settings, or press
per tray are different from
[FormFeed] to print regardless.
those specified for printing.
For details about the paper
xxx indicates the tray number. tray settings, see “Tray Paper
Settings”, General Settings
yyy indicates the paper size.
Guide.
# indicates the tray number.
Collate cancelled.
The collate print function has
been canceled.
Turn the main power switch off,
wait a few seconds, and then
turn it back on. If the message
appears again, contact your
sales or service representative.
65
Troubleshooting When Using the DDST Unit
Message
Collate: Page max.
Cause
Solution
The maximum number of pages Turn the main power switch
has been exceeded for collation. off, wait a few seconds, and
then turn it back on. Reduce
the number of pages to be
printed, or, increase memory
capacity.
To install a memory module in
the machine, contact your
sales or service representative.
Duplex cancelled.
Duplex printing has been canceled. Check the paper used is suitable for duplex printing, or, increase memory capacity. To
install a memory module in
the machine, contact your
sales or service representative.
Duplex mode is in
off position for
Tray #
The selected paper tray has
not been configured for duplex printing.
Press [JobReset] to change the
paper tray settings or do single-sided printing.
# indicates the tray number.
For details about tray settings,
see “Tray Paper Settings”,
General Settings Guide.
Ethernet Board Error An error has occurred in the
Turn the main power switch off,
wait a few seconds, and then
turn it back on. If the message
appears again, contact your
sales or service representative.
6
Ethernet interface.
Exceeded max. print
size.
Press FormFeed/JobReset.
The page images to be printed
Press [JobReset] to change the
exceed the maximum print area. paper tray settings, or press
[FormFeed] to print regardless.
I/O buffer overflow. The maximum size of the I/O Increase the size of the I/O
buffer has been exceeded.
buffer through the Host Interface menu.
Load paper in Tray # There is no paper in the select- Load the tray with paper.
ed paper tray.
# indicates the tray number.
NV-RAM Error
An error has occurred in the
printer.
Output Tray changed. The output tray has been
changed due to the paper size
limitation of the selected tray.
66
Turn the main power switch off,
wait a few seconds, and then
turn it back on. If the message
appears again, contact your
sales or service representative.
Select the correct output tray.
The Printer Function
Message
Cause
Paper size/type mis- There is no paper tray that
matches the paper settings sematch.
lected under Auto Tray Select.
Change settings to:
xxx indicates the tray number.
xxx yyy
yyy indicates the paper size
and the paper type.
Solution
Press [JobReset] to change the
paper tray settings, or press
[FormFeed] to print regardless.
For details about paper tray
settings, see “Tray Paper Settings”, General Settings
Guide.
[Print] without below
mode?
This is an alert message concerning a paper tray in auto
tray select.
Press [Print] to cancel the mode
and print the job.
Printer Font Error.
An error has occurred in the
font file.
Turn the main power switch off,
wait a few seconds, and then
turn it back on. If the message
appears again, contact your
sales or service representative.
Print overrun.
Image compression has result- Increase memory capacity. To
ed in image degradation.
install a memory module in
the machine, contact your
sales or service representative.
Paper Tray is in
use.
The specified paper tray is in
use by another function, such
as the copier function.
Reset Paper Tray
correctly.
The selected paper tray does
Set the paper tray correctly.
not exist or is not set correctly.
DToner is almost
empty.
Add toner.
Toner is running out.
Replace the toner cartridge
soon to maintain print quality.
Tray # Error
A paper tray error has occurred.
Press [JobReset] to change the
paper tray settings, or press
[FormFeed] to select another
paper tray and print.
# indicates the tray number.
6
Wait until the other function
has finished using the specified paper tray.
Unauthorized user
access.
Print job canceled due to user
restrictions.
Check the User Code permission status.
USB has a problem.
An error has occurred in the
USB interface.
Turn the main power switch off,
wait a few seconds, and then
turn it back on. If the message
appears again, contact your
sales or service representative.
67
Troubleshooting When Using the DDST Unit
When You Cannot Print
Use the following procedures if printing does not start even after performing
[Print].
Problem
6
Cause
Solution
Printing does not start.
The power is off.
Check the cable is securely
plugged into the power outlet
and the machine. Turn on the
main power switch.
Printing does not start.
The machine is set to “Offline”.
Press the {Online} key.
Printing does not start.
The cause is displayed on the dis- Check the error message or warnplay panel.
ing status on the display panel
and take the required action. See
p.65 “When a Message Is Displayed”.
Printing does not start.
The interface cable is not connect- Connect the interface cable seed correctly.
curely. If it has a fastener, fasten
that securely as well. See “Connecting to the Interfaces”, General Settings Guide.
Printing does not start.
The appropriate interface cable is
not used.
Printing does not start.
The interface cable was connected Connect the interface cable before
after the machine was turned on. turning on the machine.
The Data In indicator
does not blink or light
up.
If the Data In indicator is unlit or • When the machine is connectnot flashing even after performed to a computer via a cable,
ing [Print], the machine has not recheck the computer print port
ceived the data.
settings are correct. For how
to check the print port, see
“Confirming the Connection
Method”, Printer Reference.
The type of interface cable you
should use depends on the computer. Be sure to use the correct
one. If the cable is damaged or
worn, replace it. See “Connecting
to the Interfaces”, General Settings Guide.
• When it is networked with a computer, contact the administrator.
If the printing does not start, contact your service representative.
68
The Printer Function
❖ When the machine is connected to the computer using the interface cable
The following shows how to check the print port when the Data In indicator
does not light up or blink.
Check if the print port setting is correct. For USB port connection, the USB
port must be set.
Windows 98SE / Me
A Click the [Start] button, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Click the icon of the machine. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C Click the [Details] tab.
D In the [Print to the following port:] list, confirm the correct port is selected.
Windows 2000
A Click the [Start] button, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Click the icon of the machine. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C Click the [Ports] tab.
D In the [Print to the following port(s)] list, confirm the correct port is selected.
Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003
A Click the [Start] button, and then click [Printers and Faxes].
B Click the icon of the machine. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C Click the [Ports] tab.
D In the [Print to the following port(s)] list, confirm the correct port is selected.
Windows XP Home Edition
A Click the [Start] button, and then click [Control Panel].
B Click [Printers and Other Hardware].
C Click [Printers and Faxes].
D Click the icon of the machine. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
E Click the [Ports] tab.
F In the [Print to the following port(s)] list, confirm the correct port is selected.
6
69
Troubleshooting When Using the DDST Unit
Other Printing Problems
This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for problems that
can occur when printing from a computer.
Problem
Printed images
contain blots or
are patchy.
6
70
Cause
Settings for
thick paper
have not been
made when
printing on
thick paper.
Solution
Select [Thick] in the [Type:] list on the [Paper] tab.
It takes a long
The data is so
time to complete large or coma print job.
plex that it takes
time to process.
If the Data In indicator is blinking, data is being processed.
Simply wait until printing resumes.
It takes too
The data is so
much time to re- large or comsume printing.
plex that it takes
time to process.
If the Data In indicator is blinking, data is being processed.
Simply wait until printing resumes.
It takes too
The machine
much time to re- was in Energy
sume printing.
Saver mode.
To resume from Energy Saver mode, it has to warm up,
and this takes time. See “ENERGY STAR Program”,
About This Machine.
Optional components connected to the
machine are not
recognized
when using
Windows
98SE/Me, Windows 2000/XP,
and Windows
Server 2003.
The option set- See the printer driver Help.
up in printer
properties is not
configured
when bidirectional transmission is not
enabled.
Paper is not fed
from the selected tray.
When you are
using a Windows operating
system, printer
driver settings
override those
set using the
display panel.
Set the desired input tray using the printer driver. See the
printer driver Help.
The printed image is different
from the image
on the computer
display.
With certain
functions, such
as enlargement
and reduction,
image layout
might be different to that on
the computer
display.
In the application, change the layout, character size, and
character settings.
The Printer Function
Problem
Cause
Images are print- The feed oriened in the wrong tation you seorientation.
lected and the
feed orientation
selected in the
printer driver's
option setup
might not be the
same.
Solution
Set the machine's feed orientation and the printer driver's
feed orientation accordingly. See the printer driver Help.
Page layout is
not as expected.
Print areas differ See the printer driver Help.
depending on
the machine
used. Information that fits on a
single page on
one machine
may not fit on a
single page of another machine.
Photo images
are coarse.
Some applicaCheck your application.
tions reduce
print resolution.
When using
Windows
98SE/Me or
Windows
2000/XP, Auto
Reduce/Enlarge print does
not come out as
expected.
-
Make sure the application's paper size and orientation settings match those of the printer driver. If a different paper size
and orientation are set, select the same size and orientation.
The print job is
not canceled
even when the
machine is
switched to offline status.
-
Select [Printer Priority] for [Signal Control].
Images are incomplete, or excess pages are
printed.
You may be using paper smaller than the size
selected in the
application.
6
See “Interface Settings”, General Settings Guide.
Use the same size paper as that selected in the application.
If you cannot load paper of the correct size, use the reduction function to reduce the image, and then print.
See the printer driver Help.
Duplex printing is Duplex printing When using duplex printing, make settings to use paper
malfunctioning.
cannot be done from a tray other than the bypass tray.
with paper set
in the bypass
tray.
71
Troubleshooting When Using the DDST Unit
Problem
Cause
Duplex printing is You have loadmalfunctioning.
ed thick paper ,
OHP transparencies, or labels
specified as the
paper type.
Solution
Specify another paper type.
Duplex printing is Duplex printing Select [Duplex] as the Paper Type in [Paper Input]. See “Sysmalfunctioning.
cannot be done tem Settings”, General Settings Guide.
with a tray for
which [Duplex]
has been specified as Paper
Type in [Tray Paper Settings] under [System
Settings].
The correct application or
printer driver
settings are not
made.
Make sure the application's paper size and orientation settings match those of the printer driver. If a different paper size
and orientation are set, select the same size and orientation.
A print instruc- User code mantion was issued agement may
from the comhave been set.
puter, but printing did not start.
Ask the administrator about valid user codes. To print, the
user code must be entered from the printer driver.
When using
Windows
98SE/Me or
Windows
2000/XP, either
combined printing or booklet
printing does
not come out as
expected.
6
Note
❒ If the problem cannot be solved, contact your sales or service representative.
72
The Scanner Function
The Scanner Function
When Scanning Is Not Done As Expected
This section describes causes and remedies when scan results are not as expected.
Problem
Cause
Solution
No image results from
scanning.
The original was placed with the
front and back reversed.
When the original is placed directly on the exposure glass, the
side to be scanned must face
down. When the original is fed
via the ARDF, the side to be
scanned must face up. See “Placing Originals”, Copy Reference.
The image is distorted
or out of position.
The original was moved during
scanning.
Do not move the original during
scanning.
The image is distorted
or out of position.
The original was not pressed flat
against the exposure glass.
Make sure that the original is
pressed flat against the exposure
glass.
The scanned image is
dirty.
The exposure glass, exposure
glass cover or ARDF is dirty.
Clean these parts. See p.99 “Maintaining Your Machine”.
The scanned image is
upside down.
The original was placed upside
down.
Place the original in the correct
orientation. See “Placing Originals”, Copy Reference.
6
73
Troubleshooting When Using the DDST Unit
When a Message Is Displayed on the Client Computer
This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for the main error
messages displayed on the client computer when using the TWAIN driver.
Note
❒ If an error message that is not included in this section appears, turn off the
main power switch of the machine, and then turn it on again. If the message
reappears after scanning is performed again, make a note of the message and
the error number (if it is listed in the table), and contact your service representative. For details about how to turn off the main power switch, see “Turning
Off the Main Power”, About This Machine.
Message
Clear Misfeed(s) in ADF.
Cause
Solution
A paper misfeed has occurred in- Remove jammed originals, and
side the ARDF.
place them again.
Check whether the originals are suitable to be scanned by the machine.
Memory is insufficient.
Insufficient
memory. Close
all other applications, then
restart scanning.
6
Scanner memory is insufficient.
Insufficient
memory. Reduce
the scanning area.
When a paper misfeed occurs in
Insufficient
the machine during printing,
memory. Reduce
the scanning ar- scanning cannot be performed.
ea.
Scanning has
been aborted.
No response from
the scanner.
Scanner is not
available.
Check the scanner connection
status.
74
• Close all the unnecessary applications running on the client computer.
• Uninstall the TWAIN Driver,
restart the computer, and then
reinstall the TWAIN Driver.
• Reset the scan size.
• Lower the resolution.
After the misfed paper has been
removed, proceed with scanning.
• The machine's power switch is • Check the machine's power
turned off.
switch is turned on.
• The machine is not connected
to the network correctly.
• Check the machine is connected to the network correctly.
• The machine is not connected
to the network correctly.
• Check the machine is connected to the network correctly.
• The network is crowded.
• Wait for a while, and then try
to reconnect.
• The machine's power switch is • Check the machine's power
turned off.
switch is turned on.
• The machine is not connected
to the network correctly.
• Check the machine is connected to the network correctly.
• Disable any firewalls that are
running on the client computer.
7. Adding Paper and
Replacing Toner
This chapter describes troubleshooting procedures that are applicable to all the
machine's functions.
Loading Paper
This section describes what to do when paper runs out and needs reloading.
R CAUTION:
• When loading paper, take care not to trap or injure your fingers.
Note
❒ Fan the paper before loading.
❒ Straighten curled or warped paper before loading.
❒ For paper types and sizes, see “Recommended Paper Sizes and Types”,
About This Machine.
❒ To load paper in the bypass tray, see “Copying from the Bypass Tray”, Copy
Reference.
Reference
For details about paper sizes and types, see “Recommended Paper Sizes and
Types”, About This Machine.
75
Adding Paper and Replacing Toner
Loading Paper into the Paper Trays
This procedure explains how to load paper into the paper trays.
A Pull the paper tray out slowly until it stops.
B Press the metal plate down until it clicks, and then square the paper and
load it in the tray.
ARK027S
Check that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark inside the
tray.
7
ARK019S
C Push the paper tray in until it stops.
Note
❒ The illustration above shows Tray 1.
❒ When using the optional paper tray unit (Tray 2), load paper flush against
the right side of the tray. Space between the paper and the tray's sides can
cause misfeeds.
Reference
p.80 “Changing the Paper Size”
76
Loading Paper
Orientation-Fixed Paper or Two-Sided Paper
This section describes loading paper that has a specified orientation and printing
side (such as letterhead paper).
Orientation-fixed (top to bottom) or two-sided paper (for example, letterhead
paper, prepunched paper, or copied paper) might not print correctly, depending
on how the originals and paper are placed. Select [On] in [Letterhead Setting] under [Copier Features], and then place the original and paper as shown below. See
“Copier Features”, General Settings Guide.
When printing with the printer function, placing orientation is the same.
❖ Original Orientation
Exposure glass
*1
*1
*2
ARDF
*2
*1
When copying in this orientation using the duplex function, select [Always Specify] in
[Orientation] under [Copier Features] (User Tools). Place originals, and then select
as the original orientation.
When copying in this orientation using the duplex function, and loaded paper orientation is L, place originals as shown below:
7
Under [Copier Features], if [Orientation] is set to [Always Specify], load paper in
orientation.
77
Adding Paper and Replacing Toner
❖ Loaded paper orientation
• For machine with copier function only
7
ASS015S
78
Loading Paper
• For MFP
7
ASS016S
Note
❒ In [Tray Paper Settings] under [System Settings], specify [Letterhead] for “Paper
Type” of the paper tray you want to use. This setting is only available when
the printer/scanner and fax units are installed. See “Tray Paper Settings”,
General Settings Guide.
79
Adding Paper and Replacing Toner
Changing the Paper Size
This section describes how to change paper sizes.
Procedures for changing the paper size differ depending on the paper tray (Tray 1 or the optional
paper tray unit). Make sure you are following the appropriate procedure before you begin.
Note
❒ Fan the paper before loading.
❒ Straighten curled or warped paper before loading.
Reference
For details about paper sizes and types, see “Tray Paper Settings”, General
Settings Guide.
Changing the Paper Size in the Paper Tray (Tray 1)
Use the following procedure when changing a paper size in the paper tray.
A Make sure the paper tray is not in use.
B Pull the paper tray out slowly until it stops.
C Remove any remaining copy paper.
D While pinching the release levers, pull the end fence off from the tray.
7
ARK011S
To load A4L size paper: place the end fence in the corner pocket on the left.
ARK012S
80
Changing the Paper Size
E While pressing the release lever, slide the side fences outward.
ARK013S
F Push the metal plate down.
7
ARK014S
G Square the paper and place it in the tray.
Be sure to set the paper under the roller.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
ASS003S
81
Adding Paper and Replacing Toner
H While pressing the release lever, push in the side fences until they are flush
against the paper's edges.
ARK016S
I While pinching the release levers, set the end fence to the new paper size.
7
ARK017S
J Push the paper tray in until it stops.
Note
❒ When setting small quantities of copy paper, be careful not to squeeze in
the side fence too much. Paper might not feed in properly if the side fences
are too tight against the paper's edges.
❒ Be sure to set the correct size, otherwise a paper jam might occur.
82
Changing the Paper Size
Changing a Paper Size in the Optional Paper Tray Unit (Tray 2)
This section describes how to change the size of paper loaded in the optional paper tray unit.
A Make sure the paper tray is not in use.
B Pull the paper tray out slowly until it stops.
C Remove any remaining copy paper.
D While pinching the release levers, slide the end fence outward.
To load 81/4"×14"L or 81/2"×14"L size paper: pull the end fence out of the
tray and place it in the corner pocket on the left.
7
E While pressing the release lever, slide the side fence outward.
83
Adding Paper and Replacing Toner
F Push the metal plate down, and then square the paper and place it in the
tray.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
ASS004S
G While pressing the release levers, push in the side and end fences until they
are flush against the paper's edges.
7
H Push the paper tray in until it stops.
Note
❒ When setting small quantities of copy paper, be careful not to squeeze in
the side fence too much. Paper might not feed in properly if the side fence
is too tight against the paper's edge.
❒ Be sure to set the correct size, otherwise a paper jam might occur.
❒ Load paper so that the paper touches the right side of the tray. Otherwise
misfeeds might occur.
84
Changing the Paper Size
Selecting the Paper Size with User Tools
This procedure explains how to select to a paper size with User Tools.
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
ASO032S
B Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Tray Paper Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
7
D Select “Paper Size” for the paper tray of which paper size will be changed
using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Select the paper size using the scroll keys, and then press the {OK} key.
85
Adding Paper and Replacing Toner
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
ASO032S
7
86
Adding Toner
Adding Toner
This section describes adding and storing toner.
R WARNING:
• Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers. Toner dust might ignite when exposed to an open flame. Dispose of used toner containers
in accordance with local regulations.
R CAUTION:
• Keep toner (used or unused) and toner containers out of reach of children.
R CAUTION:
• If toner or used toner is inhaled, gargle with plenty of water and move into a
fresh air environment. Consult a doctor if necessary.
R CAUTION:
• If toner or used toner gets into your eyes, flush immediately with large
amounts of water. Consult a doctor if necessary.
R CAUTION:
• If toner or used toner is swallowed, dilute by drinking a large amount of water. Consult a doctor if necessary.
7
R CAUTION:
• Avoid getting toner on your clothes or skin when removing a paper jam or
replacing toner. If your skin comes into contact with toner, wash the affected
area thoroughly with soap and water.
• If toner gets on your clothing, wash with cold water. Hot water will set the
toner into the fabric and may make removing the stain impossible.
Important
❒ Fault may occur if you use toner other than the recommended type.
❒ When adding toner, do not turn off the operation switch. If you do, settings
will be lost.
❒ Always add toner when the machine instructs you.
❒ When a message “Add toner.” is shown on the display panel, replace the toner.
❒ Store the toner bottles in a cool, dry place free from direct sunlight.
❒ Store on a flat surface.
❒ Do not repeatedly install and remove toner bottles. This will result in toner
leakage.
❒ Do not shake the removed toner bottle. Remaining toner might scatter.
Note
❒ You can make about 50 copies even after the D Add Toner indicator begins
flashing, but replace toner early to prevent poor copy quality.
87
Adding Paper and Replacing Toner
Replacing Toner
This section describes how to replace the toner bottle.
Removing Toner
ASS005S
Inserting Toner
Important
❒ Do not shake the removed toner bottle. The remaining toner might scatter.
7
ASS006S
Note
❒ Do not remove the black cap before shaking.
❒ Do not remove the inner cap.
88
Adding Toner
Sending Fax Messages When Toner Has Run Out
When the machine has run out of toner, the indicator on the display lights. Note
that even if there is no toner left, you can still send fax documents.
Important
❒ Communication is not possible if the number of communications executed after the toner has run out plus the number of communications not listed in the
journal exceeds 100.
A Make sure that the machine is in facsimile mode.
B Press [Exit], and then perform transmission operation.
The error message disappears.
Note
❒ The communication results report cannot be printed.
❒ If the fax screen does not appear in step A, press the {Facsimile} key.
Waste Toner
Waste toner cannot be re-used.
Take the bottle of waste toner to your sales representative or service representative for recycling. If you dispose of it on your own, treat it as general plastic
waste.
7
89
Adding Paper and Replacing Toner
7
90
8. Clearing Misfeeds
This chapter describes what to do when paper or originals misfeed (become
jammed inside the machine).
Removing Jammed Paper
R WARNING:
• Connect the machine only to the power source described on the inside
front cover of this manual. Connect the power cord directly into a wall
outlet and do not use an extension cord.
• Do not damage, break or make any modifications to the power cord.
Do not place heavy objects on it. Do not pull it hard nor bend it more
than necessary. These actions could cause an electric shock or fire.
R CAUTION:
• The fusing section of this machine might be very hot. Caution should be taken when removing misfed paper.
Important
❒ When clearing misfeeds, do not turn off the operation switch. If you do, your
copy settings are cleared.
❒ To prevent misfeeds, do not leave any torn scraps of paper inside the machine.
❒ If paper misfeeds occur frequently, contact your service representative.
91
Clearing Misfeeds
Note
❒ More than one misfeed area may be indicated. If this is the case, check every
indicated area. Refer to the following charts: A, P, and Y.
❒ You can find stickers explaining how to remove misfed paper inside the right
cover and on the top of the ARDF cover.
❒ When the machine instructs you to reset originals, reset them in the feeding
position. The display will show you the number of originals to return.
ARK028S
• When A is displayed
8
ASS008S
92
Removing Jammed Paper
• When P is displayed
ASS007S
• When Y is displayed
8
ASS009S
93
Clearing Misfeeds
8
94
9. Remarks
This chapter describes how to maintain and operate the machine.
Where to Put Your Machine
This section provides precautions for installation, movement and disposal.
Machine Environment
Choose your machine's location carefully.
Environmental conditions greatly affect its performance.
Optimum Environmental Conditions
The following describes precautions when locating the machine.
R CAUTION:
• Keep the machine away from humidity and dust. Otherwise a fire or an electric shock might occur.
• Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. If it topples over,
an injury might occur.
R CAUTION:
• After you move the machine, use the caster fixture to fix it in place. Otherwise the machine might move or come down to cause an injury.
R CAUTION:
• Make sure the room where you are using the machine is well ventilated and
spacious. Good ventilation is especially important when the machine is used
heavily.
•
•
•
•
•
Temperature: 10-32 °C (50-89.6 °F) (humidity to be 54% at 32 °C, 89.6 °F)
Humidity: 15-80% (temperature to be 27 °C, 80.6 °F at 80%)
Ventilation: 3 times/hr/person or more
A strong and level base.
The machine must be level within 5 mm, 0.2 inches: both front to rear and left
to right.
95
Remarks
Environments to Avoid
• Locations exposed to direct sunlight or other sources of strong light (more
than 1,500 lux).
• Locations directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner or heated air from a heater.
(Sudden temperature changes can cause condensation to form inside the machine.)
• Locations close to machines generating ammonia, such as a diazo copy machine.
• Places where the machine will be subject to frequent strong vibration.
• Dusty areas.
• Areas with corrosive gases.
Moving
The following describes precautions when moving the machine.
R CAUTION:
• Before moving the machine, be sure to pull all four handles fully out. If not,
an injury might occur. After moving the machine, return the four handles to
their original positions.
R CAUTION:
• Before moving the machine, be sure to disconnect all external connections,
especially the power cord from the wall outlet. Damaged power cords are a
fire and electric shock hazard.
R CAUTION:
• If you have to move the machine when the optional paper tray unit is attached, do not push on the main unit's top section. Doing so can cause the
optional paper tray unit to detach, possibly resulting in injury.
9
R CAUTION:
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine.
While moving the machine, you should take care that the power cord will not
be damaged under the machine.
Important
❒ Be careful when moving the machine. Take the following precautions:
• Turn off the main power. See p.34 “Turning Off the Main Power / In the
Event of Power Failure”.
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. When you pull out the plug
from the socket, grip the plug to avoid damaging the cord, thereby reducing the risk of fire or electric shock.
• Close all covers and trays, including the front cover and bypass tray.
❒ Do not take off the holding stand.
❒ Protect the machine from strong shocks. Impact can damage the memory.
96
Where to Put Your Machine
Power Connection
The following describes power supply.
R WARNING:
• Connect the machine only to the power source described on the inside
front cover of this manual. Connect the power cord directly into a wall
outlet and do not use an extension cord.
• Do not damage, break or make any modifications to the power cord.
Do not place heavy objects on it. Do not pull it hard nor bend it more
than necessary. These actions could cause an electric shock or fire.
R CAUTION:
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine.
While moving the machine, you should take care that the power cord will not
be damaged under the machine.
R CAUTION:
• If the power cord is damaged (exposure of the core, disconnection, etc.),
contact your service representative to change a new one. Operating the machine with a damaged power cord may cause an electric shock or fire.
R CAUTION:
• When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the
plug (not the cable).
R CAUTION:
• To disconnect the power cord, pull it out by plug. Do not drag the cord itself.
Doing so may result in damage to the cord, leading to fire or electric shock.
9
• Make sure the plug is inserted firmly in the wall outlet.
• Voltage must not fluctuate by more than 10%.
• The wall outlet shall be installed near the machine and shall be easily accessible.
97
Remarks
Access to the Machine
Place the machine near the power source, providing the clearance areas shown.
1. Rear: 6 cm (2.4") or more
2. Right: 1 cm (0.4") or more
3. Front: 75 cm (29.6") or more
4. Left: 1 cm (0.4") or more
Note
❒ For the required space when options are installed, contact your service representative.
When Not Used for a Long Time
R CAUTION:
• For safety reason, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet if the machine
will not be used for an extended period of time such as holidays.
Note the following:
• If the machine has not been used recently, it requires time to initialize so cannot start printing immediately. Leave the machine switched on and wait
about ten minutes.
9
98
Maintaining Your Machine
Maintaining Your Machine
If the exposure glass, exposure glass cover, ARDF belt is dirty, copy clarity may
be reduced. Clean these parts if they are dirty.
R CAUTION:
• Fire and breakdown can result from heavy accumulation of dust inside this
machine. Consult your service representative for details about and charges
for cleaning the machine’s interior.
Important
❒ Do not use chemical cleaners or organic solvents, such as thinner or benzene.
If such substances get inside the machine or melt plastic parts, a failure might
occur.
❒ Do not clean parts other than those explicitly specified in this manual. Other
parts should only be cleaned by your service representative.
❖ Cleaning the machine
Wipe the machine with a soft, damp cloth, and then wipe it with a dry cloth
to remove the water.
Cleaning the Exposure Glass
This section describes how to clean the exposure glass and scanning glass.
9
Clean 1 and 2.
99
Remarks
Cleaning the Exposure Glass Cover
This section describes how to clean the exposure glass cover.
Cleaning the ARDF
This section describes how to clean the ARDF.
9
ARK026S
Clean 1 and 2.
100
INDEX
A
Add Toner indicator, 3
Adjusting the screen's contrast, 6
ARDF, 1, 100
ARDF belt is dirty, 99
Authentication failure, 6
B
Basic, 15
C
Changing a Paper Size in the
Optional Paper Tray Unit (Tray 2), 83
Changing the Paper Size, 80
Changing the Paper Size in the
Paper Tray (Tray 1), 80
Cleaning the machine, 99
Combination Chart, 9
Combine, 15
Copies appear dirty, 13
Copies are too light, 13
D
DDST Unit, 65
Display is off, 6
Duplex, 15
E
Edit, 15
End fence, 80, 83
Environments to Avoid, 96
Error indicator, 3
Error log, 42
Error Mail Notification, 35
Error Report (E-Mail), 35
Exposure glass cover is dirty, 99
Exposure glass is dirty, 99
F
Fax error report, 33
Function status indicator, 5
I
Image is dirty, 46, 53, 73
Indicators, 3
Inserting Toner, 88
J
Jammed paper, 91
L
Letterhead paper, 77
Limit mark, 76, 80
Loaded paper orientation, 77
Loading Paper into the Paper Trays, 76
Load Paper indicator, 3
M
Main power switch, 34
Meaning of beep patterns, 4
Memory is full, 17, 32
Multi-accessing, 9
N
Network cannot be browsed, 54
Network Delivery, 54
Network Delivery function cannot be used, 54
No scan image, 53, 73
O
Operation Switch indicator, 6
Optimum Environmental Conditions, 95
Orientation-Fixed Paper, 77
Original Orientation, 77
101
P
Panel Tone, 4
Paper is not fed from selected tray, 46, 70
Paper jam, 91
Paper orientation, 77
Parts of image not copied, 13
Password not correct, 6, 11, 40
Power Connection, 97
Power Failure Report, 34
Power indicator, 34
Power supply, 97
Precautions when locating the machine, 95
Precautions when moving the machine, 96
Printed image is different from
computer display, 46, 70
Printed image is faded, 46
Printed image is in wrong orientation, 46, 70
Printer driver installation, 37
Printing, 28
Printing does not start, 43, 68
T
Toner, 87, 88, 89
Transmission, 28
Transmission/Reception, 28
TWAIN, 60, 74
Two-Sided Paper, 77
U
User code entry, 6
V
Volume adjustment, 19
W
Waste Toner, 89
When A is displayed, 91
When P is displayed, 91
When Y is displayed, 91
R
RDS (Remote Diagnostic System), 34
Reception, 28
Release lever, 80, 83
Removing Jammed Paper, 91
Replacing Toner, 88
Reverse side of original is copied, 6, 13
S
Scanned image contains white spaces, 53
Scanned image is dirty, 53
Scanned image is distorted, 53, 73
Scanned image is out of position, 53, 73
Scanned image is upside down, 53, 73
Scanner Properties dialog box not displayed, 54
Selecting the Paper Size with User Tools, 85
Server-Generated Error E-mail, 35
Shadow appears on copies, 13
Side fences, 80, 83
Status Messages, 39, 65
102
EN
USA
B262-7651
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:
a means POWER ON.
c means STAND BY.
Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows® and Windows NT® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
TrueType is registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
PostScript® and Acrobat® are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Bluetooth is a Trademark of the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. (Special Interest Group) and licensed to Ricoh
Company Limited.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
•
The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® Windows® 95
•
The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft® Windows® 98
•
The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows® Millennium Edition (Windows Me)
•
The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
•
The product names of Windows® XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
•
The product names of Windows ServerTM 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Web Edition
•
The product names of Windows NT® are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0
Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0
Copyright © 2006
Operating Instructions Troubleshooting
Type for 816/DSm416/LD016/Aficio MP 161
Type for 816f/DSm416f/LD016f/Aficio MP 161F
Type for 816mf/DSm416pf/LD016spf/Aficio MP 161SPF
EN USA B262-7651
Operating Instructions
Copy Reference
1
Placing Originals
2
Copying
3
Appendix
Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the
Safety Information in "About This Machine" before using the machine.
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine. For your
safety and benefit, read this manual carefully before using the machine. Keep this manual in a handy
place for quick reference.
Important
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine.
Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law.
Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law:
bank notes, revenue stamps, bonds, stock certificates, bank drafts, checks, passports, driver's licenses.
The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive. We assume no responsibility for its
completeness or accuracy. If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying or printing certain items, consult with your legal advisor.
Notes:
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Depending on which country you are in, certain units may be optional. For details, please contact your
local dealer.
Caution:
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.
Manuals for This Machine
Refer to the manuals that are relevant to what you want to do with the machine.
Manuals for machines with copier function only or with the DDST Unit are different. See “Manuals for Machines with Copier Function Only or with the DDST
Unit”.
Important
❒ Media differ according to manual.
❒ The printed and electronic versions of a manual have the same contents.
❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader must be installed in order to view the
manuals as PDF files.
❒ Depending on which country you are in, there may also be html manuals. To
view these manuals, a Web browser must be installed.
❖ About This Machine
Be sure to read the Safety Information in this manual before using the machine.
This manual provides an introduction to the functions of the machine. It also
explains the control panel, preparation procedures for using the machine,
how to enter text, and how to install the CD-ROMs provided.
❖ General Settings Guide
Explains User Tools settings, and Address Book procedures such as registering fax numbers, e-mail addresses, and user codes. Also refer to this manual
for explanations on how to connect the machine.
❖ Troubleshooting
Provides a guide to solving common problems, and explains how to replace
paper, toner, and other consumables.
❖ Security Reference
This manual is for administrators of the machine. It explains security functions that the administrators can use to protect data from being tampered
with, or prevent the machine from unauthorized use.
Also refer to this manual for the procedures for registering administrators, as
well as setting user and administrator authentication.
❖ Copy Reference
Explains Copier functions and operations. Also refer to this manual for explanations on how to place originals.
❖ Facsimile Reference
Explains Facsimile functions and operations.
❖ Printer Reference
Explains Printer functions and operations.
❖ Scanner Reference
Explains Scanner functions and operations.
i
❖ Network Guide
Explains how to configure and operate the machine in a network environment, and use the software provided.
This manual covers all models, and includes descriptions of functions and
settings that might not be available on this machine. Images, illustrations, and
information about operating systems that are supported might also differ
slightly from those of this machine.
❖ Other manuals
• PostScript3 Supplement
• UNIX Supplement
• Manuals for DeskTopBinder Lite
• DeskTopBinder Lite Setup Guide
• DeskTopBinder Introduction Guide
• Auto Document Link Guide
Note
❒ Manuals provided are specific to machine types.
❒ For “UNIX Supplement”, please visit our Web site or consult an authorized
dealer.
❒ “PostScript3 Supplement” and “UNIX Supplement” include descriptions of
functions and settings that might not be available on this machine.
Reference
p.iii “Manuals for Machines with Copier Function Only or with the DDST
Unit”
ii
Manuals for Machines with Copier Function Only or with the
DDST Unit
This section describes the manuals for machines with copier function only or
with the DDST Unit.
❖ About This Machine
Be sure to read the Safety Information in this manual before using the machine.
This manual provides an introduction to the functions of the machine. It also
explains the control panel, preparation procedures for using the machine, and
how to install the CD-ROMs provided.
❖ General Settings Guide
Explains User Tools settings. Also refer to this manual for explanations on
how to register user codes.
❖ Troubleshooting
Provides a guide to solving common problems, and explains how to replace
paper, toner, and other consumables.
❖ Copy Reference
Explains Copier functions and operations. Also refer to this manual for explanations on how to place originals.
❖ Printer/Scanner Reference
Explains system settings, functions and operations for the machine's printer/scanner unit. Also refer to this manual for explanations on how to connect
the machine.
❖ Network Guide
Explains how to configure and operate the machine in a network environment, and use the software provided.
Note
❒ Some manuals include descriptions of functions and settings that are not
available on machines with copier function only or with the DDST Unit.
iii
What You Can Do with This Machine
Available functions differ depending on the model and options.
Reference
p.2 “Functions Requiring the ARDF”
Types of Duplex Copies
❖ 1 Sided 2 Pages → 2 Sided 1 Page
See p.41 “Duplex”.
❖ 2 Sided 1 Page → 2 Sided 1 Page
See p.41 “Duplex”.
❖ 1 Sided 4 Pages → Combine 2 Sided 1 Page
See p.47 “Two-Sided Combine”.
GCSHVY9J
iv
❖ 1 Sided 8 Pages → Combine 2 Sided 1 Page
See p.47 “Two-Sided Combine”.
GCSHVYAE
1 Front
2 Back
❖ 2 Sided 2 Pages → Combine 2 Sided 1 Page
See p.47 “Two-Sided Combine”.
GCSHVY1E
❖ 2 Sided 4 Pages → Combine 2 Sided 1 Page
See p.47 “Two-Sided Combine”.
GCSHVY2E
1 Front
2 Back
v
Combining Multiple Pages onto a Single Page
See p.44 “One-Sided Combine”.
❖ 1 Sided 2 Pages → Combine 1 Sided 1 Page
GCSHVY7J
❖ 1 Sided 4 Pages → Combine 1 Sided 1 Page
GCSHVY8J
❖ 2 Sided 1 Page → Combine 1 Sided 1 Page
GCSHVYOJ
vi
❖ 2 Sided 2 Pages → Combine 1 Sided 1 Page
GCSHVYBJ
Copying 2-Sided Originals onto 1-Sided Pages
See p.50 “Series Copies”.
❖ 2 Sided 1 Page → 1 Sided 2 Pages
Copying onto Envelopes
❖ Envelope
See p.30 “When Copying onto Envelopes”.
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Machine ......................................................................................i
Manuals for Machines with Copier Function Only or with the DDST Unit ................. iii
What You Can Do with This Machine..................................................................iv
Types of Duplex Copies ............................................................................................ iv
Combining Multiple Pages onto a Single Page ......................................................... vi
Copying 2-Sided Originals onto 1-Sided Pages....................................................... vii
Copying onto Envelopes .......................................................................................... vii
How to Read This Manual .....................................................................................1
Symbols .....................................................................................................................1
Name of Major Item....................................................................................................1
Functions Requiring the ARDF.............................................................................2
Display ....................................................................................................................3
Reading the Display ...................................................................................................3
Using the Keys on the Control Panel .........................................................................4
User Tools Menu (Copier Features) .....................................................................5
1. Placing Originals
Originals .................................................................................................................7
Sizes and Weights of Recommended Originals.........................................................7
Sizes Selectable as Regular Size Originals ...............................................................9
Missing Image Area .................................................................................................10
Placing Originals..................................................................................................11
Original Orientation ..................................................................................................11
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass.................................................................12
Placing Originals in the ARDF..................................................................................13
Specifying the Original Size When a Paper Tray is Selected ..................................14
Specifying the Original Size When the Bypass Tray is Selected .............................17
2. Copying
viii
Basic Procedure...................................................................................................21
Copying from the Bypass Tray...........................................................................23
Loading Paper on the Bypass Tray..........................................................................23
When Copying onto Regular Size Paper .................................................................25
When Copying onto Custom Size Paper..................................................................26
When Copying onto OHP Transparencies ...............................................................27
When Copying onto Thick Paper .............................................................................28
When Copying onto Envelopes................................................................................30
Copy Functions....................................................................................................34
Adjusting Image Density ..........................................................................................34
Original Type Setting................................................................................................34
Selecting Copy Paper ..............................................................................................35
Preset Reduce/Enlarge ............................................................................................36
Zoom ........................................................................................................................37
Sort........................................................................................................................... 39
Duplex ......................................................................................................................41
One-Sided Combine.................................................................................................44
Two-Sided Combine.................................................................................................47
Series Copies...........................................................................................................50
3. Appendix
Combination Chart...............................................................................................53
Supplementary Information ................................................................................54
INDEX......................................................................................................... 57
ix
x
How to Read This Manual
Note
❒ For proper use of this product, be sure to read About This Machine first.
❒ Supplementary information about the copier mode is described in “Supplementary Information”.
Reference
p.54 “Supplementary Information”
Symbols
This manual uses the following symbols:
Indicates important safety notes.
Ignoring these notes could result in serious injury or death. Be sure to read these
notes. They can be found in the “Safety Information” section of About This Machine.
Indicates important safety notes.
Ignoring these notes could result in moderate or minor injury, or damage to the
machine or to property. Be sure to read these notes. They can be found in the
“Safety Information” section of About This Machine.
Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations
of likely causes of paper misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure
to read these explanations.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instructions on resolving user errors.
This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find further relevant information.
[]
Indicates the names of keys that appear on the machine's display panel.
{}
Indicates the names of keys on the machine's control panel.
Name of Major Item
Major item of this machine is referred to as follows in this manual:
• Auto document feeder capable of scanning both sides of a sheet → ARDF
1
Functions Requiring the ARDF
The following functions are available when the ARDF is installed:
❖ Duplex
• 2 Sided → 2 Sided
❖ One-Sided Combine
• 2 Sided 1 Page → Combine 1 Side
• 2 Sided 2 Pages → Combine 1 Side
❖ Two-Sided Combine
• 2 Sided 2 Pages → Combine 2 Sides
• 2 Sided 4 Pages → Combine 2 Sides
❖ Series Copies
• 2 Sided → 1 Sided
2
Display
This section explains how to read the display and how to use the selection keys
on the copy display.
Note
❒ The copy display is set as the default screen when the machine is turned on.
Reading the Display
❖ Initial copy display
ARC054S
1. Displays operational status and
messages.
2. Displays the current paper tray
3. Displays the number of copies set.
4. Displays frequently used functions.
and selected items that appear in
brackets.
3
Using the Keys on the Control Panel
ARC033S
4
1. Selection keys
2. {Escape} key
Correspond to items at the bottom line on
the display.
Example: copy display
Press to cancel an operation or return to
the previous display.
• When the instruction “press [Reduce]”
appears in this manual, press the left
selection key.
• When the instruction “press [Enlarge]”
appears in this manual, press the center selection key.
• When the instruction “press [Zoom]”
appears in this manual, press the right
selection key.
Press to set a selected item or entered numeric value.
3. {OK} key
4. Scroll keys
Press to move the cursor to each direction
one by one.
When {U}, {T}, {V}, or {W} key appears
in this manual, press the scroll key of the
same direction.
User Tools Menu (Copier Features)
This section describes items you can set in the copier feature. The copier features
screen can be displayed by pressing the {User Tools/Counter} key. For details
about how to set up these items, see General Settings Guide.
Item
Description
Auto Tray Switching
If you load paper of the same size and in the same orientation in
two trays, the machine automatically shifts to the other tray when
the first tray runs out of paper (if [On] is selected.) This function is
called “Auto Tray Switching”. This setting specifies whether to
use Auto Tray Switching or not.
Original Type Setting
You can adjust copy finish quality level according to original type.
You can choose these functions after selecting [Original Type 1
(Text)] or [Original Type 2 (Photo)].
Duplex Mode Priority
You can select the type of Duplex function effective when the machine is turned on, reset, or modes are cleared.
Orientation
You can select the original orientation when using the Combine/Series, or two-sided originals to one-sided Duplex function.
The default setting is [Do not Specify].
Max. Number of Sets
The maximum copy quantity can be set between 1 and 99 using
the number keys.
Original Count Display
You can set to display the count of originals and copying pages on
the display when [On] is selected.
Reproduction Ratio
You can select which reduce, enlarge, or input ratio is shown on
the display with priority when [Reduce] or [Enlarge] is selected.
Preset R/E Priority
You can set the ratio with priority when [R/E] is selected.
Duplex Margin
Specify left margin on the back side of copies, and top margin on
the front side.
Letterhead Setting
If you select [On] for this function, the machine rotates the image
correctly.
Menu Protect
You can prevent unauthenticated users from changing the user
tools settings.
5
6
1. Placing Originals
This chapter describes the types of originals you can set and how to place originals.
Originals
This section describes the types of originals that can be placed, and missing image area.
Sizes and Weights of Recommended Originals
The following describes recommended paper sizes and weights, and non-compatible originals for the ARDF.
❖ Metric version
Where original is
placed
Original size
Original weight
Exposure glass
Up to A4
--
ARDF
One-sided originals:
52-105 g/m2
A4L – A5KL
Two-sided originals:
52–105 g/m2
A4L – A5L
❖ Inch version
Where original is
placed
Original size
Exposure glass
Up to 81/2" × 14"
ARDF
One-sided originals:
Original weight
-14-28 lb.
8 /2" × 14"L – 5 /2" × 8 /2"KL
1
1
1
Two-sided originals:
14–28 lb.
8 /2" × 14"L – 5 /2" × 8 /2"L
1
1
1
Note
❒ About 50 originals (80 g/m2, 20 lb.) can be placed in the ARDF.
❒ Do not place 2-sided originals in the ARDF if they are 17 lb. or less in weight
and 13" or more in length. Place them on the exposure glass instead.
7
Placing Originals
Non-compatible originals for the ARDF
Placing the following types of originals in the ARDF can cause paper misfeeds
or light and black lines, or result in damage to the originals. Place these originals
on the exposure glass instead.
• Originals other than those specified in “Sizes and Weights of Recommended
Originals”
• Stapled or clipped originals
• Perforated or torn originals
• Curled, folded, or creased originals
• Pasted originals
• Originals with any kind of coating, such as thermal fax paper, art paper, aluminum foil, carbon paper, or conductive paper
• Originals with perforated lines
• Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts
• Sticky originals such as translucent paper
• Thin or highly flexible originals
• Thick originals such as postcards
• Bound originals such as books
• Transparent originals such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper
• Originals that are still wet with ink or correction fluid
1
Note
❒ The original might become dirty if it is written with a pencil or a similar tool.
8
Originals
Sizes Selectable as Regular Size Originals
You can select the following original sizes on the display:
A4L *1 , B5 JISL *2 , A5KL, 8 1/2" × 14"L, 8 1/2" × 13"L, 8 1/2" × 11"L *3 ,
8 1/4" × 14"L, 8 1/4" × 13"L, 8" × 13"L, 5 1/2" × 8 1/2"KL
*1
*2
*3
1
Default size for the metric version
JIS: Japanese Industrial Standard
Default size for the inch version
Maximum scanning area
❖ Exposure glass
ARC053S
❖ ARDF
ARC022S
Note
❒ When you copy custom size originals, make sure you specify the size of the
originals. If not, the image may not be copied properly.
❒ For 2-sided originals that can be placed in the ARDF, the horizontal size is
160-356 mm (6.3"-14").
Reference
p.14 “Specifying the Original Size When a Paper Tray is Selected”
p.17 “Specifying the Original Size When the Bypass Tray is Selected”
9
Placing Originals
Missing Image Area
Even if you correctly place originals in the ARDF or on the exposure glass, margins of a few millimeters on all four sides of the original might not be copied.
1
GCGENK2E
1 0.5-4.5 mm (0.02"-0.18")
2 1.0-5.0 mm (0.04"-0.20")*
3 0.5-3.5 mm (0.02"-0.14")
4 1.0-5.0 mm (0.04"-0.20")
* Back of 2-sided copy: 2.2-6.2 mm (0.09"-0.25")
10
Placing Originals
Placing Originals
This section describes the procedure for placing originals on the exposure glass
and in the ARDF.
Take care to place originals after any correction fluid and ink has completely
dried. Not taking this precaution could cause marks on the exposure glass that
will be copied onto paper.
1
Reference
p.7 “Originals”
Original Orientation
You can set the original orientation in the following ways.
Originals
ARDF
Exposure
glass
GCCO600E
set23EE
Note
❒ Originals should be aligned to the rear left corner when placing them on the
exposure glass. However, some copy functions may produce different results
depending on the orientation of the originals. For details, see the explanations
of each function.
Reference
p.41 “Duplex”
p.44 “One-Sided Combine”
p.47 “Two-Sided Combine”
p.50 “Series Copies”
11
Placing Originals
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass
Place originals on the exposure glass.
1
Important
❒ Do not lift the exposure glass cover or ARDF forcefully. Otherwise, it will be
damaged, or the cover of the ARDF might open.
A Lift the exposure glass cover or ARDF.
B Place the original face down on the exposure glass. The original should be
aligned with the rear left corner.
Start with the first page to be copied.
ARC043S
1 Positioning mark
2 Left scale
C Lower the exposure glass cover or ARDF.
12
Placing Originals
Placing Originals in the ARDF
Place originals in the ARDF.
Settings should be made when placing custom size originals.
1
❖ When placing custom size originals:
See p.14 “Specifying the Original Size When a Paper Tray is Selected” and
p.17 “Specifying the Original Size When the Bypass Tray is Selected”.
❖ ARDF
ARC011S
A Adjust the document guide to the original size.
B Set the aligned originals face up into the ARDF.
Do not stack originals beyond the limit mark.
The first page should be on the top.
Be sure not to place originals or other objects on the top cover. Doing so may
cause a malfunction.
ARC023S
1 Limit mark
2 Document guide
13
Placing Originals
Note
❒ Originals that are 160 mm or less along the feed direction, such as A5K or
51/2" × 81/2"K, may jam inside the ARDF when you make duplex copies.
❒ Thin originals (64 g/m2, 17 lb. or less) that are 310 mm (13") or more along
the feed direction, such as 81/2" × 14"L or 8" × 13"L, may jam inside the
ARDF when you make duplex copies.
❒ Straighten curls in the originals before placing them in the ARDF.
❒ To prevent multiple sheets from being fed at once, fan the originals before
placing them in the ARDF.
❒ Set the originals squarely.
1
Specifying the Original Size When a Paper Tray is Selected
You can select either regular or custom for the size of the original when a paper
tray is selected.
Regular sizes
When placing regular size originals on the exposure glass or in the ARDF, select
the size of the originals from the regular sizes shown on the display.
If you do not specify the original size, the machine will make copies on the paper
size in the tray selected. When copy paper size and original size differ, you need
to specify the original size as follows:
A Select a desired paper tray using {U} or {T}.
B Press the {q} key.
C Select [Regular Size] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
14
Placing Originals
D Select the original size using the scroll keys, and then press the {OK} key.
1
The “Programmed” message appears.
When the regular size originals settings are registered,
on the top of the copy display.
appears
Note
❒ To cancel the size you have set, press the {Clear Modes} key.
Custom sizes
When placing custom size originals on the exposure glass or in the ARDF, specify the size of the originals using the number keys.
Important
❒ Original sizes that can be set with this function are:
• ARDF: vertical 139-216 mm (5.5"-8.5"), horizontal for 1-sided originals 1391260 mm (5.5"-49.6"), horizontal for 2-sided originals 160-356 mm (6.3"-14")
• Exposure glass: vertical 139-216 mm (5.5"-8.5"), horizontal 160-356 mm
(6.3"-14")
A Select a desired paper tray using {U} or {T}.
B Press the {q} key.
C Select [Custom Size] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
15
Placing Originals
D Enter the horizontal size of the original (Horiz.) with the number keys, and
then press the {OK} key.
1
ARC009S
1 Vertical size
2 Horizontal size
E Enter the vertical size of the original (Vert.) with the number keys, and then
press the {OK} key.
The “Programmed” message appears.
When the custom size originals settings are registered,
on the top of the copy display.
appears
Note
❒ If you make a mistake in step D or E, press the {Clear/Stop} key, and then
enter the value again.
❒ To cancel the size you have set, press the {Clear Modes} key.
16
Placing Originals
Specifying the Original Size When the Bypass Tray is Selected
You can select either regular or custom for the size of the original when the bypass tray is selected.
1
Regular sizes
When placing regular size originals on the exposure glass or in the ARDF, select
the size of the originals from the regular sizes shown on the display.
If you do not specify the original size, the machine will make copies on the paper
size in the tray selected. When copy paper size and original size differ, you need
to specify the original size as follows:
A Select the bypass tray
using {U} or {T}.
B Press the {q} key.
C Select [Original Size] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [Regular Size] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
17
Placing Originals
E Select the original size using the scroll keys, and then press the {OK} key.
1
The “Programmed” message appears.
When the regular size originals settings are registered,
on the top of the copy display.
appears
Note
❒ To cancel the size you have set, press the {Clear Modes} key.
Custom sizes
When placing custom size originals on the exposure glass or in the ARDF, specify the size of the originals using the number keys.
Important
❒ Original sizes that can be set with this function are:
• ARDF: vertical 139-216 mm (5.5"-8.5"), horizontal for 1-sided originals 1391260 mm (5.5"-49.6"), horizontal for 2-sided originals 160-356 mm (6.3"-14")
• Exposure glass: vertical 139-216 mm (5.5"-8.5"), horizontal 160-356 mm
(6.3"-14")
A Select the bypass tray
using {U} or {T}.
B Press the {q} key.
C Select [Original Size] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
18
Placing Originals
D Select [Custom Size] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
1
E Enter the horizontal size of the original (Horiz.) with the number keys, and
then press the {OK} key.
F Enter the vertical size of the original (Vert.) with the number keys, and then
press the {OK} key.
The “Programmed” message appears.
When the custom size originals settings are registered,
on the top of the copy display.
appears
Note
❒ If you make a mistake in step E or F, press the {Clear/Stop} key, and then
enter the value again.
❒ To cancel the size you have set, press the {Clear Modes} key.
19
Placing Originals
1
20
2. Copying
This chapter describes procedures for making copies in various modes.
Basic Procedure
This section describes the basic procedure for making copies.
Important
❒ When User Code Authentication is set, enter your user code (up to eight digits) with the number keys so that the machine accepts copy jobs. See “Authentication Information”, General Settings Guide.
❒ When Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server Authentication is set, enter your login user name
and password so that the machine accepts copy jobs. Ask the administrator
for the login user name and password. For details, see “When the Authentication Screen is Displayed”, About This Machine.
A Make sure "Ready" appears on the screen.
If any other function is displayed, press the {Copy} key.
❖ Initial copy display
B Make sure no previous settings remain.
When there are previous settings remaining, press the {Clear Modes} key.
C Place the originals.
D Make desired settings.
E Enter the number of copies using the number keys.
The maximum copy quantity that can be set is 99.
21
Copying
F Press the {Start} key.
2
ARC044S
The machine starts copying.
When placing originals on the exposure glass, press the {q} key after all
originals are scanned.
Copies are delivered face down.
Note
❒ Always log off when you have finished using the machine to prevent unauthorized users from using the machine.
❒ To stop the machine during a multicopy run, press the {Clear/Stop} key.
❒ To return the machine to its initial state after copying, press the {Clear
Modes} key.
❒ To clear an entered value, press the {Clear/Stop} key.
Reference
p.11 “Placing Originals”
“When the Authentication Screen is Displayed”, About This Machine
22
Copying from the Bypass Tray
Copying from the Bypass Tray
Use the bypass tray to copy onto OHP transparencies, thick paper, envelopes,
and paper that cannot be loaded in the paper trays.
Important
❒ Paper that has a vertical length of 90-216 mm (3.55"-8.50") and a horizontal
length of 139-600 mm (5.48"-23.62") can be copied from the bypass tray. However, when paper larger than 356 mm (14.02") in size is used, the paper may
become wrinkled, may not be fed into the machine, or may cause paper jams.
2
❒ You cannot use the duplex function when copying from the bypass tray.
Reference
“Copy Paper”, About This Machine
Loading Paper on the Bypass Tray
Use the bypass tray to copy onto OHP transparencies, thick paper, envelopes
and paper that cannot be loaded in the paper trays.
Important
❒ When copying on OHP transparencies or paper heavier than 157 g/m2 (about 42 lb.)
you need to specify the type and size of paper.
❒ The maximum number of sheets you can load into the bypass tray depends
on the paper type. Load only as much paper as can be held between the paper
guides on the bypass tray.
A Open the bypass tray.
ABU027S
23
Copying
B Push up the release lever.
2
ZFOY310E
1 Release lever
C Align the paper guides to the paper size, and then insert the paper face
down.
If the guides are not flush against the paper, images might be skewed or paper misfeeds might occur.
Load only as much paper as can be held between the guides on the bypass
tray. Overloading the bypass tray can result in misfeeds and skewed images.
To support A4L, 81/2" × 11"L, or larger paper sizes, pull out the extender.
To prevent multiple sheets from being fed at once, fan paper before placing it
on the tray.
ZFOY250E
1 Horizontal size
2 Vertical size
3 Extender
4 Paper guides
24
Copying from the Bypass Tray
D Pull down the release lever.
2
ARC013S
1 Release lever
The bypass tray is selected on the display.
E Select the size and type of the paper, if required.
Note
❒ If the bypass tray
is not selected on the display in step D, select
using
{U} or {T}, and then press the {q} key.
❒ When Panel Key Sound is turned off, the beeper will not sound even if you
insert paper into the bypass tray.
When Copying onto Regular Size Paper
Makes copies onto regular size paper from the bypass tray.
A Load paper face down on the bypass tray.
B Select the bypass tray using {U} or {T}.
C Press the {q} key.
D Select [Paper Size] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
25
Copying
E Select [Regular Size] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
F Select the paper size using the scroll keys, and then press the {OK} key.
2
The “Programmed” message appears.
G Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
H When the copy job is finished, press the {Clear Modes} key to clear the settings.
Reference
p.23 “Loading Paper on the Bypass Tray”
When Copying onto Custom Size Paper
Makes copies onto custom size paper from the bypass tray.
A Load paper face down on the bypass tray.
B Select the bypass tray using {U} or {T}.
C Press the {q} key.
D Select [Paper Size] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Select [Custom Size] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
26
Copying from the Bypass Tray
F Enter the horizontal size of the paper (Horiz.) with the number keys, and
then press the {OK} key.
2
G Enter the vertical size of the paper (Vert.) with the number keys, and then
press the {OK} key.
The “Programmed” message appears.
H Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
I When the copy job is finished, press the {Clear Modes} key to clear the settings.
Note
❒ If you make a mistake in step F or G, press the {Clear/Stop} key, and then
enter the value again.
Reference
p.23 “Loading Paper on the Bypass Tray”
When Copying onto OHP Transparencies
When copying onto OHP transparencies, select [OHP (Transparency)] in Paper
Type.
Important
❒ OHP transparencies must be loaded face down in the tray with the notched
corner of the sheet in the appropriate corner of the tray.
❒ Load OHP transparencies one at time in the bypass tray. This prevents multiple sheets being fed in together, which can cause jams and misprints.
❒ Remove copied sheets from the internal tray one by one.
A Load OHP transparencies face down on the bypass tray.
B Select the bypass tray using {U} or {T}.
C Press the {q} key.
27
Copying
D Select [Paper Type] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Select [OHP (Transparency)] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
2
The “Programmed” message appears.
F Select the paper size, if required.
G Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
H When the copy job is finished, press the {Clear Modes} key to clear the settings.
Note
❒ Printing on OHP transparencies is slower than printing on plain paper.
Reference
p.23 “Loading Paper on the Bypass Tray”
When Copying onto Thick Paper
When copying onto thick paper, select [Thick Paper] in Paper Type.
Important
❒ To prevent multiple sheets from being fed at once, fan paper before placing it
on the tray.
A Load thick paper face down on the bypass tray.
B Select the bypass tray using {U} or {T}.
C Press the {q} key.
D Select [Paper Type] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
28
Copying from the Bypass Tray
E Select [Thick Paper] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
The “Programmed” message appears.
2
F Select the paper size, if required.
G Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
H When the copy job is finished, press the {Clear Modes} key to clear the settings.
Note
❒ Printing on thick paper is slower than printing on plain paper.
Reference
p.23 “Loading Paper on the Bypass Tray”
29
Copying
When Copying onto Envelopes
When copying onto envelopes, select the envelope size in Paper Size, and [Thick
Paper] in Paper Type.
Important
❒ Before loading envelopes, use a pen or similar to flatten their edges.
2
ALZ050S
ALZ051S
30
Copying from the Bypass Tray
❖ Printable area
The following areas of envelopes can be printed on:
2
ARB024S
1 Feeding direction
2 Printable area
3 10 mm (0.4")
4 10 mm (0.4")
5 10 mm (0.4")
❖ Orientation of Originals and Envelopes
Originals and envelopes must be placed in the same orientation.
To minimize waste and time, check that originals and envelopes are loaded
in the same orientation.
ARB025S
The illustration shows the orientation of originals and envelopes.
1 Original on the exposure glass
2 Envelope on the bypass tray
3 Top
4 Bottom
5 Horizontal size
6 Vertical size
31
Copying
A Load envelopes face down on the bypass tray.
2
ARC014S
1 Release lever
B Select the bypass tray using {U} or {T}.
C Press the {q} key.
D Select [Paper Size] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Select [Regular Size] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
F Select the envelope size using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
The “Programmed” message appears.
G Press the {q} key.
32
Copying from the Bypass Tray
H Select [Paper Type] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
I Select [Thick Paper] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
2
The “Programmed” message appears.
J Place the original, and then press the {Start} key.
K When the copy job is finished, press the {Clear Modes} key to clear the settings.
Note
❒ When copying on a small-sized envelope, align the flap to the paper guide
on the left.
ABU050S
Reference
p.23 “Loading Paper on the Bypass Tray”
33
Copying
Copy Functions
Adjusting Image Density
You can adjust the image density in five levels. If you want darker or lighter copies, adjust the image density accordingly.
2
A Press the {Lighter} or {Darker} key to adjust the image density.
The density indicator moves.
ARC045S
The image density changes in five increments as follows:
ABU042S
Original Type Setting
Select one of the following original types to match your originals:
❖ Text
Select this mode when your originals contain only text (no pictures).
34
❖ Photo
Delicate tones of photographs and pictures can be reproduced with this mode.
• When copying developed photographs
• When copying photographs or pictures that are printed on paper (e.g.
magazines)
• When copying originals generated by color copiers
Copy Functions
A Press the {Original} key to select the original type.
The indicator of the selected original type goes on.
2
ARC046S
Reference
“Original Type Setting”, General Settings Guide
Selecting Copy Paper
Choose a tray containing the paper you want to copy onto: the paper trays or the
bypass tray.
A Select a desired tray using {U} or {T}.
The selected tray and paper size are displayed.
Reference
p.23 “Copying from the Bypass Tray”
35
Copying
Preset Reduce/Enlarge
You can select a preset reduce or enlarge ratio for copying.
2
❖ Base Point
The base point of Reduce/Enlarge differs depending on how the original is
scanned. When the original is set on the exposure glass, the upper left corner
will be the base point. When it is set in the ARDF, the bottom left corner of the
original will be the base point.
The figure below is the resulting copy images that differ depending on how
the original is scanned.
GCKA031e
1 Base point when placing on the exposure glass
2 Base point when placing in the ARDF
A Press [R/E].
36
Copy Functions
B Press [Enlarge] or [Reduce].
C Select a ratio using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
2
The “Programmed” message appears.
D Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
Reference
“Reproduction Ratio”, General Settings Guide
“Preset R/E Priority”, General Settings Guide
Zoom
You can change the reproduction ratio in increments of 1%.
Selecting a ratio using the scroll keys
Select a ratio using {U} or {T}.
A Press [R/E].
37
Copying
B Select a preset ratio which is close to the desired ratio with [Enlarge] or [Reduce], and then press [Zoom].
2
C Specify a ratio using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
Pressing {U} or {T} changes the ratio in increments of 1%. Pressing and holding down the relevant key changes the ratio in increments of 10%.
The “Programmed” message appears.
D Place the original, and then press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ If you make a mistake in step C, readjust it using {U} or {T}.
Entering a ratio with the number keys
Select a ratio using the number keys.
A Press [R/E].
B Press [Zoom].
38
Copy Functions
C Enter the desired ratio with the number keys, and then press the {OK} key.
The “Programmed” message appears.
2
D Place the original, and then press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ If you make a mistake in step C, press the {Clear/Stop} key, and then enter
the value again.
Sort
The machine assembles copies as sets in sequential order.
A Press the {Sort} key.
ARC047S
The indicator goes on.
B Enter the number of copy sets using the number keys.
39
Copying
C Place the originals.
When placing originals on the exposure glass, start with the first page to be
copied. When placing originals in the ARDF, set the first page on the top.
D Press the {Start} key.
When placing originals on the exposure glass, press the {q} key after all
originals are scanned.
2
Note
❒ To cancel the Sort function in step A, press the {Sort} key again. Make sure
the indicator goes off.
Changing the number of sets
You can change the number of copy sets during copying.
Important
❒ This function can only be used when the Sort function is turned on.
A While "Copying..." is displayed, press the {Clear/Stop} key.
B Press [Sets].
C Enter the number of copy sets with the number keys, and then press
[Resume].
Copying starts again.
Note
❒ The number of sets you can enter in step C differs depending on when the
{Clear/Stop} key is pressed.
40
Copy Functions
Duplex
There are two types of Duplex available.
Important
❒ You cannot use the bypass tray with this function.
❖ 1 Sided → 2 Sided
Copies 2 one-sided pages to 1 two-sided page.
2
❖ 2 Sided → 2 Sided
Copies 1 two-sided page to 1 two-sided page.
Note
❒ The ARDF is required to scan two-sided originals.
41
Copying
Original orientation and completed copies
The resulting copy image will differ according to the orientation in which you
place the originals (vertical K or horizontal L).
The table shows the orientation of images on the front and back of copies, not the
orientation of delivery.
2
GCRYOU1E
A Press the {Duplex} key.
ARC048S
The indicator goes on.
42
Copy Functions
B Select the duplex mode using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select the original orientation using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
2
key.
D Select the duplex orientation using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
The “Programmed” message appears.
E Place the originals.
When placing originals on the exposure glass, start with the first page to be
copied. When placing originals in the ARDF, set the first page on the top.
F Press the {Start} key.
When placing originals on the exposure glass, press the {q} key after all
originals are scanned.
Note
❒ The paper weight that can be used with duplex copying is 64-90 g/m2 (20-24 lb.)
❒ To cancel the Duplex function in step A, press the {Duplex} key again. Make
sure the indicator goes off.
❒ To display the screens in steps C and D , select [Always Specify] for [Orientation] with Copier Features in User Tools. If [Do not Specify] is selected, proceed to step E.
❒ You can change the margins of duplex copies.
Reference
“Duplex Margin”, General Settings Guide
“Orientation”, General Settings Guide
43
Copying
One-Sided Combine
Combines several pages to one side of a sheet.
There are four types of One-Sided Combine available.
❖ 1 Sided 2 Pages → Combine 1 Side
Copies 2 one-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
2
GCSHVY7J
❖ 1 Sided 4 Pages → Combine 1 Side
Copies 4 one-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
GCSHVY8J
❖ 2 Sided 1 Page → Combine 1 Side
Copies 1 two-sided original to one side of a sheet.
GCSHVYOJ
44
Copy Functions
❖ 2 Sided 2 Pages → Combine 1 Side
Copies 2 two-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
2
GCSHVYBJ
Note
❒ The ARDF is required to scan two-sided originals.
❒ You cannot apply this function to sheets of 357 mm or longer that are fed from
the bypass tray.
Original orientation and image position of Combine
Open to left (K) originals
GCSHUY3E
Open to top (L) originals
GCSHUY4E
45
Copying
Placing originals (originals placed in the ARDF)
• Originals read from left to right
Combine5
2
• Originals read from top to bottom
Combine6
A Press the {Combine/Series} key.
ARC049S
The indicator goes on.
B Select the combine mode using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select the original orientation using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
The “Programmed” message appears.
46
Copy Functions
D Select the paper size using {U} or {T}.
E Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
2
Note
❒ To cancel the One-Sided Combine function in step A, press the {Combine/Series} key again. Make sure the indicator goes off.
❒ To display the screen in step C, select [Always Specify] for [Orientation] with
Copier Features in User Tools. If [Do not Specify] is selected, proceed to step
D.
Reference
“Orientation”, General Settings Guide
Two-Sided Combine
Combines various pages of originals onto one two-sided sheet.
There are four types of Two-Sided Combine.
Important
❒ You cannot use the bypass tray with this function.
❖ 1 Sided 4 Pages → Combine 2 Sides
Copies 4 one-sided originals to one sheet with two pages per side.
GCSHVY9J
47
Copying
❖ 1 Sided 8 Pages → Combine 2 Sides
Copies 8 one-sided originals to one sheet with four pages per side.
2
GCSHVYAE
1 Front
2 Back
❖ 2 Sided 2 Pages → Combine 2 Sides
Copies 2 two-sided originals to one sheet with two pages per side.
GCSHVY1E
❖ 2 Sided 4 Pages → Combine 2 Sides
Copies 4 two-sided originals to one sheet with four pages per side.
GCSHVY2E
1 Front
2 Back
48
Copy Functions
A Press the {Combine/Series} key.
2
ARC049S
The indicator goes on.
B Select the combine mode using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select the original orientation using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
D Select the duplex orientation using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
The “Programmed” message appears.
E Select the paper size using {U} or {T}.
F Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
49
Copying
Note
❒ The ARDF is required to scan 2-sided originals.
❒ To cancel the Two-Sided Combine function in step A, press the {Combine/Series} key again. Make sure the indicator goes off.
❒ To display the screens in steps C and D, select [Always Specify] for [Orientation] with Copier Features in User Tools. If [Do not Specify] is selected, proceed to step E.
2
Reference
“Orientation”, General Settings Guide
Series Copies
You can separately copy the front and back of a two-sided original onto two
sheets.
❖ 2 Sided→1 Sided
Copies each side of a two-sided original to two separate pages.
A Press the {Combine/Series} key.
ARC049S
The indicator goes on.
50
Copy Functions
B Select [Series:2Sided Orig.] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select the original orientation using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
2
key.
The “Programmed” message appears.
D Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ The ARDF is required to scan 2-sided originals.
❒ To cancel the Series Copies function in step A, press the {Combine/Series}
key again. Make sure the indicator goes off.
❒ To display the screen in step C, select [Always Specify] for [Orientation] with
Copier Features in User Tools. If [Do not Specify] is selected, proceed to step
D.
Reference
“Orientation”, General Settings Guide
51
Copying
2
52
3. Appendix
Combination Chart
This chapter describes the copy machine's specifications and the function compatibility.
The combination chart given below shows which modes can be used together.
Blank : These modes can be used together.
: These modes cannot be used together. The second mode selected will be the
mode you are working in.
The following shows the combinations of functions.
ARC010S
*1
*2
*3
*4
Originals that are 357 mm or longer cannot be used with the two-sided original function.
This combination is not available on paper that is 357 mm or longer.
The mode selected second changes the reduce/enlarge ratio.
An error message appears if you specify these combinations. You cannot make copies until one of the functions is canceled.
53
Appendix
Supplementary Information
The following describes the detailed specifications of the respective functions.
❖ Bypass Tray Copy
• The following paper sizes can be selected.
A4L, A5KL, B5 JISL, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 13"L, 81/4" × 14"L,
81/4" × 13"L, 8" × 13"L, 81/2 " × 11"L, 71/4" × 101/2"L, 51/2" × 81/2"KL,
16KL, C6 EnvelopeL, C5 EnvelopeL, DL EnvelopeL, 41/8" × 91/2"L,
37/8" × 71/2"L
3
❖ Preset Reduce/Enlarge
• You can select one of five preset ratios (two enlargement ratios, three reduction ratios). To change a ratio assigned to Preset Reduce/Enlarge, use
Copier Features in User Tools.
• Any ratio can be specified as a User R/E Ratio.
• The machine's preset Reduce/Enlarge ratios are listed below.
❖ Metric version
Original → Paper size
Ratio (%)
200 *1 (enlarge area by 4)
A6→A4
141 *1 (enlarge area by 2)
A5→A4
122
--
115
--
93 *1
--
87
-8" × 13"→A4
82
71
1
(reduce area by /2)
A4→A5
65
--
50 *1 (reduce area by 1/4)
A4→A6
*1
54
*1
Default settings
Supplementary Information
❖ Inch version
Original → Paper size
Ratio (%)
200 (enlarge area by 4)
--
155 *1 (enlarge area by 2)
51/2" × 81/2" → 81/2" × 14"
129 *1
51/2" × 81/2" → 81/2" × 11"
121
--
93 *1
--
85
81/2" × 13" → 81/2" × 11"
78 *1
81/2" × 14" → 81/2" × 11"
73
--
65 *1
81/2" × 11" → 51/2" × 81/2"
50 (reduce area by 1/4)
--
*1
3
Default settings
• You can select a ratio regardless of the size of an original or paper. With
some ratios, parts of the image might not be copied or margins will appear
on copies.
❖ Zoom
• The reproduction ratios you can specify are 50–200 %.
• You can select a ratio regardless of the size of an original or paper. With
some ratios, parts of the image might not be copied or margins will appear
on copies.
❖ Duplex
• The following paper sizes and orientations can be duplexed.
A4L, B5 JISL, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 13"L, 81/2" × 11"L, 81/4" × 14"L,
81/4" × 13"L, 16KL
• You cannot use the following paper with this function:
• Paper smaller than B5 JISL or 8 1/2" × 11"L
• Paper thicker than 90 g/m2 (24 lb.)
• Paper thinner than 64 g/m2 (17 lb.)
• Translucent paper
• Label paper (adhesive labels)
• OHP transparencies
• Thick paper
• Envelopes
• When an odd number of originals is placed in the ARDF, the back of the
last page of copied paper is blank.
• During copying, the image is shifted to allow for the binding margin.
55
Appendix
❖ Combine
• In this mode, the machine selects the reproduction ratio automatically.
This reproduction ratio depends on paper size and the number of originals.
• The reproduction ratios selectable by the machine are 50–200 %.
• If the calculated ratio is under the minimum ratio, it is automatically adjusted to within the available range. However, with some ratios, parts of
the image might not be copied.
• If the orientation of originals is different from that of the paper, the machine will automatically rotate the image by 90° to make copies properly.
• If the number of originals placed is less than the number specified for combining, the last page segment is left blank as shown.
3
❖ Duplex Margin
• If you set a binding margin that is too wide, parts of the image may not be
copied.
• When making copies using the Combine function, a binding margin is
added to copies after the images are combined.
56
INDEX
D
1 Sided 2 Pages to Combine 1 Side, 44
1 Sided 4 Pages to Combine 1 Side, 44
1 Sided 4 Pages to Combine 2 Sides, 47
1 Sided 8 Pages to Combine 2 Sides, 47
1 Sided to 2 Sided, 41
2 Sided 1 Page to Combine 1 Side, 44
2 Sided 2 Pages to Combine 1 Side, 44
2 Sided 2 Pages to Combine 2 Sides, 47
2 Sided 4 Pages to Combine 2 Sides, 47
2 Sided to 1 Sided, 50
2 Sided to 2 Sided, 41
Darker key, 34
Display, 3
Document guide, 13
Duplex, 41, 54
Duplex key, 41
Duplex Margin, 5, 54
Duplex Mode Priority, 5
E
Enlarge, 36
Envelopes, 30
Escape key, 4
Exposure glass, 9, 12
Extender, 23
A
Adjusting Image Density, 34
ARDF, 1, 2, 9, 13
Auto Tray Switching, 5
F
Functions Requiring the ARDF, 2
B
Base Point, 36
Basic procedure for making copies, 21
Book to 1 Sided, 50
Bypass Tray, 17, 23
Bypass Tray Copy, 54
C
Changing the Number of Sets, 40
Combination Chart, 53
Combine, 44, 47, 54
Combine/Series key, 45, 47, 50
Combining Multiple Pages onto a
Single Page, vi
Control Panel, 4
Copier Features, 5
Copy Functions, 34
Copying, 21
Copying 2-Sided Originals onto
1-Sided Pages, vii
Copying from the Bypass Tray, 23
Copying onto Custom Size Paper, 26
Copying onto Envelopes, vii, 30
Copying onto OHP transparencies, 27
Copying onto Regular Size Paper, 25
Copying onto Thick Paper, 28
Copy key, 21
Copy Paper, 35
Custom size originals, 15, 18
Custom Size Paper, 26
H
Horizontal size, 15, 18, 23, 26
How to Read This Manual, 1
I
Image Position of Combine, 44
Initial copy display, 3, 21
K
Keys on the Control Panel, 4
L
Letterhead Setting, 5
Lighter key, 34
Limit mark, 13
Loading Paper on the Bypass Tray, 23
M
Maximum scanning area, 9
Max. Number of Sets, 5
Menu Protect, 5
Missing Image Area, 10
N
Non-compatible originals for the ARDF, 8
Number keys, 15, 18, 21, 26, 38, 39, 40
57
O
OHP transparencies, 27
OK key, 4
One-Sided Combine, 44
Orientation, 5
Orientation of Originals and Envelopes, 30
Original Count Display, 5
Original Orientation, 11, 41, 44
Originals, 7
Original size, 7, 9
Original Type key, 34
Original Type Setting, 5, 34
Original weight, 7
P
Paper, 35
Paper guides, 23
Paper Tray, 14
Photo, 34
Placing custom size originals, 15, 18
Placing Originals, 7, 11
Placing Originals in the ARDF, 13
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass, 12
Placing regular size originals, 14, 17
Positioning mark, 9
Preset Reduce/Enlarge, 36, 54
Preset R/E Priority, 5
Printable area, 10, 30
R
Ratio, 37, 38, 54
Reading the Display, 4
Recommended originals, 7
Reduce, 36
Regular size originals, 14, 17
Regular Size Paper, 25
Release lever, 23
Reproduction Ratio, 5
58
S
Scroll keys, 4, 37
Selecting a Paper Tray, 14
Selecting Copy Paper, 35
Selecting the Bypass Tray, 17
Selection keys, 4
Series Copies, 50
Sizes Selectable as Regular Size Originals, 9
Sort, 39, 54
Sort key, 39
Supplementary Information, 54
Symbols, 1
T
Text, 34
Thick paper, 28
Two-Sided Combine, 47
Types of Duplex Copies, iv
U
User Tools, 5
Using the Keys on the Control Panel, 4
V
Vertical size, 15, 18, 23, 26
W
What You Can Do with This Machine, iv
Z
Zoom, 37, 54
EN
USA
B262-7550
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:
a means POWER ON.
c means STAND BY.
Trademarks
Acrobat® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
Copyright © 2006
Operating Instructions Copy Reference
Type for 816/DSm416/LD016/Aficio MP 161
Type for 816f/DSm416f/LD016f/Aficio MP 161F
Type for 816mf/DSm416pf/LD016spf/Aficio MP 161SPF
EN USA B262-7550
Download PDF